Biến Tần Simen Manual

SINAMICS G120
Frequency inverters with the Control Units

CU230P-2 HVAC
CU230P-2 DP
CU230P-2 CAN
Operating Instructions · 07/2010
SINAMICS
Answers for industry.
___________________
Introduction 1
___________________
Description 2
___________________
Connecting 3
SINAMICS
___________________
Commissioning 4
SINAMICS G120
Frequency inverters with Control ___________________
Configuring the terminal strip 5
Units
CU230P-2 HVAC, ___________________
Connection to a fieldbus 6
CU230P-2 DP,
CU230P-2 CAN ___________________
Functions 7
Operating Instructions
___________________
Service and maintenance 8
___________________
Alarms, faults and system
messages 9
___________________
Technical data 10
07/2010 Edition, firmware V4.3.2
Original instructions
07/2010, FW 4.3.2
A5E02430659B AB
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E02430659B AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2009,

Industry Sector Ⓟ 06/2010 2010.
Postfach 48 48 Technical data subject to change
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 11
1.1 About this manual ........................................................................................................................11
1.2 Guide through this manual...........................................................................................................12
1.3 Overview of documentation .........................................................................................................13
1.4 Adapting inverter to application....................................................................................................15
1.4.1 General basics .............................................................................................................................15
1.4.2 Parameter ....................................................................................................................................16
1.4.3 Parameters with follow-on parameterization................................................................................16
1.4.4 Parameter changes, which subsequently result in internal calculations......................................17
1.5 Frequently required parameters...................................................................................................18
1.6 Extended scope for adaptation ....................................................................................................20
1.6.1 BICO technology: basic principles ...............................................................................................20
1.6.2 BICO technology: example ..........................................................................................................22
2 Description............................................................................................................................................... 25
2.1 Modularity of the converter system ..............................................................................................25
2.2 Control Units ................................................................................................................................27
2.3 Power Module ..............................................................................................................................28
2.4 Reactors and filters ......................................................................................................................32
3 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 33
3.1 Procedure for installing the frequency inverter ............................................................................33
3.2 Installing reactors and filters ........................................................................................................34
3.3 Installing Power Module...............................................................................................................36
3.3.1 Dimensions, hole drilling templates, minimum clearances, tightening torques ...........................37
3.3.2 Connection overview for Power Modules ....................................................................................48
3.3.3 Connecting the line supply and motor .........................................................................................49
3.3.4 EMC-compliant connection ..........................................................................................................51
3.3.5 EMC-compliant installation for devices with degree of protection IP55 / UL Type 12 .................54
3.4 Installing Control Unit...................................................................................................................57
3.4.1 Interfaces, connectors, switches, control terminals, LEDs on the CU .........................................59
3.4.2 Terminal strips of the CU .............................................................................................................60
3.4.3 Wiring terminal strips ...................................................................................................................61
4 Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 63
4.1 Typical commissioning scenarios ................................................................................................63
4.2 Preparing commissioning.............................................................................................................65
4.3 Commissioning with factory settings............................................................................................68
4.3.1 Prerequisites for using the factory settings..................................................................................68
4.3.2 Inverter factory setting .................................................................................................................68
4.3.3 Default terminal settings ..............................................................................................................70
4.3.4 Wiring examples for the factory settings......................................................................................72
Frequency inverters with Control Units CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 DP, CU230P-2 CAN
Operating Instructions, 07/2010, FW 4.3.2, A5E02430659B AB 5
Table of contents
4.4 Commissioning with the BOP-2 .................................................................................................. 74

4.4.1 Inserting the BOP-2..................................................................................................................... 74
4.4.2 Menu structure ............................................................................................................................ 75
4.4.3 Changing parameter values. ....................................................................................................... 76
4.4.4 Basic commissioning................................................................................................................... 77
4.4.5 Additional settings ....................................................................................................................... 78
4.5 Commissioning with STARTER .................................................................................................. 79
4.5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 79
4.5.2 Requirements.............................................................................................................................. 79
4.5.3 Installing USB drivers.................................................................................................................. 80
4.5.4 Creating a STARTER project ...................................................................................................... 82
4.5.5 Establishing an online connection between the PC and converter (going "online") ................... 85
4.5.6 Basic commissioning................................................................................................................... 86
4.5.7 Additional settings ....................................................................................................................... 89
4.6 Back-up the settings and transfer ............................................................................................... 91
4.6.1 External data backup and series commissioning........................................................................ 91
4.6.2 Backing up and transferring settings using STARTER ............................................................... 91
4.6.3 Saving setting on memory card .................................................................................................. 92
4.6.4 Transferring the setting from the memory card........................................................................... 94
4.6.5 Safely remove the memory card ................................................................................................. 95
4.6.6 Other ways to back up settings ................................................................................................... 95
4.6.7 Backing up and transferring settings using BOP-2 ..................................................................... 92
4.7 Restoring the factory setting ....................................................................................................... 96
5 Configuring the terminal strip ................................................................................................................... 97
5.1 Preconditions .............................................................................................................................. 97
5.2 Digital inputs................................................................................................................................ 97
5.3 Digital outputs ............................................................................................................................. 99
5.4 Analog inputs ............................................................................................................................ 100
5.5 Analog outputs .......................................................................................................................... 103
6 Connection to a fieldbus ........................................................................................................................ 105
6.1 Data exchange via the fieldbus................................................................................................. 106
6.2 Setting the bus address via DIP switch..................................................................................... 107
6.3 Communication via RS485........................................................................................................ 108
6.3.1 Integrating inverters into a bus system via the RS485 interface............................................... 108
6.3.2 Communication via USS ........................................................................................................... 109
6.3.2.1 General information about communication with USS via RS485.............................................. 109
6.3.2.2 Structure of a USS telegram ..................................................................................................... 111
6.3.2.3 User data range of the USS telegram....................................................................................... 112
6.3.2.4 Data structure of the USS parameter channel .......................................................................... 113
6.3.2.5 USS read request...................................................................................................................... 118
6.3.2.6 USS write job ............................................................................................................................ 118
6.3.2.7 USS process data channel (PZD)............................................................................................. 119
6.3.2.8 Telegram monitoring ................................................................................................................. 120
6.3.3 Communication over Modbus RTU........................................................................................... 122
6.3.3.1 Parameters for Modbus communication settings...................................................................... 122
6.3.3.2 Modbus RTU telegram .............................................................................................................. 124
6.3.3.3 Baud rates and mapping tables ................................................................................................ 125
6.3.3.4 Write and read access via FC 3 and FC 6 ................................................................................ 128
6 Operating Instructions, 07/2010, FW 4.3.2, A5E02430659B AB
Table of contents
6.3.3.5 Communication procedure.........................................................................................................130

6.3.4 Communication via BACnet MS/TP ...........................................................................................132
6.3.4.1 Parameters for setting communication via BACnet ...................................................................132
6.3.4.2 Supported services and objects.................................................................................................135
6.4 Communication via PROFIBUS .................................................................................................141
6.4.1 Configuring communication via PROFIBUS ..............................................................................141
6.4.1.1 Task ...........................................................................................................................................141
6.4.1.2 Required components................................................................................................................142
6.4.1.3 Setting the PROFIBUS address.................................................................................................143
6.4.1.4 Creating a STEP 7 project .........................................................................................................143
6.4.1.5 Inserting the inverter into the STEP 7 project ............................................................................145
6.4.2 Communication parameters.......................................................................................................146
6.4.3 Cyclic communication ................................................................................................................147
6.4.3.1 Control and status words ...........................................................................................................149
6.4.3.2 Data structure of the parameter channel ...................................................................................152
6.4.4 Acyclic communication...............................................................................................................157
6.4.5 STEP 7 program examples........................................................................................................158
6.4.5.1 STEP 7 program example for cyclic communication .................................................................158
6.4.5.2 STEP 7 program example for acyclic communication ...............................................................160
6.5 Communication over CANopen .................................................................................................164
6.5.1 Connecting inverter to CAN bus ................................................................................................164
6.5.2 Interconnecting the CAN control word .......................................................................................166
6.5.3 Objects to access SINAMICS parameters.................................................................................166
6.5.4 CANopen functionality of the CU230P-2 CAN...........................................................................168
6.5.5 General CANopen functions ......................................................................................................169
6.5.5.1 Network management (NMT service) ........................................................................................170
6.5.5.2 PDO and PDO services .............................................................................................................173
6.5.5.3 PDO mapping.............................................................................................................................177
6.5.5.4 SDO services .............................................................................................................................178
6.5.6 Communication objects..............................................................................................................181
6.5.6.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................181
6.5.6.2 Configuration objects .................................................................................................................181
6.5.6.3 Free objects ...............................................................................................................................188
6.5.6.4 Objects in drive profile DSP402 .................................................................................................189
7 Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 191
7.1 Overview of the inverter functions..............................................................................................191
7.2 Inverter control ...........................................................................................................................193
7.3 Command sources.....................................................................................................................194
7.4 Setpoint sources ........................................................................................................................195
7.4.1 Selecting the setpoint source.....................................................................................................195
7.4.2 Analog input as setpoint source.................................................................................................196
7.4.3 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source..............................................................................196
7.4.4 Fixed speed as setpoint source .................................................................................................198
7.4.5 Running the motor in jog mode (JOG function) .........................................................................200
7.4.6 Specifying the motor speed via the fieldbus ..............................................................................201
7.5 Setpoint calculation....................................................................................................................201
7.5.1 Minimum speed and maximum speed .......................................................................................201
7.5.2 Ramp-function generator ...........................................................................................................202
7.6 Motor control ..............................................................................................................................203
7.6.1 V/f control ...................................................................................................................................204
7.6.1.1 V/f control with linear characteristic ...........................................................................................204
Table of contents
7.6.1.2 Additional characteristics for the V/f control.............................................................................. 205

7.6.1.3 Optimizing with a high break loose torque and brief overload .................................................. 206
7.6.2 Vector control ............................................................................................................................ 208
7.6.2.1 Properties of vector control ....................................................................................................... 208
7.6.2.2 Commissioning vector control ................................................................................................... 208
7.6.2.3 Torque control ........................................................................................................................... 209
7.7 Protection functions................................................................................................................... 210
7.7.1 Inverter temperature monitoring................................................................................................ 210
7.7.2 Motor temperature monitoring using a temperature sensor...................................................... 211
7.7.3 Protecting the motor by calculating the motor temperature ...................................................... 212
7.7.4 Overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................. 213
7.7.5 Limiting the maximum DC link voltage...................................................................................... 214
7.7.6 Load torque monitoring (system protection) ............................................................................. 215
7.7.7 Load failure monitoring via digital input..................................................................................... 217
7.8 Status messages....................................................................................................................... 219
7.8.1 System runtime ......................................................................................................................... 219
7.9 Technological functions............................................................................................................. 220
7.9.1 Braking functions of the converter ............................................................................................ 220
7.9.1.1 Comparison of electrical braking methods................................................................................ 220
7.9.1.2 DC braking ................................................................................................................................ 223
7.9.1.3 Compound braking.................................................................................................................... 225
7.9.1.4 Dynamic braking ....................................................................................................................... 227
7.9.1.5 Braking with regenerative feedback to the line ......................................................................... 229
7.9.2 Automatic restart and flying restart ........................................................................................... 229
7.9.2.1 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running ........................................................... 229
7.9.2.2 Automatic switch-on .................................................................................................................. 231
7.9.3 PID technology controller .......................................................................................................... 235
7.9.4 Logical and arithmetic functions using function blocks ............................................................. 236
7.10 HVAC functions......................................................................................................................... 240
7.10.1 Real time clock (RTC) ............................................................................................................... 240
7.10.2 Time switch (DTC) .................................................................................................................... 242
7.10.3 Temperature measurement via PT1000 or NI1000 .................................................................. 243
7.10.4 Emergency operation ................................................................................................................ 244
7.10.5 Multi-zone control...................................................................................................................... 249
7.10.6 Motor staging and autochange ................................................................................................. 252
7.10.7 Bypass....................................................................................................................................... 256
7.10.8 Hibernation ................................................................................................................................ 260
7.11 Switchover between different settings ...................................................................................... 267
7.11.1 Changing over the command data sets (manual, automatic) ................................................... 267
7.11.2 Switching over drive data sets (different motors connected to an inverter).............................. 270
8 Service and maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 273
8.1 Replacing the inverter components .......................................................................................... 273
8.2 Replacing Power Module and Control Unit ............................................................................... 276
8.2.1 Replacing the Control Unit ........................................................................................................ 276
8.2.2 Replacing the Power Module .................................................................................................... 277
9 Alarms, faults and system messages..................................................................................................... 279
9.1 Indicators (LEDs) ...................................................................................................................... 279
9.2 Operating states indicated on LEDs ......................................................................................... 280
9.3 Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 282
Table of contents
9.4 List of warnings ..........................................................................................................................285

9.5 Faults .........................................................................................................................................286
9.6 List of faults ................................................................................................................................290
10 Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 295
10.1 Technical data, CU230P-2 Control Unit.....................................................................................295
10.2 Technical data, Power Modules.................................................................................................297
10.2.1 Technical data, PM230 ..............................................................................................................299
10.2.3 Technical data, PM240-2 ...........................................................................................................310
10.2.5 Technical data, PM250-2 ...........................................................................................................316
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 323
Table of contents
Introduction 1
1.1 About this manual
Who requires the operating instructions and what for?

These operating instructions primarily address fitters, commissioning engineers and machine
operators. The operating instructions describe the devices and device components and
enable the target groups being addressed to install, connect-up, parameterize, and
commission the inverters safely and in the correct manner.
What is described in the operating instructions?

These operating instructions provide a summary of all of the information required to operate
the inverter under normal, safe conditions.
The information provided in the operating instructions has been compiled in such a way that
it is sufficient for all standard applications and enables drives to be commissioned as
efficiently as possible. Where it appears useful, additional information for entry level
personnel has been added.
The operating instructions also contain information about special applications. Since it is
assumed that readers already have a sound technical knowledge of how to configure and
parameterize these applications, the relevant information is summarized accordingly. This
relates, e.g. to operation with fieldbus systems and safety-related applications.
Mistakes and improvements

If you encounter mistakes when reading this manual or if you have any suggestions for how
it can be improved, please contact us at the following address or send your suggestion by E-
mail:
Siemens AG
Drive Technologies
Motion Control Systems
Postfach 3180
91050 Erlangen, Germany
E-mail (mailto:documentation.standard.drives@siemens.com)
If you have further questions

Further information is provided in the STARTER PC tool's online help, the parameter manual
and the installation instructions. In addition, you will find Internet product support: Product
support (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/4000024).
Introduction
1.2 Guide through this manual
1.2 Guide through this manual

In this manual, you will find background information on your inverter, as well as a full
description of the commissioning procedure:
%DVLFV ① Should you be unfamiliar with assigning

parameters to the inverter, background
,QYHUWHUSDUDPHWHUV information can be found here:
 Adapting inverter to application (Page 15)
 Frequently required parameters (Page 18)
,QYHUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
 Extended scope for adaptation (Page 20)
HJUHDFWRUVILOWHUVRSHUDWRUSDQHO
② Information on the inverter hardware can be
found here:
 Modularity of the converter system
(Page 25)
All information relating to the commissioning

6WDUWRIFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
of your inverter is located in the following
chapters:
,QVWDOODWLRQ
③  Procedure for installing the frequency
,QVWDOOLQJDQGZLULQJWKHLQYHUWHU inverter (Page 33)
$GDSWLQJWRDSSOLFDWLRQ ④  Commissioning (Page 63)

%DVLFFRPPLVVLRQLQJFRQILJXULQJLQWHUIDFHV  Configuring the terminal strip (Page 97)
VHWWLQJIXQFWLRQV  Connection to a fieldbus (Page 105)
'DWDEDFNXS
2QWKHKDUGGLVNRI\RXU3&3*RURQWKH ⑤  Back-up the settings and transfer

PHPRU\FDUG (Page 91)
(QGRIFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
0DLQWHQDQFHDQGGLDJQRVWLF ⑥ Information regarding the maintenance and

diagnostics of your inverter is located in the
5HSODFLQJFRPSRQHQWVGLVSOD\VDODUPV following chapters:
IDXOWV
 Service and maintenance (Page 273)
 Alarms, faults and system messages
7HFKQLFDOGDWD
(Page 279)
⑦ The most important technical data for your
inverter is located in this chapter:
 Technical data (Page 295)
Introduction
1.3 Overview of documentation

Manuals and software are available for every inverter application:
Table 1- 1 Documentation for SINAMICS G120
Planning and configuring Installation and Commissioning Service and maintenance

connection
SIZER --- --- ---
engineering tool
Configuration Manual --- --- ---
Selecting geared motors,
motors and inverters
using calculation
examples
Hardware Installation Manual, Power Modules --- Hardware Installation Manual,
Comprehensive information on every Power Power Modules
Module. Available for: (refer to the lefthand column)
● PM230
● PM240
● PM250
● PM260
Function Manual, Safety Integrated
Comprehensive information about the integrated safety functions of the CU240E-2 Control Unit
Operating instructions
Contains extensive information for most applications. Available for the following Control Units:
● CU230P-2
● CU240B-2 and CU240E-2
● CU240E and CU240S
--- --- STARTER
Commissioning tool
Getting Started ---
For entry level personnel to switch on the motor for the first time.
Available for Control Units:
● CU230P-2
● CU240B-2 and CU240E-2
● CU240E
● CU240S
--- --- Parameter Manual
Contains detailed lists of all parameters, alarms and faults as well as
graphic function block diagrams. Available for the following Control
Units:
● CU230P-2
● CU240B-2 and CU240E-2
● CU240E and CU240S
Introduction
This is how you find the software and the manuals
SIZER You obtain SIZER on a DVD

(Order number: 6SL3070-0AA00-0AG0)
and can be downloaded from the Internet:
SIZER (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10804987/130000)
Configuration Manual You can obtain the Configuration Manual from your local sales office
STARTER You obtain STARTER on a DVD (Order number: 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0)
and can be downloaded from the Internet:
STARTER (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10804985/130000)
Getting Started A paper copy of "Getting Started" is provided with each Control Unit
Operating instructions All of the manuals can be downloaded from the Internet:
and manuals Documentation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/133300)
and are also available on DVD:
SD Manual Collection - all of the manuals on low-voltage motors, geared motors and low-
voltage inverters, 5 languages
 Order number: 6SL3298-0CA00-0MG0 (supplied once)
 Order number: 6SL3298-0CA10-0MG0 (update service for 1 year; supplied 4 times)
Introduction
1.4 Adapting inverter to application
1.4.1 General basics
Adapting the inverter to the drive task

By means of commissioning with prompting, the inverter is adapted to the motor and the
drive task so that the motor can be optimally operated and protected.
Functions extending beyond commissioning are activated and adapted by changing
parameters directly.
Both commissioning and the parameterization of functions may be undertaken with one of
the following operating units:
● Keyboard and display unit (Operator Panel) that is snapped onto the inverter.
– BOP-2 Basic Operator Panel-2
– IOP Intelligent Operator Panel
● Software (STARTER commissioning tool) that allows the inverter to be parameterized
and controlled from a PC.
Inverters are especially used to improve and expand the starting and speed response of
motors.
Many standard applications can function with the default parameters set in the factory
Although inverters can be parameterized for very specific applications, many standard
applications can be configured by means of just a few parameters.
Use the factory settings (where possible)

For basic applications, commissioning can be carried out using just the factory settings (see
Commissioning with factory settings (Page 68)).
Use quick commissioning (for simple, standard applications)

In the majority of standard applications, commissioning can be carried out by entering or
changing just a few parameters during quick commissioning.
Introduction
1.4.2 Parameter
There are two types of parameters, adjustable and display parameters.
Adjustable parameters
Adjustable parameters are preceded with the letter "P". You can change the value of these
parameters within a defined range.
Example:
P0305 is the parameter for the rated motor current in Amps. This parameter is set during
commissioning. You can enter values between 0.01 and 10000.
Change protection for setting parameters

The process of changing parameter values is subject to certain conditions. If an attempt to
change a parameter is rejected by the inverter, this can have a number of causes:
1. The inverter operating state does not allow you to change parameters.
For example, certain parameters can only be changed when the inverter is in
commissioning mode.
2. In some cases, you may not be able to change certain parameters due to automatic
follow-on parameterization.
Example: Use P0922 to define the PROFIdrive telegram that the inverter uses to
communicate with the higher-level control. As follow-on parameterization, P0840 (source
of the ON/OFF1 command), for example, is assigned a permanent protected value
depending on the value of P0922.
For each parameter, the List Manual specifies whether and which conditions apply for
changing the values.
Display parameters
Display parameters are preceded with the letter "r". You cannot change the value of these
parameters.
Example:
r0027 is the parameter for the inverter output current. The inverter measures the current and
writes the current value to the parameter. You can display the parameter value, e.g. using an
analog output of the inverter.
1.4.3 Parameters with follow-on parameterization

When you change certain parameters, the system may automatically change other
parameters accordingly. This makes it much easier to parameterize complex functions.
Example: Parameter P0700 (command source)
Parameter P0700 can be used to switch the command source from the fieldbus to digital
inputs. When the value of P0700 is changed from 6 (command source "fieldbus") to 2
(command source "digital inputs"), other parameter values are changed automatically:
Introduction
● New functions are assigned to the digital inputs (P0701 ... P0713)
● New functions are assigned to the digital outputs (P0731 ... P0733)
● Inverter control is interconnected with the signals from the digital inputs (P0800, P0801,
P0840, etc.)
You will find more information about follow-on parameterization for P0700 in the List Manual.
1.4.4 Parameter changes, which subsequently result in internal calculations

When changing the following parameters, the inverter is busy with internal calculations for
several seconds. During this time, no entries are possible.
● p0014 Buffer mode
● p0340 Calculation of control parameters
● p0970 DO/reset drive
● p0971 DO/save drive
● p1082 Maximum speed
● p3235 Phase failure monitoring time
● p3900 Completion quick commissioning
● p1030 Motorized potentiometer config
● p2230 Tech motorized potentiometer config
● p0918 PROFIBUS address
● p2020 Fieldbus baud rate
● p2021 Fieldbus address
● p2030 Fieldbus selection
● p2042 PROFIBUS ident
● p8620 CAN address
● p0804 Data copy, MMC - flash
● p1900 MotID
This state "busy with internal calculations" is displayed as follows:
● at the BOP-2: "Busy"
● at the IOP: Progress bars
Further, the state can also be read-out using p3996:
● r3996 = 0 Inputs possible
● r3996 > 0 Inverter busy, inputs not possible
Introduction
1.5 Frequently required parameters
Parameters that in many cases help
Table 1- 2 How to switch to commissioning mode or restore the factory setting
Parameter Description
P0010 Commissioning parameters
0: Ready (factory setting)
1: Perform quick commissioning
3: Perform motor commissioning
5: Technological applications and units
15: Define number of data records
30: Factory setting - initiate restore factory settings
Table 1- 3 How to determine the firmware version of the Control Unit
r0018 The firmware version is displayed:
Table 1- 4 This is how you select the command source of the control signals (ON/OFF, reversing) of the inverter
P0700 2: Digital inputs (P0701 … P0709); factory setting for inverters without PROFIBUS interface
6: Fieldbus (P2050 … P02091), factory setting for inverters with PROFIBUS interface
Table 1- 5 This is how you select the setpoint source for the speed
P1000 0: No main setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
2: Analog setpoint; factory setting for inverters without PROFIBUS interface
3: Fixed speed setpoint
6: Fieldbus; factory setting for inverters with PROFIBUS interface
7: Analog setpoint 2
Table 1- 6 This is how you parameterize the up and down ramps
P1080 Minimum speed
0.00 [rpm] factory setting
P1082 Maximum speed
1500.000 [rpm] factory setting
P1120 Rampup time
10.00 [s]
P1121 Rampdown time
10.00 [s]
Introduction
Table 1- 7 This is how you set the closed-loop type
P1300 0: V/f control with linear characteristic
1: V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: V/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
4: V/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
5: V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency (textile area)
6: V/f control for drive requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7: V/f control with parabolic characteristic and ECO
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Speed control (without encoder)
22: Torque control (without encoder)
Table 1- 8 This is how you optimize the starting behavior of the V/f control for a high break loose torque and overload
P1310 Voltage boost to compensate ohmic losses
The voltage boost is active from standstill up to the rated speed.
It is at its highest at speed 0 and continually decreases as the speed increases.
Value of voltage boost at zero speed in V:
1.732 × rated motor current (P0305) × stator resistance (r0395) × P1310 / 100%
P1311 Voltage boost when accelerating
The voltage boost is effective from standstill up to the rated speed.
It is independent of the speed and has a value in V of:
1.732 × rated motor current (P305) × stator resistance (P350) × P1311 / 100%
Introduction
1.6 Extended scope for adaptation
1.6.1 BICO technology: basic principles
Principle of operation of BICO technology

Open/closed-loop control functions, communication functions as well as diagnostic and
operator functions are implemented in the inverter. Every function comprises one or several
BICO blocks that are interconnected with one another.
Inputs Parameter Output
MOP enable (higher)

p1035 MOP output
speed
[rpm]
MOP enable (lower) MOP r1050
p1036
Figure 1-1 Example of a BICO block: Motorized potentiometer (MOP)
Most of the BICO blocks can be parameterized. You can adapt the blocks to your application
using parameters.
You cannot change the signal interconnection within the block. However, the interconnection
between blocks can be changed by interconnecting the inputs of a block with the appropriate
outputs of another block.
The signal interconnection of the blocks is realized, contrary to electric circuitry, not using
cables, but in the software.
p0840 ON/
DI 0 r0722.0 Index [0] OFF1
Figure 1-2 Example: Signal interconnection of two BICO blocks for digital input 0
Binectors and connectors

Connectors and binectors are used to exchange signals between the individual BICO blocks:
● Connectors are used to interconnect "analog" signals. (e.g. MOP output speed)
● Binectors are used to interconnect "digital" signals. (e.g. 'Enable MOP up' command)
Introduction
Definition of BICO technology

BICO technology represents a type of parameterization that can be used to disconnect all
internal signal interconnections between BICO blocks or establish new connections. This is
realized using Binectors and Connectors. Hence the name BICO technology. ( Binector
Connector Technology)
BICO parameters
You can use the BICO parameters to define the sources of the input signals of a block.
Using BICO parameters you define from which connectors and binectors a block reads-in its
input signals. This is how you "interconnect" the blocks stored in the devices according to
your particular application requirements. The five different BICO parameter types are shown
in the following diagram:
pxxxx
%LQHFWRULQSXW rxxxx %LQHFWRURXWSXW
%, %2
BICO block rxxxx %LQHFWRUFRQQHFWRU

rxxxx RXWSXW
&2%2
pxxxx
&RQQHFWRULQSXW rxxxx &RQQHFWRURXWSXW
&, &2
Figure 1-3 BICO symbols
Binector/connector outputs (CO/BO) are parameters that combine more than one binector
output in a single word (e.g. r0052 CO/BO: status word 1). Each bit in the word represents a
digital (binary) signal. This summary reduces the number of parameters and simplifies
parameter assignment.
BICO outputs (CO, BO, or CO/BO) can be used more than once.
When do you need to use BICO technology?
BICO technology allows you to adapt the inverter to a wide range of different requirements.
This does not necessarily have to involve highly complex functions.
Example 1: Assign a different function to a digital input.
Example 2: Switch the speed setpoint from the fixed speed to the analog input.
What precautions should you take when using BICO technology?
Always apply caution when handling internal interconnections. Note which changes you
make as you go along since the process of analyzing them later can be quite difficult.
The STARTER commissioning tool offers various screens that make it much easier for you
to use BICO technology. The signals that you can interconnect are displayed in plain text,
which means that you do not need any prior knowledge of BICO technology.
Introduction
What sources of information do you need to help you set parameters using BICO
technology?
● This manual is sufficient for simple signal interconnections, e.g. assigning a different
significance to the to digital inputs.
● The parameter list in the List Manual is sufficient for signal interconnections that go
beyond just simple ones.
● You can also refer to the function diagrams in the List Manual for complex signal
interconnections.
1.6.2 BICO technology: example
Example: Shifting a basic PLC functionality into the inverter

A conveyor system is to be configured in such a way that it can only start when two signals
are present simultaneously. These could be the following signals, for example:
● The oil pump is running (the required pressure level is not reached, however, until after
five seconds)
● The protective door is closed
The task is realized by inserting free blocks between the digital input 0 and the internal
ON/OFF1 command and interconnecting them.
p20161 = 5 p20159 = 5,0 [s]
p20158 T 0
DI 0 r0722.0 Index [0] r20160 p20032 = 5 p20033 = 440
PDE 0
p20030
p20162 = 430 Index [0] p0840
& ON/
DI 1 r0722.1 Index [1]
1 Index [2] AND 0 r20031 Index [0]
OFF1
1 Index [3]
Figure 1-4 Example: Signal interconnection for interlock
The signal of digital input 0 (DI 0) is fed through a time block (PDE 0) and is interconnected
with the input of a logic block (AND 0). The signal of digital input 1 (DI 1) is interconnected to
the second input of the logic block. The logic block output issues the ON/OFF1 command to
switch-on the motor.
Table 1- 9 Parameterizing an interlock
P0700 = 2 Selecting the command source: Digital inputs
P0701 = 0 Enable ("open") digital input 0 (DI 0) for BICO parameterization
P0702 = 0 Enable ("open") digital input 1 (DI 1) for BICO parameterization
P20161 = 5 The time block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time slice of
128 ms)
Introduction
P20162 = 430 Run sequence of the time block within runtime group 5 (processing before
the AND logic block)
P20032 = 5 The AND logic block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time
slice of 128 ms)
P20033 = 440 Run sequence of the AND logic block within runtime group 5 (processing
after the time block)
P20159 = 5.0 Setting the delay time of the time block: 5 seconds
P20158 = 722.0 Connect the status of DI 0 to the input of the time block
r0722.0 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 0.
P20030 [0] = 20160 Interconnecting the time block to the 1st input of the AND
P20030 [1] = 722.1 Interconnecting the status of DI 1 to the 2nd AND input
r0722.1 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 1.
P0840 = 20031 Interconnecting the AND output to the control command ON/OFF1
Explanation of the example using the ON/OFF1 command

Open the default signal interconnection for BICO parameterization
After selecting the digital inputs as command source (P0700 = 2), digital input 0 is
automatically interconnected to the ON/OFF1 command. Parameter P0840[0] has the value
722.0.
p0840 ON/
Figure 1-5 Interconnect the BICO block DI 0 and ON/OFF1 command
The setting P0701 = 0 means that this interconnection is disconnected.
p0840[0] = 0
p0840 ON/
Figure 1-6 Disconnect the default interconnection: p0840[0] = 0
The "ON/OFF1 command" can now be interconnected again using BICO parameterization.
The binector input of the BICO block ON/OFF1 is interconnected with the output of the AND
logic block (P0840 = 20031).
p0840[0] = 20031
p20030
Index [0] p0840 ON/
& r20031 Index [0] OFF1
Index [1]
AND 0
Index [2]
Index [3]
Figure 1-7 Interconnecting two BICO blocks by setting p0840[0] = 20031
Introduction
Principle when connecting BICO blocks using BICO technology

An interconnection between two BICO blocks comprises a connector or binector and a BICO
parameter. The interconnection is always established from the perspective of the input of a
particular BICO block. This means that the output of an upstream block must always be
assigned to the input of a downstream block. The assignment is always made by entering
the number of the connector/binector from which the required input signals are read in a
BICO parameter.
This interconnection logic involves the question: where does the signal come from?
Description 2
2.1 Modularity of the converter system
Thanks to their modular design, the inverters can be used in a wide range of applications
with respect to functionality and power.
The following overview describes the inverter components, which you require for your
application.
Main components of the inverter
Each SINAMICS G120 inverter comprises a Control Unit

and Power Module.
 The Control Unit controls and monitors the Power
Module and the connected motor in various control
modes (which can be selected as required). The
Control Unit is used to control the inverter locally or
centrally.
 The Power Modules are available for motors with a
power range of between 0.37 kW and 250 kW.
3RZHU0RGXOH &RQWURO8QLW
Description
2.1 Modularity of the converter system
Components for commissioning, diagnostics and controlling inverters
Intelligent Operator Panel (IOP)

 Operator panel for convenient commissioning, diagnostics and controlling of
inverters
 As handheld device or on the inverter itself
 Properties:
– Copies drive parameters
– Plain text display
– Menu-based operation and application wizards.
Basic Operator Panel-2 (BOP-2)
 Operator panel for commissioning, diagnostics and controlling of inverters.
 is plugged onto the inverter
 Properties:
– Copies drive parameters
– Two-line display
– Guided commissioning
Memory card (MMC or SD) for carrying out standard commissioning of more than
one inverter and for external data backup.
PC Connection Kit, comprising STARTER DVD and USB cable for connecting an
inverter to a computer
Components which you require depending on your particular application
Filters and reactors

● Line filters, Classes A and B
● Line reactors
● Braking resistors
● Output reactors
● Sine-wave filters
Further options
● Adapter for DIN rail mounting (only PM240, FSA)
● Shield connection kit (for Control Units and Power Module)
Description
2.2 Control Units
2.2 Control Units

The CU230P 2 Control Units have integrated technology functions for pumps, fans and
compressor applications. The I/O interfaces, the fieldbus interface and the specific software
functions optimally support these applications. The integration of technological functions is a
significant differentiating feature to the other Control Units of the SINAMICS G120 drive
family.
CU230P-2-specific functions
● Emergency operation
● Multi-zone controller
● Motor staging
● Hibernation
● Bypass
The CU230P-2 is available with the following communications

interfaces:
 As CU230P-2 HVAC with RS485 interface for:
– USS
– Modbus RTU
– BACnet MS/TP
 As CU230P-2 DP for PROFIBUS DP
 As CU230P-2 CAN for CANopen
Description
2.3 Power Module
2.3 Power Module

Power Modules are available in various degrees of protection with a different topology in the
power range from between 0.37 kW up to 250 kW. The Power Modules are sub-divided into
various frame sizes (FS).
Figure 2-1 Power Module with degree of protection IP20, PM240, PM250, PM260
Figure 2-2 Power Module with degree of protection IP20, PM240-2, PM250-2
Description
2.3 Power Module
Table 2- 1 Power Module with degree of protection IP20
Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF FSGX

PM240, 3AC 400V - power units with integrated braking chopper2)
Power range (LO) 0.37 kW 2.2 kW 7.5 kW 18.5 kW 37 kW 55 kW 160 kW
… 1.5 kW … 4 kW … 15 kW … 30 kW … 45 kW … 132 kW … 250 kW
With integr. line filter, Class A ○ ● ● ● ● ◑1) ◑1)
PM240-2, 3AC 400V - power units with integrated braking chopper2)
Power range (LO) 0.55 kW --- --- --- --- --- ---
… 3 kW
With integr. line filter, Class A ○/● --- --- --- --- --- ---
PM250, 3AC 400V - power units capable of energy recovery
Power range (LO) --- --- 7.5 kW 18.5 kW 37 kW 55 kW ---
… 15 kW … 30 kW … 45 kW … 90 kW
With integr. line filter, Class A --- --- ● ● ● ● ---
PM250-2, 3AC 400V - power units capable of energy recovery
Power range (LO) 0.55 kW 4 kW --- --- --- --- ---
… 3 kW … 7.5 kW
With integr. line filter, Class A ○/● ○/● --- --- --- --- ---
Power range (LO) --- --- --- 11 kW --- 30 kW ---
… 18.5 k … 55 kW
W
With integr. line filter, Class A --- --- --- ○/● --- ○/● ---
With integr. sine-wave filter --- --- --- ● --- ● ---
● = Feature available; ○ = Feature not available; ◑ = Feature available, modified
1) PM240 Power Modules, 110 kW and higher, are only available without an integrated class A filter. Instead, an optional
class A line filter for lateral mounting is available.
2) The Power Module PM240 FSGX is delivered without braking chopper, but is prepared for installation of an optional
braking chopper.
Description
2.3 Power Module
Figure 2-3 PushThrough Power Modules, PM240-2, PM250-2
Table 2- 2 PushThrough Power Modules, PM240-2, PM250-2
Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF

PM240, 3AC 400V - power units with integrated braking chopper2)
Power range (LO) 2.2 kW --- --- --- --- ---
… 3 kW
With integr. line filter, Class A ○/● --- --- --- --- ---
Power range (LO) 3 kW 7.5 kW --- --- --- ---
With integr. line filter, Class A ○/● ○/● --- --- --- ---
Description
2.3 Power Module
Figure 2-4 PM230 Power Module, IP55 degree of protection / UL Type 12
Table 2- 3 Available Power Module with degree of protection IP55 / UL Type 12
Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF

PM230, 3AC 400V - power units with low line reactions
Power range 0.37 kW 4 kW 11 kW 22 kW 37 kW 55 kW
… 3 kW … 7.5 kW … 18.5 kW … 30 kW … 45 kW … 90 kW
With integr. line filter, Class A ● ● ● ● ● ●
With integr. line filter, class B ● ● ● ● ● ●
Note
The power data refer to a duty cycle for low overload ( LO)
Description
2.4 Reactors and filters
2.4 Reactors and filters
Overview
Depending on the Power Module, the following combinations with filters and reactors are
permitted:
Power Module Line-side components Load-side components

Line reactor Line filters Braking Sine-wave filter Output reactor
class B resistor
PM230 - - - - -
PM240 ● ● ● ● ●
PM250 - ● - ● ●
For further details, refer to the connection example in section Procedure for installing the
frequency inverter (Page 33).
Connecting 3
3.1 Procedure for installing the frequency inverter
Prerequisites for installing the inverter

Check that the following prerequisites are fulfilled before you install the inverter:
● Are the components, tools and small parts required for installation available?
● Are the ambient conditions permissible? See Technical data (Page 295).
● Have the cables and wires been routed in accordance with the applicable regulations?
See EMC-compliant connection (Page 51).
● Are the minimum distances from other equipment complied with? (Cooling sufficient?)
See Dimensions, hole drilling templates, minimum clearances, tightening torques
(Page 37).
Installation sequence
3UHUHTXLVLWHVIRULQVWDOODWL
RQKDYHEHHQIXOILOOHG
,QVWDOOLQJUHDFWRUV
DQGILOWHUV ① Installing reactors and filters (Page 34)
,QVWDOOLQJWKH3RZHU
0RGXOH ② Installing Power Module (Page 36)
,QVWDOOLQJ&RQWURO8QLW
③ Installing Control Unit (Page 57)

,QVWDOODWLRQFRPSOHWHG
You will find details on how to install the inverter in the Internet: Hardware Installation
Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/30563173/133300).
You can start to commission the inverter once installation has been completed.
Connecting
3.2 Installing reactors and filters
Fitting inverter system components in space-saving manner

Many inverter system components are designed as base components, that is, the
component is mounted on the baseplate and the inverter mounted above it to save space.
Up to two base components can be mounted above one another.
PM240
Line supply
Line
Line filter Line
Power reactor Power reactor
Modules Modules
Line supply
Basic layout of a PM240 Power Module with line PM240 Power Module frame size FSA with line
reactor as base component reactor and class A line filter
The line-side reactors are equipped with terminals while the reactors on the Power Module side are
equipped with a prefabricated cable. In the final installation position, the mains terminals are at the
top on frame sizes FSA to FSC, and at the bottom on frame sizes FSD to FSE.
For frame size FSA, in addition to the line reactor, a class A line filter can be used. In this case, the
mains connection is at the bottom.
Power Modules of frame size FSB and higher are available with integrated class A line filters (an
external class A line filter is not required in this case).
Line Line reactor
Line Output reactor Output reactor
supply Line filter
reactor or sine-wave or sine-wave
Power filter filter
Module Power
Module
Line
supply
to the motor
to the motor
PM240: frame size FSA with line reactor and PM240 Power Module frame size FSA with line
output reactor or sine-wave filter reactor, line filter and output reactor or sine-wave
filter
In installations containing more than two base-type system components (e.g. line filter + line reactor +
output reactor), the components must be installed to the side of the Power Module whereby the line
reactor and line filter are installed under the Power Module and the output reactor to the side.
Connecting
PM250
Line Line supply
Line filter supply
Output reactor or Power Line filter
Power Modules
Module sine-wave filter
to the motor
Basic layout of a PM250 Power Module with class Basic layout of a PM250 Power Module with a
B line filter as a base component class B line filter as a base component and
output reactor or sine-wave filter
Connecting
3.3 Installing Power Module
Options for installing Power Modules with degree of protection IP20

Depending on the format, various options are available for installing inverters. This manual
describes how to install inverters directly on the cabinet wall.
Installation options Frame size

A B C D E F GX
Installation on standard rails X X X --- --- --- ---
Mounting on a cabinet panel with shield connection kit X X X X X X ---
Installation directly on the cabinet wall X X X X X X X
Installing Power Modules

Choose the best installation option for your application and install the Power Module in
accordance with the instructions provided in this section.
Notes for installing Power Modules
The Power Module must not be installed horizontally.
&RUUHFW ,QFRUUHFW
Devices that could impede the flow of cooling air must not be installed in this area. Make
sure that the ventilation openings for the cooling air for the inverter are not covered and that
the flow of cooling air is not obstructed.
Installing additional components

Depending on the application, additional line reactors, filters, braking resistors, brake relays
etc., may also be used.
Please observe the mounting and installation instructions supplied with these components!
Connecting
3.3.1 Dimensions, hole drilling templates, minimum clearances, tightening torques
Note
For Power Modules up to 132 kW, degree of protection IP20, the CU230P-2 increases the
total inverter depth by 50 mm - and an additional 30 mm if you use an IOP.
Dimensions and drilling patterns for the PM230 Power Modules
:LGWK
E +HLJKW
D
Figure 3-1 Dimensions and drilling pattern PM230
Connecting
Table 3- 1 PM230 Power Module, IP55
PM230 Power Dimensions Clearances

IP55 kW Height Width Depth a b top bottom lateral
FSA 0.37 … 3 mm 460 154 238 445 132 100 100 0
inch 18.11 6.06 9.37 17.51 5.19 3.93 3.93 0
Fixing: M4 screws, Torque: 2.5 Nm / 22.1 lbf.in
FSB 4 … 7.5 mm 540 180 238 524 158 100 100 0
inch 21.25 17.08 9.37 20.62 5.90 3.93 3.93 0
FSC 11 … 18.5 mm 620 230 238 604 208 125 125 0
inch 24.40 9.05 9.37 23.77 8.18 4.92 4.92 0
FSD 22 … 30 mm 640 320 238 600 285 300 300 0
inch 25.19 12.59 9.37 23.62 11.22 11.81 11.81 0
Fixing: M8 screws, Torque: 13 Nm / 115 lbf.in
FSE 37 … 45 mm 751 320 238 710 285 300 300 0
inch 29.56 12.59 9.37 27.95 11.22 11.81 11.81 0
FSF 55 … 90 mm 915 410 238 870 370 300 300 0
inch 36.02 16.14 9.37 34.25 14.56 11.81 11.81 0
Connecting
:LGWK
E E
F
:LGWK
:LGWK E
E
F
+HLJKW
+HLJKW
)6*;
D
)6%)6)
D
+HLJKW
)6$
D
Figure 3-2 PM240 dimension drawing
Connecting
Table 3- 2 Dimensions for the PM240 Power Modules, IP20

IP20 kW Height Width Depth a b c top bottom lateral
FSA 0,37 … 1,5 mm 173 73 145 160 36,5 100 100 30*
inch 6,81 2,87 5,71 6,30 1,44 3,94 3,94 1,18*
FSB 2,2 … 4 mm 270 153 165 258 133 100 100 40*
inch 10,63 6,02 6,5 10,16 5,24 3,94 3,94 1,57*
FSC 7,5 … 15 mm 334 189 185 323 167 125 125 50*
inch 13,15 7,44 7,28 12,72 6,57 4,92 4,92 1,97*
FSD 18,5 … 30 mm 419 275 204 325 235 11 300 300 0
without inch 16,50 10,83 8,03 12,8 9,25 0,4 11,81 11,81 0
filter Fixing: M6 screws, Torque: 6 Nm / 53 lbf.in
FSD with 18,5 … 30 mm 512 275 204 419 235 11 300 300 0
filter, inch 20,16 10,83 8,03 16,50 9,25 0,4 11,81 11,81 0
Class A Fixing: M6 screws, Torque: 6 Nm / 53 lbf.in
FSE 37 … 45 mm 499 275 204 405 235 11 300 300 0
without inch 19,65 10,83 8,03 15,9 9,25 0,4 11,81 11,81 0
FSE with 37 … 45 mm 635 275 204 541 235 11 300 300 0
filter, inch 25,00 10,83 8,03 21,30 9,25 0,4 11,81 11,81 0
FSF 55 … 132 mm 634 350 316 598 300 11 350 350 0
without inch 24,96 13,78 12,44 23,54 11,81 0,4 13,78 13,78 0
FSF with 55 … 90 mm 934 350 316 899 300 11 350 350 0
filter, inch 36,77 13,78 12,44 35,39 11,81 0,4 13,78 13,78 0
FSGX 160 … 250 mm 1533 326 547 1506 125 14,5 250 150 50/0
inch 60,35 12,9 21,5 59,29 4,92 0,57 9,84 5,91 1,970
*) up to 40 °C without any lateral clearance
Connecting
Dimensions and drilling patterns for the PM240-2 Power Modules

:LGWK
E
+HLJKW
D
Figure 3-3 Dimensions and drilling pattern, PM240-2 IP20
Table 3- 3 Power Modules PM240-2, IP20
PM240-2 Power Dimensions Clearances

FSA 0,55 … 3 mm 196 73 165 186 36,5 61 100 100 30*
without / inch 7,72 2,87 6,50 7,32 1,44 2,40 3,94 3,94 1,18*
with filter Fixing: M4 screws, Torque: 2.5 Nm / 22.1 lbf.in
Connecting
D
&XWRXWLQWKH
+HLJKW
FRQWUROFDELQHW
F
IRUWKHKHDW
VLQN
D
G
H G
:LGWK
Figure 3-4 Dimensions and drilling pattern, PM240-2 PT
Table 3- 4 Power Module PM240-2, push-through

PT kW Heigh Width Depth a b c d e top bottom lateral
t
FSA 2,2 … 3 mm 226 126 165 103 106 188 9 88 100 100 0
without / inch 8,90 4,96 6,50 4,06 4,17 7,04 0,35 3,46 3,94 3,94 0
Connecting

:LGWK
E
F
+HLJKW
D
Figure 3-5 Dimensions and drilling patterns, PM250
Connecting
Table 3- 5 PM250 Power modules, IP20

FSC 7,5 … 15 mm 334 189 185 323 167 11 125 125 50*
inch 13,15 7,44 7,28 12,72 6,57 0,43 4,92 4,92 1,97*
FSD 18,5 … 30 mm 419 275 204 325 235 11 300 300 0
without inch 16,50 10,83 8,03 12,8 9,25 0,43 11,81 11,81 0
FSD with 18,5 … 30 mm 512 275 204 419 235 11 300 300 0
filter, inch 20,16 10,83 8,03 16,50 9,25 0,43 11,81 11,81 0
FSE with 37 … 45 mm 635 275 204 541 235 11 300 300 0
filter, inch 25,00 10,83 8,03 21,30 9,25 0,43 11,81 11,81 0
Class A
FSE 37 … 45 mm 499 275 204 405 235 11 300 300 0
without inch 19,65 10,83 8,03 15,9 9,25 0,43 11,81 11,81 0
FSF 55 … 90 mm 634 350 316 598 300 11 350 350 0
without inch 24,96 13,78 12,44 23,54 11,81 0,43 13,78 13,78 0
FSF with 55 … 90 mm 934 350 316 899 300 11 350 350 0
filter, inch 36,77 13,78 12,44 35,39 11,81 0,43 13,78 13,78 0
Connecting
Dimensions and drilling patterns for the PM250-2 Power Modules
:LGWK :LGWK
+HLJKW
+HLJKW
D
D
E E
Figure 3-6 Dimensions and drilling patterns, PM250-2, IP20
Table 3- 6 PM250-2 Power Modules, IP20

FSA 0,55 … 3 mm 196 73 165 186 61 36,5 100 100 30*
without / inch 7,72 2,87 6,50 7,32 2,40 1,44 3,94 3,94 1,18*
FSB 4… 7,5 mm 292 100 165 281 80 -- 100 100 30*
without / inch 11,50 3,94 6,50 11,06 3,15 -- 3,94 3,94 1,18*
Connecting
D
&XWRXWLQWKH
+HLJKW
FRQWUROFDELQHW
F
IRUWKHKHDW
VLQN
D
G
H G
:LGWK
Figure 3-7 Dimensions and drilling pattern, M250-2, PT
Table 3- 7 Power Module PM250-2, push-through

PT kW Heigh Width Depth a b c d e top bottom lateral
t
FSA 3 mm 226 126 165 103 106 188 9 88 100 100 0
without / inch 8,90 4,96 6,50 4,06 4,17 7,04 0,35 3,46 3,94 3,94 0
FSB 7,5 mm 315 154 165 147,5 134 188 10 117 100 100 0
without / inch 12,40 6,06 6,50 5,81 5,28 7,04 0,39 4,61 3,94 3,94 0
Connecting
Dimensions and drilling patterns of the Power Modules

:LGWK
E
F
+HLJKW
D
Figure 3-8 Dimensions and drilling pattern PM260
Table 3- 8 Power Module PM260, IP20

FSD 3 mm 511 275 195 419 235 11 100 100 30*
without / inch 20,12 10,83 7,68 16,5 9,3 0.43 3,94 3,94 1,18*
with filter Fixing: M6 screws, Torque: 6 Nm / 53 lbf.in
FSF 7,5 mm 634 350 307 598 300 11 100 100 0
without / inch 24,96 13,78 12,09 23,54 11,81 0.43 3,94 3,94 0
with filter Fixing: M8 screws, Torque: 13 Nm / 115 lbf.in
Connecting
3.3.2 Connection overview for Power Modules
/
/
/
3(
8 9 : 3(

/LQHUHDFWRU
8 9 : 3(
%UDNLQJ / / / 3( / / / 3(
UHVLVWRU /LQHILOWHUH[WHUQDO /LQHILOWHUH[WHUQDO

/ಬ /ಬ /ಬ 3(ಬ /ಬ /ಬ /ಬ 3(ಬ

3(
8 9 : 3(
3RZHU0RGXOH
30 5 5 8 9 : 3( 8 9 : 3(
8 9 : 3( 3RZHU0RGXOH
3RZHU0RGXOH30
30
8 9 : 3( 8 9 : 3(
8 9 : 3( 8 9 : 3(

6LQHZDYHILOWHURU 6LQHZDYHILOWHURU
2XWSXWUHDFWRU 2XWSXWUHDFWRU
8 9 : 3( 8 9 : 3(
8 9 : 8 9 : 8 9 :
3( 3( 3(
0 0 0
$FFHVVRULHV
Figure 3-9 Connections for PM230, PM240 and PM250 Power Modules
PM240 and PM250 Power Modules are available with and without integrated class A line
filters. Either a Class A or a Class B filter is integrated in the PM230 Power Module.
An external filter has to be installed in PM240 and PM250 Power Modules to satisfy more
stringent EMC requirements (Class B).
Connecting
3.3.3 Connecting the line supply and motor
Preconditions
Once the inverter has been properly installed, the line and motor connections can now be
established. The following warning information must be observed here.
WARNING
Line and motor connections
The inverter must be grounded on the line supply and motor side. If the inverter is not
correctly grounded, this can lead to extremely hazardous conditions which, under certain
circumstances, can result in death.
The device must be disconnected from the electrical power supply before any connections
with the device are established or in any way altered.
The inverter terminals be at hazardous voltages even after the inverter has been switched
off. After disconnecting the line supply, wait at least 5 minutes until the device has
discharged itself. Only then, carry out any installation and mounting work.
When connecting the inverter to the line supply, ensure that the motor terminal box is
closed.
Even if the LED or other indicators do not light up or remain inactive when a function is
switched from ON to OFF, this does not necessarily mean that the unit has been switched
off or is de-energized.
The short-circuit ratio of the power supply must be at least 100.
Make sure that the inverter is configured for the correct supply voltage (the inverter must
not be connected to a higher supply voltage).
If a residual-current circuit breaker is installed on the supply side of the electronic devices
to protect against direct or indirect contact, only type B is permissible. In all other cases,
other protective measures must be implemented, such as creating a barrier between the
electronic devices and the environment by means of double or reinforced insulation or
isolating them from the supply using a transformer.
CAUTION
Supply cable and signal lines
The signal lines must be routed separately from the supply cables to ensure that the
system is not affected by inductive or capacitive interference.
Note
Electrical protective equipment
Ensure that the appropriate circuit breakers / fuses for the inverter's rated current are fitted
between the line and inverter (see catalog D11.1).
Connecting
Connecting the motor: Star connection and delta connection
With SIEMENS motors, you will see a

'HOWDFRQQHFWLRQ 6WDUFRQQHFWLRQ
diagram of both connection methods
on the inside of the cover of the : 8 9
terminal box: : 8 9
 Star connection (Y) 8 9 :

8 9 :
 Delta connection (Δ)
The motor rating plate provides 8

information about the correct 8
connection data.
9 9
: :
Examples for operating the inverter and motor on a 400 V line supply
Assumption: The motor rating plate states 230/400 V Δ/Y.
Example 1: A motor is normally operated between standstill and its rated speed (i.e. a speed
corresponding to the line frequency). In this case, you need to connect the motor in Y.
Operating the motor above its rated speed is only possible in field weakening, i.e. the motor
torque available is reduced above the rated speed.
Example 2: If you want to operate the motor with the "87 Hz characteristic", you need to
connect the motor in Δ.
With the 87 Hz characteristic, the motor's power output increases. The 87 Hz characteristic
is mainly used with geared motors.
Connecting the inverter

Motor connection
● If available, open the terminal covers of the inverter.
● Connect the motor to terminals U2, V2 and W2.
Carefully observe the regulations for EMC-compliant wiring:
EMC-compliant connection (Page 51)
EMC-compliant installation for devices with degree of protection IP55 / UL Type 12
(Page 54)
● Connect the protective conductor of the motor to the terminal of the inverter.
The following cable lengths are permissible:
– Unshielded 100 m
– Shielded:
50 m for inverters without filter
25 m for inverters with filter
You will wind additional information in Catalog D11.1 for longer cable lengths
Connecting
Line supply connection

● Connect the line supply to terminals U1/L1, V1/L2 and W1/L3.
● Connect the protective conductor of the line supply to terminal PE of the inverter.
● If available, close the terminal covers of the inverter.
Note
Inverters without an integrated line filter can be connected to grounded (TN, TT) and non-
grounded (IT) line supply systems. The inverters with integrated line filter are suitable
only for connection to TN line supply systems.
The permissible cable cross sections for the individual devices and power ratings are
provided in Section Technical data (Page 295).
3.3.4 EMC-compliant connection

The inverters are designed for operation in industrial environments where high values of
electromagnetic interference are expected. Safe, reliable and disturbance-free operation is
only guaranteed if the devices are professionally installed.
Inverters with degree of protection IP20 must be installed and operated in an enclosed
control cabinet.
Control cabinet design

● All metal parts and components of the control cabinet (side panels, rear panels, roof and
base plates) must be connected to the control cabinet frame through a good electrical
connection – this is best achieved using the highest possible surface area or a high
number of individual screw connections
● The PE bar and the EMC shield bar must be connected to the control cabinet frame
through a good electrical connection established through a large surface area.
● All of the metal enclosures of the devices and supplementary components installed in the
cabinet – e.g. inverter or line filter – must be connected to the control cabinet frame
through a good electrical connection through the largest possible surface area. The most
favorable design is to mount these devices and supplementary components on a bare
metal mounting plate with good conducting characteristics; this in turn is connected to the
control cabinet frame through a good electrical connection and the largest possible
surface area. It is especially important that they are connected to the PE and EMC shield
bars.
● All of the connections must be implemented so that they are durable. Screw connections
to painted or anodized metal components must either be established using special
contact (serrated) washers that cut through the insulating surface and therefore establish
a metallic conductor contact, or the insulating surface must be removed at the contact
locations.
● Coils of contactors, relays, solenoid valves and motor holding brakes must be equipped
with interference suppression elements in order to dampen high-frequency radiation
when switching-off (RC elements or varistors with AC coils and free-wheeling diodes or
varistors for DC coils). The protective circuit must be directly connected at the coil.
Connecting
Cable routing and shielding

● All inverter power cables (line supply cables, connecting cables between the braking
chopper and the associated braking resistance as well as the motor cables) must be
separately routed away from signal and data cables. The minimum clearance should be
approx. 25 cm. As an alternative, the decoupling can be realized in the control cabinet
using metal partitions (separating elements) connected to the mounting plate through a
good electrical connection
● The cables from the line supply to the line filter must be routed separately away from non-
filtered power cables with a high noise level (cables between the line filter and inverter,
connecting cables between the braking chopper and the associated braking resistor as
well as motor cables)
● Signal and data cables as well as filtered line supply cables may only cross non-filtered
power cables at right angles
● All cables should be kept as short as possible
● Signal and data cables and the associated equipotential bonding cables must always be
routed in parallel with the smallest possible clearance between them
● Shielded motor cables must be used
● The shielded motor cable should be routed separately away from the cables to the motor
temperature sensors (PTC/KTY)
● Signal and data cables must be shielded.
● Especially sensitive control cables - such as setpoint and actual value cables - should be
routed without any interruption with optimum shield connection at both ends
● Shields should be connected at both ends to the grounded enclosures through a good
electrical connection and through a large surface area
● Cable shields should be connected as close as possible to where the cable enters the
cabinet
● EMC shield bars should be used for power cables; the shield connection elements
provided in the inverter should be used for signal and data cables
● If at all possible, cable shields should not be interrupted by intermediate terminals
● Cable shields should be retained both for power cables as well as for signal and data
cables using the appropriate EMC clamps. The shield clamps must connect the shield to
the EMC shield bar or the shield connection element for control cables through a low
inductive connection through a large surface area.
● Only metallic or metallized connector enclosures must be used for plug connectors for
shielded data cables (e.g. PROFIBUS cables)
Connecting
EMC-compliant installation of Power Modules in degree of protection IP20

The EMC-compliant installation of power modules is shown in the following diagram using
two examples.

① Line supply connection

② Motor connection
③ Metal mounting plate (unpainted and with a good electrical conductivity)
④ Cable clamps for a good conductive electrical connection through a large surface area
between the shield and mounting plate or shield connection kit.
⑤ Shielded motor cable
⑥ Shield connection kit
⑦ Unshielded cable for Power Modules with integrated line filter.
Shielded cable to connect a Power Module to an external line filter
Figure 3-10 Power Module shielding
Connecting
Shielding with shield connection kit: Shield connection kits are available for all Power
Module frame sizes (you will find more information
in Catalog D11.1). The cable shields must be
connected to the shield connection kit through the
greatest possible surface area using shield clamps.
Shielding without shield connection EMC-compliant shielding can also be implemented
kit: without an optional shield connection kit. In this
case, you must ensure that the cable shields are
connected to the ground potential through the
largest possible surface area.
Braking resistor connection: The braking resistor is connected using a shielded
cable. Using a clamp, the shield should be
connected to the mounting plate or to the shield
connection kit through a good electrical connection
and through the largest possible surface area.
3.3.5 EMC-compliant installation for devices with degree of protection IP55 / UL Type
12
Inverters with degree of protection IP55 / UL Type 12 (Power Module PM230) can be
installed and operated in a closed control cabinet as well as without a control cabinet.
Cable routing and shielding

● Line supply cable and motor cable of the inverter should be routed separately away from
signal and data cables. The minimum clearance should be approx. 25 cm
● All cables should be kept as short as possible
● Signal and data cables and the associated equipotential bonding cables must always be
routed in parallel with the smallest possible clearance between them
● Shielded motor cables must be used
● The shielded motor cable should be routed separately away from the cables to the motor
temperature sensors (PTC/KTY)
● Signal and data cables must be shielded.
● Especially sensitive control cables - such as setpoint and actual value cables - should be
routed without any interruption with optimum shield connection at both ends
● Shields should be connected at both ends to the grounded enclosures through a good
electrical connection and through a large surface area
● If at all possible, cable shields should not be interrupted by intermediate terminals
● Cable shields should be retained both for power cables as well as for signal and data
cables using the appropriate EMC clamps. The shield clamps must connect the shield to
the shield support of the inverter through the largest possible surface area and through a
low inductive connection
● Only metallic or metallized connector enclosures must be used for plug connectors for
shielded data cables (e.g. PROFIBUS cables)
Connecting
EMC-compliant installation of the inverter

The EMC-compliant installation of the PM230 Power Module and Control Unit is shown in
the following diagrams.
0RWRUFDEOHVKLHOG
6WUDLQUHOLHI
6KLHOGVXSSRUWWKURXJK
DODUJHVXUIDFHDUHD
/LQHVXSSO\FDEOH
XQVKLHOGHG
6WDQGDUGKHDY\JDXJH
*RRGFRQGXFWLYH WKUHDGHGMRLQW
FRQQHFWLRQIRU
KLJKIUHTXHQF\(0&
GLVWXUEDQFHV
Figure 3-11 Shielding of the Power Module PM230, degree of protection IP55 / UL Type 12
You must use a shielded cable if you utilize the inputs and outputs of the Control Unit. The
cable shield must be connected to the gland plate through a good electrical connection using
an EMC gland.
Connecting
&DEOHIURPWKH
&RQWURO8QLW
&DEOHVKLHOG
(0&JODQG
Figure 3-12 Shielding of the cable to the Control Unit
Additional information is available in the installation instructions for the Power Module
PM230 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/30563173/133300).
Connecting
3.4 Installing Control Unit
IP20 Power Modules

,QVHUW&8 5HPRYH&8
Figure 3-13 Insert the Control Unit on the Power Module and then remove
To gain access to the terminal strips, open the top and bottom front doors to the right. The
terminal strips use spring-loaded terminals.
Connecting
IP55 Power Modules

DQG ,QVHUW&8
5HPRYH&8IRU)6$WR)6&
IRU)6'WR)6'WKHUHOHDVH
NQRELVDFFHVVLEOHIURPWKHWRS
Figure 3-14 Locate the CU on the PM
You will find a detailed description in the associated Hardware Installation Manual.
Connecting
3.4.1 Interfaces, connectors, switches, control terminals, LEDs on the CU
0HPRU\FDUGVORW
,23,23KDQGKHOGLQWHUIDFH
86%LQWHUIDFHIRU67$57(5
5'<
%)
6WDWXV/('

31 31 +24V IN
%LW
32 32 GND IN %LW
-
%LW ',3VZLWFKIRU
35 35 +10V OUT
EXVDGGUHVV
36 36 GND %LW
50 50 AI 2+/NI1000
Analog In/Out
%LW
51 51 GND
52 52 AI 3+/NI1000 %LW
53 53 GND
%LW
-
- 2Q 2II
-
-
1, &XUUHQW
10 10 AI 1+
Analog In/Out
11 11 AI 1-
26 26 AO 1+ 1,',3VZLWFK$,
27 27 GND
WHUPLQDOV
1 1 +10V OUT
$, ',3VZLWFKIRU$,
2 2 GND
DQG$,WHUPLQDOV
3 3 AI 0+ $,
Analog In/Out
4 4 AI 0-
DQG
&XUUHQW 9ROWDJH
12 12 AO 0+
13 13 GND
21 21 DO 1 NO
18 22 22 DO 1 COM
DO 0 NC 18
14 14 T1 MOTOR
'LJLWDORXWSXWV
DO 0 NO 19 19 15 15 T2 MOTOR
DO 0 COM 20 20 9 9 +24V OUT

28 28 GND 7HUPLQDOVWULS
69 69 DI COM
5 5 DI 0
23
Digital In/Out
DO 2 NC 23 6 6 DI 1 7HUPLQDOPDUNLQJ
DO 2 NO 24 24 7 7 DI 2
25 8 8 DI 3
DO 2 COM 25
16 16 DI 4
17 17 DI 5

&83+9$& &83&$1 &83'3

56FRQQHFWRUIRU 6ZLWFKIRUEXV 68%'VRFNHWIRU 68%'VRFNHWIRU
FRPPXQLFDWLQJYLD WHUPLQDWLQJ FRPPXQLFDWLQJYLD FRPPXQLFDWLQJYLD
ILHOGEXVV\VWHPV UHVLVWRU &$1 352),%86'3
Figure 3-15 User interfaces of the CU230P-2
Connecting
3.4.2 Terminal strips of the CU
Arrangement and function of the terminals on the CU230P-2 Control Unit

All Control Units are equipped with the same control terminals. The factory presettings for
certain terminals differ, however, depending on the CU variant.
7HUPLQDOV 7HUPLQDO ([SODQDWLRQV

GHVLJQDWLRQV
&RORUFRGLQJRIWKHWHUPLQDOV
9,1 ([WHUQDO9
*UD\ $QDORJLQSXWVDQGRXWSXWV
*1' 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUWHUPLQDO
/LJKWJUD\'LJLWDOLQSXWVDQGRXWSXWV

:KLWH 2WKHULQSXWVDQGRXWSXWV
9287 9YROWDJHRXWSXW
1,$, ,QSXWIRU1,RU$,WHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU
1,$, ,QSXWIRU1,RU$,WHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU
*1' 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUWHUPLQDO 7KHDQDORJLQSXWV$,DQG$,FDQ
EHXVHGDVDGGLWLRQDOGLJLWDOLQSXWV

$,
$,
$, $QDORJLQSXWSRVLWLYH
$QDORJXH,Q2XW
$, 9287
$QDORJLQSXWQHJDWLYH
$2 *1'
$QDORJRXWSXWSRVLWLYH9ಹ9P$ಹP$PD[˖
$2*1' $,
5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUWHUPLQDO
$,
9287 9RXWSXWZLWKRXWHOHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQPD[P$
$, $QDORJLQSXWSRVLWLYH
$QDORJXH,Q2XW
$, $QDORJLQSXWQHJDWLYH
$2 $QDORJRXWSXWSRVLWLYH9ಹ9P$ಹP$PD[˖
$2*1' 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUWHUPLQDO
'212 'LJLWDORXWSXW12FRQWDFW$9'&
'2&20 'LJLWDORXWSXWFRPPRQFRQWDFW$9'&
37& 0RWRUWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU37&.7<RUELPHWDO1&FRQWDFW
37& 0RWRUWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU37&.7<RUELPHWDO1&FRQWDFW
9287 ,VRODWHG9RXWSXWPD[P$
',&20 ',&20
', 'LJLWDOLQSXWLVRODWHG
'LJLWDO,Q2XW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXWLVRODWHG))VHWSRLQW
'21& 'LJLWDORXWSXW1&FRQWDFW
'212 'LJLWDORXWSXW12FRQWDFW $9'&$9$&
'2&20 'LJLWDORXWSXWFRPPRQFRQWDFW
'21& 'LJLWDORXWSXW1&FRQWDFW
'212 'LJLWDORXWSXW12FRQWDFW $9'&$9$&
'2&20 'LJLWDORXWSXWFRPPRQFRQWDFW
Figure 3-16 Terminal overview
Connecting
3.4.3 Wiring terminal strips

Solid or flexible cables are permitted as signal lines. Wire end ferrules must not be used for
the spring-loaded terminals.
The permissible cable cross-section ranges between 0.5 mm² (21 AWG) and 1.5 mm² (16
AWG). When completely connecting-up the unit, we recommend cables with a cross-section
of 1mm² (18 AWG).
Route the signal lines so that you can again completely close the front doors after
connecting-up the terminal strip. If you use shielded cables, then you must connect the
shield to the mounting plate of the control cabinet or with the shield support of the inverter
through a good electrical connection and a large surface area.
NOTICE
To ensure operating safety even when connecting 230 V to the Control Unit relay outputs
DO 0 and DO 2, for these connections cables with double insulation must be used.
Connecting
Commissioning 4
4.1 Typical commissioning scenarios
After installation, you need to commission the inverter to set the inverter functions such that
the inverter/motor combination is best adapted to the drive task.
The inverter's functions and parameters are accessed either via the Operator Panel (BOP-2
or IOP) or the STARTER commissioning tool from a PC.
An inverter can also be commissioned by saving the settings of an inverter (which has been
fully commissioned) onto a memory card (see External data backup and series
commissioning (Page 91)) or the Operator Panel or using STARTER in the PC and then
transferring (upload and download) them to another inverter used for the same drive task.
Note
Should anything go wrong during commissioning …
If you are not able to complete commissioning for any reason, be it due to line voltage failure
or because you made an error when setting the parameters and can no longer reproduce the
individual settings or do not know whether the inverter has been used before, you can
restore the inverter to the factory settings. See Restoring the factory setting (Page 96).
Commissioning
4.1 Typical commissioning scenarios
Commissioning guidelines
,QYHUWHULV
LQVWDOOHG
3UHSDULQJ
FRPPLVVLRQLQJ

,VLWQHFHVVDU\WR \HV
FKDQJHWKH
IDFWRU\VHWWLQJ"
%DVLFFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
1R
,QSXWVDQG
:KDWLQWHUIDFH RXWSXWV
IRUFRQWURO"
)LHOGEXV
&RPPLVVLRQLQJZLWK &RQQHFWLRQWRDILHOGEXV
IDFWRU\VHWWLQJV

$GGLWLRQDO
VLJQDOVYLDLQSXWV \HV
DQGRXWSXWV"
&RQILJXULQJWKHLQSXWV
1R DQGRXWSXWV

6HWWLQJIXQFWLRQV
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
FRPSOHWHG
① Preparing commissioning (Page 65)

② Commissioning with factory settings (Page 68)
③ Commissioning with STARTER (Page 79)
④ Connection to a fieldbus (Page 105)

⑤ Configuring the terminal strip (Page 97)
⑥ Functions (Page 191)
Figure 4-1 Commissioning procedure
Commissioning
4.2 Preparing commissioning
Users can access the inverter parameters via the following interfaces
67$57(5YLD 67$57(5YLD
)LHOGEXV 3&FRQQHFWLRQ 23 0HPRU\
NLW RQWKH&8 FDUG
E:4 S C-V3N97875
s
SINAMICS
MICRO MEMORY CARD
6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
)HOGEXV
Figure 4-2 Inverter's parameterization interfaces
Prerequisites: before you start

Before starting the commissioning, you should clarify the following.
Are the factory settings sufficient for your application?

Check which factory settings can be used and which functions need to be changed (see
section Commissioning with factory settings (Page 68)). During this check you will probably
find that the factory settings only require slight adjustment.
Which motor are you using? [P0300]

A synchronous or induction motor?
The inverters are preset in the factory for applications using 4-pole three-phase induction
motors that correspond to the performance data of the inverter.
Commissioning
Motor data / data on the motor rating plate

If you use the STARTER commissioning tool and a SIEMENS motor, you only have to
specify the motor Order No. In all other cases, you must read-off the data from the motor
rating plate and enter into the appropriate parameters.
P0310 P0305 P0304
3~Mot EN 60034
1LA7130-4AA10
No UD 0013509-0090-0031 TICI F 1325 IP 55 IM B3
50 Hz 230/400 V Δ/Υ 60 Hz 460 V
P0307 5.5kW 19.7/11.A 6.5kW 10.9 A
Cos ϕ 0.81 1455/min Cos ϕ 0.82 1755/min
Δ/Υ 220-240/380-420 V Υ 440-480 95.75%
19.7-20.6/11.4-11.9 A 11.1-11.3 A 45kg
P0308 P0311 P0309
NOTICE
Information about installation
The rating plate data that you enter must correspond to the connection type of the motor
(star connection [Y]/ delta connection [Δ]), i.e. for a delta motor connection, the delta rating
plate data must be entered.
In which region of the world is the motor used? - Motor standard [P0100]
● Europe IEC: 50 Hz [kW] - factory setting
● North America NEMA: 60 Hz [hp] or 60 Hz [kW]
What is the prevailing temperature where the motor is operated? [P0625]

● Motor ambient temperature [P0625], if it differs from the factory setting = 20° C.
Commissioning
What type of control is needed for the application? [P1300]

A distinction is made between V/f open-loop control and vector closed-loop control.
● The V/f open-loop control is the simplest operating mode for an inverter. For example, it
is used for applications involving pumps, fans or motors with belt drives.
● For closed-loop vector control, the speed deviations between the setpoint and actual
value are less than for V/f open-loop control; further, it is possible to specify a torque. It is
suitable for applications such as winders, hoisting equipment or special conveyor drives.
Which command and setpoint sources are used to control the motor?
The command and setpoint sources available are specified by the inverter's Control Unit.
On Control Units with a PROFIBUS interface the specified commands and setpoints are
preset by the control. For all other Control Units the digital inputs and analog inputs are
preset.
● Possible command sources
– Fieldbus (when commands are specified by a control) - can be selected using P0700
– Digital inputs - can be selected using P0700
– Operator Panel
– STARTER PC tool (in the commissioning phase with the "operator panel")
● Possible setpoint sources
– Motorized potentiometer - can be selected using P1000
– Analog setpoint - can be selected using P1000
– Fixed frequency - can be selected using P1000
– Fieldbus - can be selected using P1000
– STARTER PC tool (in the commissioning phase with the "operator panel")
What speed limits should be set? (Minimum and maximum speed)

The minimum and maximum speed with which the motor operates or is limited regardless of
the speed setpoint.
● Minimum speed [P1080] - factory setting 0 [rpm]
● Maximum speed [P1082] - factory setting 1500 [rpm]
What motor ramp-up time and ramp-down time are needed for the application?
The ramp-up and ramp-down time define the maximum motor acceleration when the speed
setpoint changes. The ramp-up and ramp-down time is the time between motor standstill and
the maximum speed, or between the maximum speed and motor standstill.
● Ramp-up time [P1120] - factory setting 10 s
● Ramp-down time [P1121] - factory setting 10 s
Commissioning
4.3 Commissioning with factory settings
4.3.1 Prerequisites for using the factory settings
Prerequisites for using the factory settings

In simple applications, commissioning can be carried out just using the factory settings. This
section explains what prerequisites must be fulfilled for this purpose and how they are
fulfilled.
1. The inverter and motor must match one another; compare the data on the motor rating
plate with the technical data of the Power Module.
– The rated inverter current must, as a minimum, be the same as the motor.
– The motor power should match that of the inverter; motors can be operated in the
power range from 25 % … 100 % of the inverter power rating.
2. Commands and setpoints must be specified using the Control Unit sources set in the
factory.
3. When connecting to a fieldbus, the bus address must be set using the DIP switch on the
front of the Control Unit and the inverter must be connected to the control via the bus
interface.
4. If controlling using the digital and analog inputs, the inverter must be connected as shown
in the wiring example. (see Wiring examples for the factory settings (Page 72) )
4.3.2 Inverter factory setting
Default command and setpoint sources

The inverters with PROFIBUS DP interface are preset in the factory so that the control and
status signals can be exchanged via the fieldbus interface.
The other inverters are preset in the factory so that the control and status signals can be
exchanged via the terminals.
Please refer to the following description or List Manual for details.
Table 4- 1 Command and setpoint sources
P0700 = 2 or 6 Select the command source
2: Digital inputs (P0701 … P0709) (factory setting for CUs without PROFIBUS interface)
6: Fieldbus (P2050 … P2091), (factory setting for CUs with PROFIBUS DP interface)
P1000 = 2 or 6 Select the setpoint source
2: Analog setpoint (factory setting for CUs without PROFIBUS DP interface)
6: Fieldbus (factory setting for CUs with PROFIBUS DP interface)
Commissioning
Table 4- 2 Factory settings of additional important parameters
Parameter Factory setting Meaning of the factory Name of the parameter and comments
setting
P0010 0 Ready to be entered Drive, commissioning parameter filter
P0100 0 Europe [50 Hz] IEC/NEMA motor standard
 IEC, Europe
 NEMA, North America
Note: This parameter cannot cannot be changed in FW4.3.
P0300 1 Induction motor Motor type selection (induction motors / synchronous
motor)
P0304 400 [V] Rated motor voltage (in accordance with the rating plate in
V)
P0305 depends on the [A] Rated motor current (in accordance with the rating plate in
Power Module A)
P0307 depends on the [kW/hp] Rated motor power (in accordance with the rating plate in
Power Module kW/hp)
P0308 0 [cos phi] Rated motor power factor (in accordance with the rating
plate in cos 'phi'). If P0100=1, 2, then P0308 has no
significance.
P0310 50 [Hz] Rated motor frequency (in accordance with the rating plate
in Hz)
P0311 1395 [rpm] Rated motor speed (in accordance with the rating plate in
rpm)
P0335 0 Non-ventilated: Shaft- Motor cooling type (specify the motor cooling system)
mounted fan in the motor
P0625 20 [°C] Motor ambient temperature
P0640 200 [A] Current limit (of the motor)
P0970 0 Locked Reset drive parameters (restore to the factory settings)
P1080 0 [rpm] Minimum speed
P1082 50 [rpm] Maximum speed
P1120 10 [s] Ramp-function generator, ramp-up time
P1121 10 [s] Ramp-function generator, ramp-down time
P1300 0 V/f control with linear Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode
characteristic
Commissioning
4.3.3 Default terminal settings
Factory settings of the process interfaces

The table below shows the assignment of digital inputs to the respective parameters and the
factory settings for the individual Control Units
Digital inputs
Abbreviatio Terminal Parameter Control Unit Meaning of the factory setting
n
DI 0 5 P0701 = 0 CU230P-2 DP Locked
P0701 = 1 CU230P-2 HVAC / CU230P-2 CAN ON/OFF1
DI 1 6 P0702 = 0 CU230P-2 DP Locked
P0702 = 12 CU230P-2 HVAC / CU230P-2 CAN Direction reversal
DI 2 7 P0703 = 9 All Control Units Fault acknowledgment
DI 3 8 P0704 = 15 All Control Units Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0
DI 11 3 P0712 = 0 All Control Units Locked
DI 12 10 P0713 = 0 All Control Units Locked
Digital outputs (relay outputs)

Terminal Abbreviation Parameter Factory setting Meaning of the factory setting
18 NC DO 0 P0730 52.3 Drive fault active
19 NO
20 COM
21 NO DO 1 P0731 52.7 Drive alarm active
22 COM
23 NC DO 2 P0732 52.2 Operation enabled
24 NO
25 COM
Commissioning
Analog inputs
3 AI 0+ AI0 P0756 [0] 4 Set bipolar voltage input: -10 V … +10 V DC
in addition to parameterizing DIP switch on CU housing.
4 AI 0- The analog input 0 in the factory setting supplies the
speed setpoint (with the exception of PROFIBUS Control
Units).
10 AI 1+ AI 1 P0756 [1] 4 Set bipolar voltage input: -10 V … +10 V
in addition to parameterizing DIP switch on CU housing.
11 AI 1- Not connected in factory setting!
50 NI1000/ AI 2 P0756 [2] 2 Unipolar current input: 0 mA ... +20 mA

AI 2+ Not connected in factory setting!
51 GND
52 NI1000/ AI 3 P0756 [3] 8 No sensor connected.
AI 3+ Not connected in factory setting!
53 GND
Analog outputs
12 AO 0+ AO 0 P0771[0] 0 Can be switched from current output to voltage output by
13 AO 0- means of P0776 .
Not connected in factory setting!
26 AO 1+ AO 1 P0771[1] 0 Can be switched from voltage output to current output by
27 AO 1- means of P0776
Not connected in factory setting!
PTC/KTY84 interface
14 PTC+ P0601 0 Motor temperature sensor
15 PTC- Not connected in factory setting!
Commissioning
4.3.4 Wiring examples for the factory settings
Many applications function using the factory settings

The following wiring can be used for Control Units which receive their commands and
setpoints via control terminals (CU230P-2 HVAC and CU230P-2 CAN) to use the factory
setting.
Pre-assignment of control terminals in the factory for CU230P-2 HVAC and CU230P-2 CAN
9287 6HWSRLQWVSHFLILFDWLRQYLD
*1' $QDORJVHWSRLQWZLWK
$, SRWHQWLRPHWHUNΩ
$QDORJXH,Q2XW
'LJLWDOLQSXWVLQ131PRGHZLWKRXWH[WHUQDO
$, WHUPLQDOVWR SRZHUVXSSO\
$2 7HUPLQDOVDQGPXVWEHMXPSHUHG
$2*1'
'212 6LJQDOIRUGULYHDODUPWHUPLQDOV
)RUWKHVZLWFKHVIRU 9287
'2&20 WKHGLJLWDOLQSXWV *1'
37&
',&20
37&
9287
*1'
',&20
', 212))',WHUPLQDOV
'LJLWDO,Q2XW
', 5HYHUVH',WHUPLQDOV 'LJLWDOLQSXWVLQ131PRGHZLWKH[WHUQDOSRZHU

', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW',WHUPLQDOV VXSSO\
',
',
)RUWKH ([WHUQDO9 9287
',
VZLWFKHVIRUWKH *1'
GLJLWDOLQSXWV ([WHUQDO9 ',&20
'21&
'212 6LJQDOIRUGULYHIDXOWWHUPLQDOV
'2&20
'21&
'212 6LJQDOIRULQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQWHUPLQDOV
'2&20
'LJLWDOLQSXWVLQ313PRGH
Figure 4-3 Wiring a CU230P-2 HVAC or CU230P-2 CAN to use the factory settings
Note
In the NPN mode, a ground fault between the customer contact and digital input may
undesirably control the drive input.
Commissioning
Pre-assignment of control terminals in the factory for CU230P-2 DP
9287
*1'
$,
$QDORJXH,Q2XW
$,
$2
$2*1'
'212 6LJQDOIRUGULYHDODUP7
'2&20
37&
37&
9287
*1'
',&20
',
'LJLWDO,Q2XW
',
',
',
',
',
'21&
'212 6LJQDOIRUGULYHIDXOW7
'2&20
'21&
'212 6LJQDOIRULQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ7
'2&20
Figure 4-4 Wiring a CU230P-2 DP to use the factory settings
Commissioning
4.4 Commissioning with the BOP-2
4.4.1 Inserting the BOP-2

The "Basic Operator Panel-2" (BOP-2) is an operation and display instrument of the inverter.
It is directly inserted onto a Control Unit.

,QVHUW%23 5HPRYH%23
0RWRUVZLWFKHGRQ
2SHUDWLRQYLD%23LV
DFWLYH
+$1'$872
6HWSRLQWVRUDFWXDOYDOXHV
SDUDPHWHUQXPEHUVDQG
FRUUHVSRQGLQJSDUDPHWHU
YDOXHV
0HQXOHYHOV
)DXOWRUDODUPSHQGLQJ
-RJLVDFWLYH
+$1'
6ZLWFKPRWRURQDQGRII
212))FRPPDQG
Figure 4-5 Meaning of the display in the BOP-2
Commissioning
4.4.2 Menu structure
021,725 &21752/ ',$*126 3$5$06 6(783 (;75$6
2. (6& 2. (6& 2. (6& 2. (6& 2. (6& 2. (6&
63 6(732,17 $&.1$// 67$1'$5' '595(6(7

),/7(5
92/7287 -2* )$8/76 (;3(57 72%23

),/7(5
'&/1.9 5(9(56( +,6725< )520%23

2. (6&

&855287 67$786 72&5'

)520&5'

① Changing parameter values.

② Basic commissioning
Commissioning
4.4.3 Changing parameter values.

Use BOP-2 to change your inverter settings, by selecting the appropriate parameter number
and changing the parameter value. Parameter values can be changed in the menu
"PARAMS" and in the menu "SETUP"
Select the parameter number

● If the parameter number flashes in the display, you have two options of selecting the
number:
– Using the arrow keys, scroll to the required parameter number.
– Press the OK key for longer than two seconds and enter the required parameter
number digit for digit:
2. 2. 2. 2.
2.!V
(6&
3 2.
(6& (6& (6& (6&
● Accept the parameter number by briefly pressing the OK key.
Changing a parameter value

● If the parameter value flashes in the display, you have two options of changing the value:
– Changing the parameter value using the arrow keys.
– Press the OK key for longer than two seconds and enter the required value digit for
digit:
2. 2. 2.
B
2.!V
2.
(6&
(6& (6& (6&
● Accept the parameter value by briefly pressing the OK key.
Saving settings so that they are not lost when the power fails
The inverter immediately saves all changes which you made using the BOP-2 so that they
are protected against power failure.
Commissioning
4.4.4 Basic commissioning
Table 4- 3 Set the parameters of this menu one after the other:
Menu Remark
In the BOP-2, select the menu "SETUP".
6(783 2.
Select Reset (Parameter p0970) if you wish to reset all parameters to the factory
5(6(7 2. setting before the basic commissioning: NO → YES → OK
&75/02'
Select the motor control mode:
2.
S V/f control Vector control
VF LIN with linear characteristic SPD N EN Speed control
… TRQ N EN Torque control
VF QUAD with square-law
characteristic
…
(8586$ 2.
② Standard: IEC
S or NEMA D-91056 Erlangen
3~Mot. 1LE10011AC434AA0 E0807/0496382_02 003
IEC/EN 60034 100L IMB3 IP55
02792/7 2.
① Voltage 25 kg Th.Cl. 155(F) -20°C Tamb 40°C
S Bearing UNIREX-N3
DE 6206-2ZC3 15g Intervall: 4000hrs
NE 6206-2ZC3 11g
60Hz: SF 1.15 CONT NEMA MG1-12 TEFC Design A 2.0 HP
027&855 2.
③ Current V Hz A kW PF NOM.EFF rpm V A CL
S
400 50 3.5 1.5 0.73 84.5% 970 380 - 420 3.55-3.55
690 Y 50 2.05 1.5 0.73 84.5% 970 660 - 725 2.05-2.05
460 60 3.15 1.5 0.69 86.5% 1175 K
02732: 2.
④ Power
S

027530 2.
⑥ Rated speed Motor data on the rating plate
S
027,'
We recommend the setting STIL ROT (Identify motor data at standstill and with
S 2. the motor rotating).
If the motor cannot rotate freely, e.g. where travel is mechanically limited, select
the setting STILL (Identify motor data at standstill).
&0'65&
Select the command source (terminal strip or fieldbus).
S 2.
0$,163
Select the source for the main setpoint (analog input, motorized potentiometer,
S 2. fixed setpoint or fieldbus).
$''63
If you wish to use an additional setpoint, select the source.
S 2.
Commissioning
Menu Remark
0,1530
Minimum motor speed.
S 2.
5$0383
Motor ramp-up time.
S 2.
5$03':1
Motor ramp-down time.
S 2.
Confirm that the basic commissioning has been completed (Parameter p3900):
),1,6+ 2. NO → YES → OK
Identifying motor data

Alarm A07791 is output as long as the inverter has not identified the motor data. You must
switch on the motor (e.g. from the BOP-2) to identify the motor data. The inverter switches
off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
CAUTION
Motor data identification for dangerous loads
Secure dangerous plant and system parts before starting the motor data identification, e.g.
by fencing off the dangerous location or lowering a suspended load to the floor.
4.4.5 Additional settings

After basic commissioning, you need to carry out further settings in your inverter.
In the section Typical commissioning scenarios (Page 63) we recommend a certain
procedure to adjust your inverter to your application.
Commissioning
4.5 Commissioning with STARTER
4.5.1 Overview
If you are working with STARTER for the first time, you must initially carry out the following
steps:
1. Install STARTER.
2. Install the USB interface.
3. Create a new STARTER project, or open an existing project.
4. Set-up the online connection from your PC or PG to the inverter.
After you have done this, perform the basic commissioning of your drive.
4.5.2 Requirements
The STARTER commissioning tool features a project Wizard that guides you step-by-step
through the commissioning process.
The following is required to commission the inverter via the PC:
● A PC connection kit for connecting the inverter to a PC. This comprises:
– USB cable for connecting inverter to PC
– Installation DVD for STARTER
● A PC with installed STARTER software V4.1.5 or higher.
Information on the actual STARTER version and a possibility of downloading it from the
Internet under http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/10804985/133100
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10804985/133100).
● The motor must be connected to the inverter.
Note
The STARTER screens show general examples. You may therefore find that a screen
contains more or fewer setting options than are shown in these instructions. A
commissioning stage may also be shown using a Control Unit other than the one you are
using.
Commissioning
4.5.3 Installing USB drivers
Description
You must install and set the USB driver if you are connecting your converter for the first time
to your PC via the USB interface.
To start the installation:
● Connect the inverter to the PC using the USB cable supplied
● Switch on the inverter supply voltage
If you have still not installed the

driver, then the following screen is
displayed:
Without making any changes, click
on "Next" and in the following
screen select "Continue
installation".
Installing the driver does not have
any negative impact on your
computer.
This completes the installation of
the driver.
You must still set the interface
address before you can start
generating a STARTER project.
Additional settings for the USB interface

Before you can commission the inverter using the computer, you must assign the USB
interface to a COM interface in the range COM1 … COM7 using the control panel. The
procedure is explained in the following paragraphs.
Using the subsequently performed actions, you can identify which COM interface is assigned
to the USB-COM emulation for the SINAMICS inverter.
Commissioning
If the assignment lies in the range COM1 … COM7, then you do not have to make any
changes and you can close the control panel again. However, you should note the number of
the COM interface as you will require it in a later installation step.
If the USB-COM emulation is assigned to an address higher than COM7, open the properties
window by double-clicking on the interface. There you will find the "Advanced" button under
the "Port settings" tab.
Commissioning
A click on this button opens the extended properties in which you can assign the COM
connection number an address < 8 via a selection box. If all of the COM1 … COM8
addresses are assigned, then select one of these addresses anyway and confirm the
following message with "Yes". Please note the COM interface that you have assigned as you
will require it in a subsequent installation step.
4.5.4 Creating a STARTER project

If you still do not know STARTER, then we recommend that you commission the system
using the project wizards.
Procedure
● Switch on the inverter supply voltage.
● Launch the STARTER commissioning tool.
● Start a new project via "Project / New with Wizard".
● Click on "Find drive units online ...".
● In the window that follows (not shown here), enter a meaningful name for your project
and click on "Continue". The following dialog box is displayed.
Commissioning
● Click "Change and test..." to set up the PG/PC interface.
PG/PC - Set interface

● Select "PC COM-Port (USS)" from the list and click on "Properties …"
● If "PC COM-Port (USS)" is not available, click on "Select …" to install the "PC COM-Port
(USS)" interface as shown in the "Install/Remove Interfaces" dialog box.
Commissioning
● If you have installed the PC COM-Port (USS) interface, close the dialog box and now call
up "Properties - PC COM-Port (USS)".
● In this dialog box, select the COM address that you defined when setting the USB
interface. Select 115200 as baud rate.
● You can check the correctness of the settings using the "Read" button in the "Baud rate
test" field. If your interface has been correctly set, then you see the baud rate that has
been determined:
● If the PC cannot establish a connection to the converter, then "???" appears in the baud
rate display field.
In this case, check the number of the COM interface and the connecting cable.
● Under the "RS 485" tab, in addition, select the "Automatic mode".
● When you click "OK", the "Set PG/PC Interface" dialog box is displayed again.
Commissioning
● When you choose "OK" again, this takes you back to the Project Wizard.
● By clicking on "Continue" you start the search for available devices.
● In this dialog box, you can change the designation of your converter (no spaces or
special characters).
● Click on "Continue" and close the following dialog box by clicking on "Complete".
This means that you have generated the STARTER project and the inverter is inserted in the
STARTER project tree.
4.5.5 Establishing an online connection between the PC and converter (going

"online")
Description
With the procedure described above, the project has been created and your inverter is
integrated into the project tree. However, there is no online connection.
● In the STARTER, click on the ("Connect to target system") button. In the next dialog
box, select the inverter (✓) and confirm with OK.
● The following dialog screen lists the inverter settings in the "Online" column. The "Offline"
column will be empty for a new project.
Commissioning
● Click on "Load hardware configuration to PG" to save the online setup to your PC and
create an online link between the inverter and PC.
● To conclude your entry, choose "Close".

● The status display changes from the "Offline mode" with blue background into the "Online
mode" with yellow background.
Note
If you click on "Close" without having first run "Load hardware configuration to PG", the
data is not saved and the inverter remains offline.
4.5.6 Basic commissioning
 In the online state, open the STARTER screen of

the Control Unit with a double click and there click
on the "Wizard" button.
Commissioning
Carry-out basic commissioning

The configuration wizard guides you step by step through the commissioning procedure.
After the basic commissioning, you can change all of the settings and make detailed
changes.
● In the start dialog box of the basic commissioning, select the control mode of the motor. If
you are not certain which control mode you require for your application, then initially
select V/f control. Help on how to select the control mode is provided in Chapter Motor
control (Page 203).
Figure 4-6 Basic commissioning with V/f control
● With "Continue" you can go to the next dialog boxes where you must make the
appropriate settings for your particular application.
● In the "Drive functions" dialog, we recommend the setting "Identify motor data at standstill
and with the motor rotating".
● If the motor cannot rotate freely, e.g. where travel is mechanically limited, select the
setting "Identify motor data at standstill".
Commissioning
● We recommend the following setting in the dialog box "Calculate motor data":
● Set the check mark for "RAM to ROM (save data in the drive)" in order to save your data
in the inverter so that it is not lost when the power fails:
Identifying motor data

If the inverter has still not identified the motor data, alarm A07791 is output. You must
switch-on the motor to identify its data.
CAUTION
Motor data identification for dangerous loads
Secure dangerous plant and system parts before starting the motor data identification, e.g.
by fencing off the dangerous location or lowering a suspended load to the floor.
 In STARTER, select the control panel with a double

click.
Commissioning
● In the control panel, click on the "Assume control priority" button.

Then set the check mark for "Enables" signals and switch-on the motor.
The inverter identifies the motor data after it has been switched-on. The measurement can
take several minutes. After the measurement has been completed, the inverter automatically
switches off the motor and alarm A07791 is cancelled.
● In the control panel, click on the "Give up control priority" button.
4.5.7 Additional settings

After basic commissioning, you need to carry out further settings in your inverter. Using
STARTER, you can change your inverter settings in two ways:
1. Change the parameter values via the STARTER screens.
The screens show the most important parameters of an inverter function. If you change
the parameter values using the STARTER screens, you do not need to know the
parameter number.
2. Change the parameter values via the STARTER expert list.
If you wish to change the parameter values using the expert list, you need to know the
parameter number.
In the section Typical commissioning scenarios (Page 63) we recommend a certain
procedure to adjust your inverter to your application in the best way possible.
Commissioning
Changing parameter values using the expert list

● If you wish to specifically change parameters, then - as shown below - call the expert list;
there, scroll to the parameter and then change its value. You close the expert list by
double clicking on an entry in the STARTER project tree.
Saving settings so that they are not lost when the power fails
All of the changes that you make are temporarily saved in the inverter and are lost the next
time the power supply is switched off. For your changes to be permanently saved in the
inverter, you must save the changes using the button (RAM to ROM). Before you press
the button, you need to mark the appropriate drive in the project navigator.
Go offline
You can now exit the online connection after the data backup (RAM to ROM) with
"Disconnect from target system".
Commissioning
4.6 Back-up the settings and transfer
4.6.1 External data backup and series commissioning

After commissioning, your settings are saved in the inverter so that they are protected
against power failure.
In addition, you should also save the parameters on a storage medium outside the inverter:
By backing up your data on an external storage medium, if the inverter develops a defect,
your settings will not be lost.
You have three different options for externally backing up data (upload):
1. Memory card
2. PC/PG with STARTER
3. Operator Panel
Series commissioning
Series commissioning means the commissioning of several identical drives in the following
steps:
1. Commission the first inverter.
2. Upload the parameters of the first inverter to the storage medium outside the inverter.
3. Download the parameters from the storage medium to a second or additional inverter.
Note
The control unit to which the parameters are transferred must be of the same type and
have the same or a higher firmware version as the source control unit (the same 'type'
means the same MLFB).
For further information, refer to the following sections.
4.6.2 Backing up and transferring settings using STARTER
Backing up the inverter settings on PC/PG (upload)

● Go online with STARTER .
● Click on the button "Load project to PG": .
● To save data in the PG (computer), click on .
Transferring settings from the PC/PG into the inverter (download)

● Go online with STARTER.
● Click on the button "Load project to target system": .
● To save data in the converter, click on "Copy RAM to ROM" .
Commissioning
4.6.3 Backing up and transferring settings using BOP-2
Transferring parameters from the inverter to the operator panel (upload)

● Start data transfer in the menu "OPTIONS" - "TO BOP".
● Wait until the BOP-2 signals that data transfer has been completed.
Note
Data transfer can can take several minutes.
Transferring parameters from the operator panel to the inverter (download)

● Start data transfer in the menu "OPTIONS" - "FROM BOP".
● Wait until the BOP-2 signals that data transfer has been completed.
4.6.4 Saving setting on memory card

The memory card is a removable, non-volatile flash memory for all inverter parameters.
We recommend that you use one of the memory cards with the following order numbers:
● MMC (order number 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0)
● SD (order number 6ES7954-8LB00-0AA0)
If you wish to use other SD or MMC memory cards, then you must format the memory card
as follows:
● MMC: Format FAT 16
– Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
– Start a "command prompt" on your PC and enter the following: format x: /fs:fat
(x: Drive code of the memory card on your PC.)
● SD: Format FAT 32
– Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
– Start a "command prompt" on your PC and enter the following: format x: /fs:fat32 (x:
Drive code of the memory card on your PC.)
Backing up your settings

We recommend that you insert the card before switching on the inverter for the first time.
The inverter then automatically ensures that the actual parameter setting is saved both in the
inverter as well as on the card.
The following describes how you can save the inverter parameter setting on the memory
card subsequently.
Note
The data transfer can take several minutes.
Commissioning
If you wish to transfer the parameter setting from the inverter on to a memory card (Upload),
you have two options:
Automatic upload
 Switch off the inverter power supply (or disconnect the

Control Unit from the Power Module).
 Insert an empty memory card into the inverter. 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
 Then switch the inverter power supply back on again

MICRO MEMORY CARD
SINAMICS
s
E:4 S C-V3N97875
(or reconnect the Control Unit to the Power Module).

&8 30
Transfer the setting to the

empty memory card
Afterwards, the inverter copies its parameter setting onto the memory card.
NOTICE
If the memory card is not empty and already contains a parameter setting, the inverter will
take on the parameter setting from the memory card. The previous setting in the inverter
will be deleted.
Manual upload
If you do not wish to switch off the inverter power supply or you do not have an empty
memory card available, you will need to transfer the parameter setting to the memory card
as follows:
 Insert a memory card into the Control Unit. 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
The Control Unit power supply is switched-on.

MICRO MEMORY CARD
SINAMICS
s
E:4 S C-V3N97875
&8 30
STARTER BOP-2
 Start data transfer with p0971 = 1.  Start data transfer in the menu "OPTIONS" -
 Check the value of parameter p0971. "TO CRD".
If data transfer has been completed, p0971 is  Wait until the BOP-2 signals that data transfer
automatically set to 0. has been completed.
Commissioning
4.6.5 Transferring the setting from the memory card

If you wish to transfer the parameter setting from a memory card into the inverter
(download), you have two options:
Automatic download
 Switch off the inverter power supply (or disconnect the

Control Unit from the Power Module).
 Insert the memory card into the inverter. 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
 Then switch the inverter power supply back on again (or

MICRO MEMORY CARD
SINAMICS
s
E:4 S C-V3N97875
insert the CU onto the Power Module).

&8 30
If there is valid parameter data on the memory card, then the inverter accepts this
automatically.
Manual download
If you do not want to switch off the power supply, then you must transfer the parameter
setting into the inverter in the following way:
 Insert the memory card into the Control Unit. 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
The Control Unit power supply is switched-on.

MICRO MEMORY CARD
SINAMICS
s
E:4 S C-V3N97875
&8 30
STARTER BOP-2
 Set p0804 to 1.  Start data transfer in the menu "OPTIONS" -
 Check the value of parameter p0804. "TO CRD".
If data transfer has been completed, p0804 is  Wait until the BOP-2 signals that data transfer
automatically set to 0. has been completed.
Commissioning
4.6.6 Safely remove the memory card
CAUTION
The file system on the memory card can be destroyed if the memory card is removed
without first requesting and confirming this using the "safe removal" function. The memory
card will then no longer function.
Procedure:
● Set p9400 to 2.
● Check the value of parameter p9400.
If it is permissible to remove the memory card, p9400 is set to 3.
● Remove the memory card.
4.6.7 Other ways to back up settings

You can backup three additional settings of the parameters in memory areas of the inverter
reserved for this purpose. You will find additional information in the List Manual under the
following parameters:
p0970 Resetting drive parameters
Load the back-up setting (number 10, 11 or 12). You overwrite your actual parameter
setting when loading.
p0971 Saving parameters
Backing up the setting (10, 11 or 12).
You can back-up up to 99 additional parameter settings on the memory card. You will find
additional information in the List Manual under the following parameters:
p0802 Data transfer with memory card as source/target
p0803 Data transfer with device memory as source/target
p0804 Start data transfer
Commissioning
4.7 Restoring the factory setting
4.7 Restoring the factory setting

The inverter is reset to the delivery condition by restoring the parameters to the factory
setting, with the exception of the following parameters.
Note
The reset operation is not applied to parameters p0014, p0100, p0201, p0205 or the
communication parameters. Motor parameters p0300 ... p0311 are suitably preassigned for
the power unit.
Restoring the factory settings using STARTER

● Go online with STARTER, see Establishing an online connection between the PC and
converter (going "online") (Page 85).
● In STARTER, click on the button .
Resetting to factory setting with BOP-2

● In the "Options" menu, select the "DRVRESET" entry
● Confirm the reset using the OK key.
Configuring the terminal strip 5
5.1 Preconditions
Before you configure the inputs and outputs of the inverter, you should have completed the
basic commissioning, see Chapter Commissioning (Page 63) .
The assignment of the inputs and outputs in the factory setting and after the basic
commissioning are listed in Chapter Wiring examples for the factory settings (Page 72).
5.2 Digital inputs

The digital inputs are pre-assigned certain control commands in the factory. The Control Unit
has eight digital inputs, of which digital inputs DI 11 and DI 12 (terminals 3 and 10) can also
be used as analog inputs.
Table 5- 1 Pre-assignment of the digital inputs
Terminal Input Pre-assignment after basic commissioning Changing the pre-

assignment via
Control via terminal strip Control via fieldbus
5 DI 0 Switch motor on and off No pre-assignment p0701
(ON/OFF1) (p0701 = 1) (p0701 = 0)
6 DI 1 Reverse direction of No pre-assignment p0702
motor rotation (p0702 = (p0702 = 0)
12)
7 DI 2 Acknowledge faults (p0703 = 9) p0703
8 DI 3 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0 (p0704 = 15) p0704
16 DI 4 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1(p0705 = 16) p0705
17 DI 5 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 2(p0705 = 17) p0706
Table 5- 2 Terminals that can be used as either digital or analog inputs
Terminal Terminal for ... Parameter

3 ... Analog input 0 p0712 = 0
... Digital input 11 p0712 > 0: The reference potential is terminal 4.
10 ... Analog input 1 p0713 = 0
... Digital input 12 p0713 > 0: : The reference potential is terminal 11.
Configuring the terminal strip
5.2 Digital inputs
If you wish to change the function of the digital inputs, then select one of the following
options.
1. Select one of the existing pre-assignments for the digital input.
2. Interconnect the input using BICO technology.
Selecting the pre-assignment for a digital input (procedure 1)
Table 5- 3 Pre-assigning digital inputs
p0701 … p0706, p0712 or p0713 = …

=0 No pre-assignment = 15 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0
=1 ON/OFF1 = 16 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1
=3 2. OFF2 = 17 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 2
=4 2. OFF3 = 18 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 3
=9 2. Acknowledge faults = 25 Activate DC braking
= 10 Jog bit 0 = 27 Enable technology controller
= 11 Jog bit 1 = 29 External fault 1
= 12 Direction reversal = 35 Command data set selection CDS bit 0
= 13 Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, = 50 Load monitoring, failure detection
raise
= 14 Motorized potentiometer, setpoint,
lower
Interconnecting a digital input via BICO (procedure 2)

● Deselect the pre-assignment (corresponding parameter value acc. to the tables above
= 0)
● Interconnect the input with the corresponding binector input.
Example: If you wish to open a motor holding brake via a digital input, set p0855.0 = 722.5.
For more information, see the parameter list and in the function diagrams 2220 ff of the List
Manual. A list of all of the binector inputs is also provided in the List Manual.
5.3 Digital outputs
5.3 Digital outputs

The inverter has three digital outputs that can be used to display different inverter states, e.g.
faults, alarms, current limit value violations etc.
Table 5- 4 Pre-assignment of the digital outputs
Terminal Digital output Pre-assignment Pre-assignment can

be changed via
18 NC DO 0 Inverter fault active p0730
19 NO
20 COM
21 NO DO 1 Inverter alarm active p0731
22 COM
23 NC DO 2 Motor switched on p0732
24 NO
25 COM
Table 5- 5 Changing the assignment of digital outputs to common signals
p0730, p0731 or p0732 = …

=0 Deactivating digital output = 52.10 f_act >= P1082 (f_max)
= 52.0 Drive ready = 52.11 Alarm: Motor current/torque limit
= 52.1 Drive ready for operation = 52.12 Brake active
= 52.2 Drive running = 52.13 Motor overload
= 52.3 Drive fault active = 52.14 Motor CW rotation
= 52.4 OFF2 active = 52.15 Inverter overload
= 52.5 OFF3 active = 53.0 DC braking active
= 52.6 Switching on inhibited active = 53.1 f_act < P2167 (f_off)
= 52.7 Drive alarm active = 53.2 f_act > P1080 (f_min)
= 52.8 Setpoint/actual value discrepancy = 53.3 Actual current value r0027 ≥ P2170
= 52.9 Process data control = 53.6 f_act ≥ setpoint (f_setpoint)
If you wish to connect other inverter signals to a digital output, interconnect the
corresponding binector output to the output using BICO technology. For more information,
see the parameter list and the function diagrams 2230 ff of the List Manual. A list of all of the
binector outputs is also provided in the List Manual.
If you wish to invert the digital outputs, set the corresponding index of the parameter P0748
to 1:
● p0748.0 = 1, signal of digital output 0 is inverted
5.4 Analog inputs
5.4 Analog inputs

The inverter has four analog inputs, AI0 … AI3.
● AI0 and AI1 can be set as either voltage input or current input.
● AI2 can be set as either current input or as temperature sensor.
● AI3 is configured as temperature sensor.
Note
In the factory setting (with the exception of PROFIBUS Control Units), the analog input 0
is preset as the source for the main setpoint (p1070).
Here -10 V (= - 100 %) corresponds to the maximum negative and 10 V (= 100 %) the
maximum positive speed.
Table 5- 6 Pre-assignment of the analog inputs
Terminal Analog input Parameter Factory setting

3 AI 0+ AI 0 p0756[0] 4 Set bipolar voltage input: -10 V … +10 V
4 AI 0-
10 AI 1+ AI 1 p0756[1] 4 Set bipolar voltage input: -10 V … +10 V
11 AI 1-
50 AI 2+ AI 2 P0756[2] 2 Unipolar current input: 0 mA ... +20 mA
51 AI 2-
52 AI 3+ AI 3 P0756[3] 8 No sensor connected
53 AI 3-
This section explains how to set the analog input as either a voltage, current or temperature
input. BICO technology can be used to set further interconnection of the analog input, e.g. as
a speed setpoint or setpoint for the technology controller. For more information, see the
parameter list and in the function diagrams 9566 ff of the List Manual.
If you have selected "Control via terminals" in the basic commissioning, then analog input 0
is already interconnected with the speed setpoint.
5.4 Analog inputs
Analog input as voltage, current or temperature input

Using parameter p0756, you define whether the analog input is used as a voltage input
(10 V) or as a current input (20 mA). p0756[0] is valid for analog input 0, p0756[1] for analog
input 1 etc.
The following options are available:
AI 0 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[0] = 0

Unipolar voltage input monitors: +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitors +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input (factory setting) -10 V … +10 V 4
AI 1 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[1] = 0
Unipolar voltage input monitors: +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Bipolar voltage input (factory setting) -10 V … +10 V 4
AI 2 Unipolar current input (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0756[2] = 2
Temperature sensor Ni1000 6
Temperature sensor PT1000 7
No sensor connected 8
AI 3 Temperature sensor Ni1000 p0756[3] = 6
Temperature sensor PT1000 7
No sensor connected (factory setting) 8
You must also set the DIP switch for the analog input on the Control Unit.
You will find
7HPS,
 the DIP switch for AI0 and AI1 (current / voltage) on the Control $,
Unit behind the lower front door.
 the DIP switch for AI2 (temperature / current) on the Control
Unit behind the upper front door.
, 8
$,
$,
Scaling characteristic of analog inputs

When p0756 is changed, a linear scaling characteristic matching the setting is automatically
set. The characteristic is determined by two points (p0757[0…3], p0758[0…3]) and
(p0759[0…3], p0760[0…3]). The parameters with index 0 apply to analog input 0,
parameters with index 1 apply to analog input 1 etc.
The scaling characteristic can be adjusted to suit your requirements.
5.4 Analog inputs
Table 5- 7 Scaling characteristic and wire-breakage monitoring
P0757[0…3] x-coordinate of 1st characteristic point [V or mA]
P0758[0…3] y coordinate of the 1st characteristic point [% of p200x]
p200x are the parameters of the reference variables, e.g. p2000 is the reference
speed.
P0759[0…3] x-coordinate of 2nd characteristic point [V or mA]
P0760[0…3] y-coordinate of 2nd characteristic point [% of p200x]
p0761[0…3] Response threshold of the wire-break monitoring
(For the analog input 3, wire-break monitoring is not possible)

\ \ \
S S S
[ [ [

S S S
[ 9 [ 9 [ P$

S S S
\ \ \

S S S
S 9ROWDJHLQSXW S 9ROWDJHLQSXW S &XUUHQWLQSXW

ELSRODU9ಹ9 XQLSRODUPRQLWRUHG XQLSRODUPRQLWRUHG
9ಹ9 P$ಹP$
Figure 5-1 Examples for scaling characteristics
Example - setting analog input 0 as source for the speed setpoint

AI 0 should be used as monitored unipolar voltage input for the speed setpoint in the range
from -100 % (p1080) to 100 % (p1082).
Table 5- 8 Parameter settings for the example
Parameter / setting Description

p1000 = 2 Select the analog setpoint as setpoint source
p0756[0] = 1 Define the analog input type
Set AI 0 as voltage input using the DIP switch
p0757[0] = 2, Set the scaling characteristic or check

p0758[0] = -100,
p0759[0] = 10,
p0760[0] = 100
P0761[0] = 2 Set the wire-break threshold to 2 V
5.5 Analog outputs
5.5 Analog outputs

The inverter features two analog outputs. You can use the analog outputs to display a wide
variety of signals, e.g. the actual speed, the actual output voltage or the actual output
current.
Table 5- 9 Pre-assignment of the analog outputs
Terminal Analog output Function Factory setting can

be changed via
12 AO 0+ AO 0 Locked p0771[0]
13 AO 0-
26 AO 1+ AO 1 Locked p0771[1]
27 AO 1-
Significance of the analog output
Table 5- 10 Changing analog outputs to the most common signals
AO 0 Display via AO 0 blocked (Factory setting) p0771[0] = 0

Actual frequency Scaling according to p2000 p0771[0] = 21
Output actual frequency Scaling according to p2000 p0771[0] = 24
Output actual voltage Scaling according to p2001 p0771[0] = 25
Actual value DC-link voltage Scaling according to p2001 p0771[0] = 26
Output current Scaling according to p2002 p0771[0] = 27
AO 1 Display via AO 1 blocked (Factory setting) p0771[1] = 0
Actual frequency Scaling according to p2000 p0771[1] = 21
Output actual frequency Scaling according to p2000 p0771[1] = 24
Output actual voltage Scaling according to p2001 p0771[1] = 25
Actual value DC-link voltage Scaling according to p2001 p0771[1] = 26
Output current Scaling according to p2002 p0771[1] = 27
If you wish to connect other inverter signals to an analog output, interconnect the
corresponding connector output to the analog output using BICO technology. For more
information, see the parameter list and the function diagrams 9572 ff of the List Manual. A
list of all connector outputs is also provided in the List Manual.
Analog output as voltage or current output

Use parameter p0776 to define whether the analog output will be used as a voltage output
(10 V) or a current output (20 mA).
The following options are available:
AO 0 Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776[0] = 0

Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2
AO 1 Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776[1] = 0
Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2
5.5 Analog outputs
Scaling characteristic of the analog output

The scaling characteristic of an analog output is defined using 2 points.
If you change the value of p0776, the inverter automatically assigns appropriate values to
the four parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780).
Table 5- 11 Scaling characteristic
p07xx[0]: AO 0
p07xx[1]: AO 1
p0777[x] X coordinate of the 1st characteristic point [% of P200x]
P200x are the parameters of the reference variables, e.g. P2000 is the reference
speed.
p0778[x] Y coordinate of the 1st characteristic point [V or mA]
p0779[x] X coordinate of the 2nd characteristic point [% of P200x]
p0780[x] Y coordinate of the 2nd characteristic point [V or mA]
P$ 9 P$
\ \ \
S S S
\ \ \

S S S
[ [ [ [
[ [
S S S S S S
S 9ROWDJHRXWSXW S 9ROWDJHRXWSXW S 9ROWDJHRXWSXW

XQLSRODU XQLSRODU9ಹ9 PRQLWRUHG
P$P$ P$P$
Figure 5-2 Examples for scaling characteristics
Table 5- 12 Additional analog output settings
p07xx[0]: AO 0
p07xx[1]: AO 1
p0773[x] Analog outputs smoothing time constant
Smoothing time constant of 1st order low-pass filter for the analog outputs
p0775[x] Activate absolute-value generation
0: No absolute-value generation (factory setting)
1. The absolute value of the analog output is used.
If the original value was negative, the corresponding bit is set in the status word of
the analog input (r0785).
p0782[x] Analog outputs signal source for inverting
Signal source to invert the analog output signals
Connection to a fieldbus 6
Before you connect the inverter to the field bus, you should have completed the basic
commissioning, see Chapter Commissioning (Page 63)
Fieldbus interfaces of the CU versions

The inverters are available in different versions for communication with higher-level controls
with the subsequently listed fieldbus interfaces:
● CU230P-2 HVAC for USS using RS485
– Control via PZD (process data channel)
– Parameterizing using PKW (parameter channel)
● CU230P-2 HVAC for Modbus RTU using RS485
– Control and parameterization according to the Modbus register
● CU230P-2 HVAC for BACnet MS/TP using RS485
– Control and parameterization using BACnet objects
● CU230P-2 DP for PROFIBUS DP
– Control in cyclic operation using telegrams 1, 20, 350, 352 and 999
– Control and parameterizing in cyclic operation using telegrams 353 and 354
– Assigning parameters via the acyclic parameter channel (data block 47)
● CU230P-2 CAN for CANopen
– Control by means of PDO
– Parameterization by means of SDO
Connection to a fieldbus
6.1 Data exchange via the fieldbus
6.1 Data exchange via the fieldbus
Analog signals
The inverter always scales signals, which are transferred via the fieldbus, to the hexadecimal
value of 4000. The significance of this numerical value depends on the category of the signal
that you transfer:
Signal category 4000H corresponds to a parameter value of ...

Speeds, frequencies p2000
Voltage p2001
Current p2002
Torque p2003
Power p2004
Angle p2005
Acceleration p2007
Control and status words

Control and status words always comprise two bytes. Depending on the control type, the two
bytes are differently interpreted as higher or lower significance. An example for transferring
control and status words with a SIMATIC control is provided in Chapter STEP 7 program
example for cyclic communication (Page 158).
6.2 Setting the bus address via DIP switch
6.2 Setting the bus address via DIP switch

You can set the bus address via DIP switch or via parameter. The DIP switches have priority
over the parameter.
The inverter always uses the parameter to make the setting if all DIP switches for the bus
address are at "OFF" (0) or "ON" (127) or if the address is not valid (e.g. 124 for USS).
Setting via parameter is described in the sections for the particular fieldbus interfaces.
You can find the position of the DIP switches at the inverter in Interfaces, connectors,
switches, control terminals, LEDs on the CU (Page 59).
Table 6- 1 Examples of setting the bus addresses
DIP switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Address = added values of the DIP switches 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
that are set to ON.
Example 1: ON
Address = 10 = 2 + 8
OFF
Example 2: ON
Address = 39 = 1 + 2 + 4 + 32
OFF
6.3 Communication via RS485
6.3.1 Integrating inverters into a bus system via the RS485 interface
Connecting to a network via RS485

The Control Unit has a two-section terminal strip on its lower side which allows the inverter to
be integrated into a bus system via the RS485 interface. This connector has short-circuit
proof, isolated pins. You will find the terminal assignments in the following table.
Table 6- 2 Assignments for the terminal strip of the RS485 interface
Contact Designation Description

1 0V Reference potential 56
2 RS485P Receive and send signal (+) FRQQHFWRU
3 RS485N Receive and send signal (-)

4 Shield Cable shield
5 --- ---

General specifications and requirements for error-free communication
NOTICE
When the bus is operating, the first and last bus station must be continuously connected to
the supply.
Note
Communication with the controller, even when the supply voltage on the Power Module is
switched off
You will have to supply the Control Unit with 24 V DC on terminals 31 and 32 if you require
communication to take place with the controller when the line voltage is switched off.
You must switch-in the bus terminating resistor for the first and last participants. The bus
terminating resistor is either located on the lower side next to the RS485 connector or on the
front side of the Control Unit behind the front door, see Chapter Interfaces, connectors,
switches, control terminals, LEDs on the CU (Page 59).
You can disconnect one or more slaves from the bus (by unplugging the bus connector)
without interrupting the communication for the other stations, but not the first or last.
56 566ODYH 566ODYH /DVW56VODYH

0DVWHU &RQWURO &RQWURO &RQWURO
*
*
*
8QLW 8QLW 8QLW
%XVWHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRU 2)) 2)) 21
7HUPLQDOV 7HUPLQDOV 7HUPLQDOV
6KLHOG
Figure 6-1 Communication network via RS485
6.3.2 Communication via USS
6.3.2.1 General information about communication with USS via RS485

Using the USS protocol (protocol of the universal serial interface), users can set up a serial
data connection between a higher-level master system and several slave systems (RS 485
interface). Master systems include programmable logic controllers (e.g. SIMATIC S7-200) or
PCs. The inverters are always slaves on the bus system.
Communication using the USS protocol takes place over the RS485 interface with a
maximum of 31 slaves.
The maximum cable length is 1200 m (3300 ft)
Information about how to connect the inverter to the USS fieldbus is provided in Section:
Integrating inverters into a bus system via the RS485 interface (Page 108).
Setting the bus address of the inverter

The inverter's USS address can be set via DIP switches on the Control Unit or using p2021.
Using p2021, the address can only be set if all DIP switches for the bus address are either
set to "OFF" (0) or to "ON" (127).
If the address switches are set to a value = 1 … 30, then this address is always active and
p2021 is read-only.
Valid USS address area: 1 … 30
The setting using DIP switches is described in Setting the bus address via DIP switch
(Page 107).
CAUTION
A bus address that has been changed is only effective after switching-off and switching-on
again. It is particularly important that any external 24 V supply is switched off.
Additional communication settings
p0700 = 6 Command source selection You set the command and setpoint source
Selecting the fieldbus as command source during the basic commissioning, see
Commissioning (Page 63)
p1000 = 6 Speed setpoint selection
Selecting the fieldbus as setpoint source
p2020 Value Baud rate
4 2400
5 4800
6 9600
7 19200
8 38400
9 57600
10 76800
11 93750
12 115200
13 187500
p2022 Fieldbus interface, USS PZD count
Setting the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram
p2023 Fieldbus interface, USS PKW count
Setting the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram:
Value PKW count
0 PKW 0 words
3 PKW 3 words
4 PKW 4 words
127 PKW variable
p2030 = 1 Fieldbus interface protocol selection
1: USS
p2040 Fieldbus interface, monitoring time [ms]
Setting the monitoring time to monitor the received process data via fieldbus. If no
process data are received within this time, an appropriate message is output
Additional information and parameters are provided on the following pages.
6.3.2.2 Structure of a USS telegram

A USS telegram comprises a sequence of characters, which are sent in a defined sequence.
The sequence of characters of a USS telegram is shown in the following diagram.
Final
Header information n net data information
STX LGE ADR 1. 2 ::: n BCC
6WDUWGHOD\ 866IUDPH
Figure 6-2 Structure of a USS telegram
Every character within the telegram comprises 11 bits.
%LW ELWVRIGDWD %LW %LW

6WDUW 3HYHQ VWRS
Description
Telegrams with both a variable and fixed length can be used. This can be selected using
parameters p2022 and p2023 to define the length of the PZD and the PKW within the net
data.
STX 1 byte
LGE 1 byte
ADR 1 byte
Net data PKW 8 bytes (4 words: PKE + IND + PWE1 + PWE2)
(example) PZD 4 bytes (2 words: PZD1 + PZD2)
BCC 1 byte
Start delay
The start delay must be maintained before a new master telegram is started.
STX
The STX block is an ASCII character (0x02) and indicates the beginning of a message.
LGE
LGE specifies the number of bytes that following in the telegram. It is defined as the sum of
the following bytes
● Net data
● ADR
● BCC
The actual overall telegram length is two bytes longer because STX and LGE are not
counted in LGE.
ADR
The ADR range contains the address of the slave node (e.g. of the inverter). The individual
bits in the address byte are addressed as follows:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Special Mirror Send 5 address bits
● Bit 5 is the broadcast bit.
Note
The Broadcast function is not supported in the current software version.
● Bit 6 = 1 indicates a mirror telegram.

The node address is evaluated and the addressed slave returns the telegram to the
master unchanged.
Bit 5 = 0, bit 6 = 0 and bit 7 = 0 indicate normal data communication for devices. The node
address (bit 0 to bit 4) is evaluated.
BCC
BCC (Block Check Character). It is an exclusive OR checksum (XOR) over all telegram
bytes with the exception of the BCC itself.
6.3.2.3 User data range of the USS telegram

The user data range of the USS protocol is used to transmit application data. This comprises
the parameter channel data and the process data (PZD).
The user data occupy the bytes within the USS frame (STX, LGE, ADR, BCC). The size of
the user data can be configured using parameters p2023 and p2022. The structure and
sequence of the parameter channel and process data (PZD) are shown in the figure below.
3URWRFROGDWD 3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO3.: 3URFHVVGDWD3='
3.: 3.: 3.: 3.: 3.:P 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='\
3URWRFROZRUGV
3.( ,1' 3:( 3:( 3:(P 67: +6: 67:

3.:3='VWUXFWXUH =6: +,: =6:
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
'DWDE\WH 3 Q

S S
S S
S YDULDEOHOHQJWK S
Figure 6-3 USS user data structure
The length for the parameter channel is determined by parameter p2023 and the length for
the process data is specified by parameter p2022. If the parameter channel or the PZD is not
required, the appropriate parameters can be set to zero ("PKW only" or "PZD only").
It is not possible to transfer "PKW only" and "PZD only" alternatively. If both channels are
required, they must be transferred together.
6.3.2.4 Data structure of the USS parameter channel

The USS protocol defines for inverters the user data structure via which a master accesses
the slave inverter. The parameter channel is used to read and write parameters in the
inverter.
Parameter channel
You can use the parameter channel with a fixed length of 3 or 4 data words or with a variable
length.
The first data word always contains the parameter identifier (PKE) and the second contains
the parameter index.
The third, fourth and subsequent data words contain parameter values, texts and
descriptions.
Parameter identifier (PKE), 1st word

The parameter identifier (PKE) is always a 16-bit value.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( ,1' 3:(
VW QG UGDQGWK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG

630
$. 318
Figure 6-4 PKE structure
● Bits 12 to 15 (AK) contain the request or response identifier.

● Bit 11 (SPM) is reserved and always = 0.
● Bits 0 to 10 (PNU) contain parameter numbers 1 … 1999. For parameter numbers
≥ 2000, you must add an offset in the 2nd word of the parameter channel (IND).
The following table includes the request ID for telegrams between the master → inverter.
Table 6- 3 Request identifier (master → inverter)
Request Description Response

identifier identifier
Positive Negative
0 No request 0 7
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7
6 Request parameter value 1) 2) 4/5 7
7 Change parameter value (word) 1) 2) 4 7
8 Change parameter value (double word) 1) 2) 5 7
1) The required element of the parameter description is specified in IND (second word).
2) Identifier 1 is identical to identifier 6, ID 2 is identical to 7, and 3 is identical to 8. We recommend
that you use identifiers 6, 7, and 8.
The following table includes the response ID for telegrams between the inverter → master.
The response ID depends on the request ID.
Table 6- 4 Response identifier (inverter → master)
Response identifier Description

0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Request cannot be processed, task cannot be executed (with error number)
2) The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (second word).
If the response ID = 7, then the inverter sends one of the error numbers listed in the
following table in parameter value 2 (PWE2).
Table 6- 5 Error numbers for the response "Request cannot be processed"
No. Description Comments

0 Impermissible parameter number (PNU) Parameter does not exist
1 Parameter value cannot be changed The parameter can only be read
2 Minimum/maximum not achieved or –
exceeded
3 Wrong subindex –
4 No field An individual parameter was addressed with
a field request and subindex > 0
5 Wrong parameter type / wrong data type Confusion of word and double word
6 Setting is not permitted (only resetting) Index is outside the parameter field[]
7 The descriptive element cannot be Description cannot be changed
changed
11 Not in the "master control" mode Change request without "master control"
mode (see p0927)
12 Keyword missing –
17 Request cannot be processed on account The actual inverter operating state is not
of the operating state compatible with the received request
20 Illegal value Modification access with a value which is
within the value limits but which is illegal for
other permanent reasons (parameter with
defined individual values)
101 Parameter number is currently Dependent on the operating state of the
deactivated inverter
102 Channel width is insufficient Communication channel is too small for
response
104 Illegal parameter value The parameter can only assume certain
values.
106 Request not included / task is not After request identifier 5,11,12,13,14,15
supported
107 No write access with enabled controller The operating state of the inverter prevents a
parameter change
200/201 Changed minimum/maximum not The maximum or minimum can be limited
achieved or exceeded further during operation.
204 The available access authorization does –
not cover parameter changes.
Parameter index (IND)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( ,1' 3:(
VW QG UGDQGWK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG

3DJHLQGH[ 6XELQGH[,1'
Figure 6-5 Structure of the parameter index (IND)
● For indexed parameters, select the index of the parameter by transferring the appropriate
value between 0 and 254 to the subindex within a job.
● The page index is used to switch over the parameter numbers. Use this byte to add an
offset to the parameter number that is transferred in the 1st word of the parameter
channel (PKE).
Page index: Offset of parameter number

The parameter numbers are assigned to several parameter ranges. The following table
shows which value you must transfer to the page index to achieve a particular parameter
number.
Table 6- 6 Page index setting dependent on parameter range
Parameter range Page index Hex value

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
0000 … 1999 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x00
2000 … 3999 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x80
6000 … 7999 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0x90
8000 … 9999 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0x20
10000 … 11999 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0xA0
20000 … 21999 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0x50
Parameter value (PWE)

You can vary the number of PWEs using parameter p2023.
Parameter channel with fixed length Parameter channel with variable length
P2023 = 4 P2023 = 127
A parameter channel with fixed length should For a variable length of parameter channel, the
contain 4 words as this setting is sufficient for all master will only send the number of PWEs
parameters (including double words). necessary for the task in the parameter channel.
P2023 = 3 The response telegram is also no longer than
necessary.
You can select this setting if you only want to
read or write 16-bit data or alarm signals.
 16-bit data: e.g. p0210 supply voltage
 32-bit data:
Indexed parameter, e.g. p0700[0…n]
Bit parameter, e.g. 722.0...12)
The master must always transmit the
permanently set number of words in the
parameter channel. Otherwise the slave will not
respond to the telegram.
When the slave responds it must always respond
with the defined number of words.
Note
8-bit values are transmitted as 16-bit values; the higher-order byte is zero. The fields of 8-bit
values require one PWE per index.
Rules for editing requests/responses

● You can only request one parameter for each telegram sent.
● Each received telegram contains only one response.
● The master must repeat a request until it receives a suitable response.
● Request and response are assigned to one another using the following identifiers:
– Suitable response identifier
– Suitable parameter number
– Suitable parameter index IND, if required
– Suitable parameter value PWE, if necessary
● The master must send the complete request in one telegram. Request telegrams cannot
be split up. The same applies to responses.
6.3.2.5 USS read request
Example: Reading out alarm messages from the inverter.

The parameter channel comprises four words (p2023 = 4). In order to obtain the values of
the indexed parameter r2122, you must fill the telegram of the parameter channel with the
following data:
● Request parameter value (field): Bits 15 … 12 in the PKE word:
Request identifier = 6
● Parameter number without offset: Bits 10 … 0 in the PKE word:
Because you can only code parameter numbers from 1 … 1999 in the PKE, you must
deduct as large an offset as possible, a number divisible by 2000, from the parameter
number, and transfer the result of this calculation to the PKE word.
In our example, this means: 2122 - 2000 = 122 = 7AH
● Offset of the parameter number in the byte page index of the word IND:
for this example: When offset = 2000, this corresponds to a page index value of 0x80
● Index of the parameter in the byte subindex of the word IND:
If you wish to read-out the last alarm, then you must enter index 0, for the third from last,
index 2 (example). You can find a detailed description on the history of the alarm
messages in the Section Alarms (Page 282) .
● Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.
Table 6- 7 Request to read parameter r2122[2]
PKE (1st word) IND (2nd word) PWE (3rd and 4th words)
AK PNU: Page index Subindex PWE1(H word) PWE2(L word)
(H byte) (L byte) Drive
Object
15 … 12 11 10 … 0 15 … 8 7…0 15 … 0 15 … 10 9…0
0x6 0 0x7A 0x80 0x02 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000
(dec: 122)
6.3.2.6 USS write job
Example: Define digital input 2 as source for ON/OFF in CDS1

In this case, parameter p0840[1] (source, ON/OFF) must be assigned the value 722.2 (digital
input 2).
The parameter channel comprises four words (p2023 = 4). To change the value of the
indexed parameter P0840, you must fill the telegram of the parameter channel with the
following data:
● Change parameter value (field): Enter bit 15 … 12 in PKE (1st word):
● Parameter number without offset: Enter bit 10 … 0 in PKE (1st word):
As the parameter is < 1999, it can be directly entered without an offset - converted into
hex - in the example 840 = 348H.
● Enter the offset of the parameter number in byte page index of word IND (2nd word):
in this example = 0.
● Enter the index of parameter in the byte subindex of word IND (2nd word):
for this example = 1 (CDS1)
● Enter a new parameter value in PWE1 (Word3):
in the example 722 = 2D2H.
● Drive Object: Enter bit 10 … 15 in PWE2 (4th word):
for SINAMICS G120, always 63 = 3FH
● Index of the parameter: Enter bit 0 … 9 in PWE2 (word4):
in example 2.
Table 6- 8 Request to change p0840[1]
AK PNU: Page index Subindex PWE1(H word) PWE2(L word)
(H byte) (L byte) Drive
Object
15 … 12 11 10 … 0 15 … 8 7…0 15 … 0 15 … 10 9…0
0x7 0 0x348 0x0000 0x01 0x2D2 3F 0x0002
(dec: 840) (dec: 722) (fixed)
(dec: 66)
6.3.2.7 USS process data channel (PZD)
Description
Process data (PZD) is exchanged between the master and slave in this telegram range.
Depending on the direction of transfer, the process data channel contains request data for
the slave or response data to the master. The request contains control words and setpoints
for the slaves, while the response contains status words and actual values for the master.
67: +6: 67:
5HTXHVW 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

WR866VODYH
S
=6: +,: =6:
5HVSRQVH 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

WR866PDVWHU
S
S
Figure 6-6 Process data channel
The number of PZD words in a USS telegram is defined by parameter p2022. The first two
words are:
● Control 1 (STW1, r0054) and main setpoint (HSW)
● Status word 1 (ZSW1, r0052) and main actual value (HIW)
If P2022 is greater than or the same as 4, the additional control word (STW2, r0055) is
transferred as the fourth PZD word (default setting).
You define the sources of the PZD using parameter p2051.
For further information, please refer to the Parameter Manual.
6.3.2.8 Telegram monitoring

You require the telegram runtimes in order to set the telegram monitoring. The character
runtime is the basis of the telegram runtime:
Table 6- 9 Character runtime
Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per bit Character run time (= 11 bits)
9600 104.170 µs 1.146 ms
19200 52.084 µs 0.573 ms
38400 26.042 µs 0.286 ms
115200 5.340 µs 0.059 ms
The telegram runtime is longer than just purely adding all of the character runtimes
(=residual runtime). The character delay time between the individual characters of the
telegram also has to be taken into account.
Residual runtime 50% of compressed

(compressed telegram) telegram residual runtime
67; /*( $'5 ::: Q %&&
67; /*( $'5 ::: Q %&&
&KDUDFWHUGHOD\WLPH &KDUDFWHUUXQWLPH
0D[LPXPUHPDLQLQJWHOHJUDPUXQWLPH
Figure 6-7 Telegram runtime as the sum of the residual runtime and character delay times
The total telegram runtime is always less than 150% of the pure residual runtime.
Before each request telegram, the master must maintain the start delay. The start delay
must be > 2 * character runtime.
The slave only responds after the response delay has expired.
5HVSRQVHGHOD\
67; /*( $'5 ::: Q %&& 67; /*( : : :
5HTXHVWIURPPDVWHU 6ODYHUHVSRQVH 5HTXHVWIURP

6WDUWGHOD\
6WDUWGHOD\
WKHPDVWHU
: : : %&& 67; /*( $'5 ::: Q %&&
Figure 6-8 Start delay and response delay
The duration of the start delay must at least be as long as the time for two characters and
depends on the baud rate.
Table 6- 10 Duration of the start delay
Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per character (= 11 bits) Min. start delay
9600 1.146 ms > 2.291 ms
19200 0.573 ms > 1.146 ms
38400 0.286 ms > 0.573 ms
57600 0.191 ms > 0.382 ms
115200 0.059 ms > 0.117 ms
Note: The character delay time must be shorter than the start delay.
Telegram monitoring of the master

The USS master must monitor the following times:
 Response delay: Response time of the slave to a request from the master
The response delay must be < 20 ms, but longer than the start
delay
 Telegram runtime: Transmission time of the response telegram sent from the slave
Telegram monitoring of the inverter

The inverter monitors the time between two requests of the master. Parameter p2040
defines the permissible time in ms. If this time is exceeded, it is interpreted as a telegram
failure and results in fault message F01910.
150% of the residual runtime is the guide value for the setting of p2040, i.e. the telegram
runtime without taking into account the character delay times.
There is no monitoring for p2040 = 0.
If the USS is configured as a command source for the drive and p2040 is not zero, bit 10 of
the received control word 1 is checked. If the bit is not set, then fault message F07220 is
immediately output.
6.3.3 Communication over Modbus RTU
Overview of communication using Modbus

The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol with linear topology based on a
master/slave architecture.
Modbus offers three transmission modes:
● Modbus ASCII
Data is transferred in ASCII code. The data can therefore be read directly by humans,
however, the data throughput is lower in comparison to RTU.
● Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU (RTU: Remote Terminal Unit): Data is transferred in binary format and the
data throughput is greater than in ASCII code.
● Modbus TCP
This type of data transmission is very similar to RTU, except that TCP/IP packages are
used to send the data. TCP port 502 is reserved for Modbus TCP. Modbus TCP is
currently undergoing definition as a standard (IEC PAS 62030 (pre-standard)).
The Control Unit supports Modbus RTU as a slave with even parity.
%LW ELWVRIGDWD %LW %LW

6WDUW 3HYHQ VWRS
Communication settings
● Communication using Modbus RTU takes place over the RS485 interface with a
maximum of 247 slaves.
● The maximum cable length is 1200 m (3281 ft).
● Two 100 kΩ resistors are provided to polarize the receive and send cables.
6.3.3.1 Parameters for Modbus communication settings

The Modbus address of the inverter can be set using DIP switches on the Control Unit or
using p2021. Using p2021, the address can only be set if all DIP switches for the bus
address are either set to "OFF" (0) or to "ON" (127).
p2021 is read-only.
Valid Modbus addressing range: 1 … 247.
(Page 107).
CAUTION
Table 6- 11 Parameters for setting communication via Modbus
p0700 = 6 Select the command source
6: Via fieldbus
p1000 = 6 Select the setpoint source
6: Via fieldbus
p2030 = 2 Fieldbus telegram selection
2: Modbus
p2020 Fieldbus baud rate
Baud rates from 4800 bit/s to 19200 bit/s can be set for communication, factory setting =
19200 bit/s.
p2024 Modbus timing (see Section "Baud rates and mapping tables (Page 125)")
 Index 0: Maximum slave telegram processing time:
The time after which the slave must have sent a response to the master.
 Index 1: Character delay time:
Character delay time: Maximum permissible delay time between the individual
characters in the Modbus frame. (Modbus standard processing time for 1.5 bytes).
 Index2: Inter-telegram delay:
Maximum permissible delay time between Modbus telegrams. (Modbus standard
processing time for 3.5 bytes).
p2029 Fieldbus fault statistics
Displays receive faults on the fieldbus interface
p2040 Process data monitoring time
Determines the time after which an alarm is generated if no process data are
transferred.
Note: This time must be adapted depending on the number of slaves and the baud rate
set for the bus (factory setting = 100 ms).
Possible causes of a timeout
Alarm Parameter Note

No. name
A1910 Setpoint timeout
The alarm is generated when p2040 ≠ 0 ms and one of the following causes is present:
 The bus connection is interrupted
 The MODBUS master is switched off
 Communication error (CRC, parity bit, logical error)
 An excessively low value for the fieldbus monitoring time (p2040)
6.3.3.2 Modbus RTU telegram
Description
For Modbus, there is precisely one master and up to 247 slaves. Communication is always
triggered by the master. The slaves can only transfer data at the request of the master.
Slave-to-slave communication is not possible. The Control Unit always operates as slave.
The following figure shows the structure of a Modbus RTU telegram.
0RGEXV5787HOHJUDPP
Initial $SSOLNDWLRQ'DWD8QLW Interframe Interframe $SSOLNDWLRQ'DWD8QLW End pause
pause 0RGEXVIUDPH delay delay 0RGEXVIUDPH
Initial pause $SSOLNDWLRQ'DWD8QLW0RGEXVIUDPH Interframe

delay
3URWRFRO'DWD8QLW3'8
Slave CRC
Function Data
code
2 Byte
≥ 3.5 bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0 ... 252 Bytes
CRC low CRC high
Character delay time

≥ 3.5 bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte
Figure 6-9 Modbus with delay times
The data area of the telegram is structured according to the mapping tables.
6.3.3.3 Baud rates and mapping tables
Permissible baud rates and telegram delay

The Modbus RTU telegram requires a pause for the following cases:
● Start detection
● Between the individual frames
● End detection
Minimum duration: Processing time for 3.5 bytes (can be set via p2024[2]).
A character delay time is also permitted between the individual bytes of a frame. Maximum
duration: Processing time for 1.5 bytes (can be set via p2024[1]).
Table 6- 12 Baud rates, transmission times, and delays
Baud rate in bit/s (p2020) Transmission time per Minimum pause Maximum pause
character (11 bits) between two between two bytes
telegrams (p2024[2]) (p2024[1])
4800 2.292 ms ≥ 8.022 ms ≤ 3.4380 ms
9600 1.146 ms ≥4.011 ms ≤ 2.1900 ms
19200 (factory setting) 0.573 ms ≥ 2.0055 ms ≤ 0.8595 ms
Note
The factory setting for p2024[1] and p2024[2] is 0. The particular values are pre-assigned
depending on the protocol selection (p2030) or the baud rate.
Modbus register and Control Unit parameters

Since the Modbus protocol can only handle register or bit numbers for addressing the
memory, assignment to the appropriate control words, status words and parameters is
performed on the slave side.
To ensure compatibility with the Micromaster MM436, two address areas are supported.
 MM436 40001 … 40065

 SINAMICS G120 from 40100 to
40522
The valid holding register address area extends from 40001 to 40522. Access to other
holding registers generates the fault "Exception Code".
As a user, you can use both the register from the MM436 area and from the SINAMICS
G120 area.
The registers 40100 to 40111 are described as process data. A telegram monitoring time
can be activated in p2040 for these registers.
Note
R"; "W"; "R/W" in the column Modbus access stands for read (with FC03); write (with FC06);
read/write.
Table 6- 13 Assigning the Modbus register to the parameters of the Control Unit
Modbus Description Modb Unit Scaling On/Off text Data / parameter

Reg. us factor or value range
No. acces
s
Process data
Control data
40100 Control word R/W -- 1 Process data 1
40101 Main setpoint R/W -- 1 Process data 2
Status data
40110 Status word R -- 1 Process data 1
40111 Main actual value R -- 1 Process data 2
Parameter data
Digital outputs
40200 DO 0 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0730, r747.0, p748.0
40201 DO 1 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0731, r747.1, p748.1
40202 DO 2 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0732, r747.2, p748.2
Analog outputs
40220 AO 0 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.0
40221 AO 1 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.1
Digital inputs
40240 DI 0 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.0
40241 DI 1 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.1
40242 DI 2 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.2
40243 DI 3 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.3
40244 DI 4 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.4
40245 DI 5 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.5
Analog inputs
40260 AI 0 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [0]
40261 AI 1 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [1]
40262 AI 2 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [2]
40263 AI 3 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [3]
Inverter identification
40300 Powerstack number R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0200
40301 CU firmware R -- 0.0001 0.00 … 327.67 r0018

No. acces
s
Inverter data
40320 Rated power of the power unit R kW 100 0 … 327.67 r0206
40321 Current Limit R/W % 10 10.0 … 400.0 p0640
40322 Rampup time R/W s 100 0.00 … 650.0 p1120
40323 Ramp-down time R/W s 100 0.00 … 650.0 p1121
40324 Reference speed R/W RPM 1 6.000 … 32767 p2000
Inverter diagnostics
40340 Speed setpoint R RPM 1 -16250 … 16250 r0020
40341 Speed actual value R RPM 1 -16250 … 16250 r0022
40342 Output frequency R Hz 100 - 327.68 … 327.67 r0024
40343 Output voltage R V 1 0 … 32767 r0025
40344 DC link voltage R V 1 0 … 32767 r0026
40345 Actual value of current R A 100 0 … 163.83 r0027
40346 Actual torque value R Nm 100 - 325.00 … 325.00 r0031
40347 Actual active power R kW 100 0 … 327.67 r0032
40348 Energy consumption R kWh 1 0 … 32767 r0039
40349 Control priority R -- 1 HAND AUTO r0807
Fault diagnostics
40400 Fault number, Index 0 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [0]
40408 Alarm number R -- 1 0 …32767 r2110 [0]
40499 PRM ERROR code R -- 1 0 …99 --
Technology controller
40500 Technology controller enable R/W -- 1 0…1 p2200, r2349.0
40501 Technology controller MOP R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2240
Technology controller adjustment
40510 Time constant for actual value filter of R/W -- 100 0.00 … 60.0 p2265
the technology controller
40511 Scaling factor for actual value of the R/W % 100 0.00 … 500.00 p2269
technology controller
40512 Proportional amplification of the R/W -- 1000 0.000 … 65.000 p2280
40513 Integral time of the technology R/W s 1 0 … 60 p2285
controller

No. acces
s
40514 Time constant D-component of the R/W -- 1 0 … 60 p2274
40515 Max. limit of technology controller R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2291
40516 Min. limit technology controller R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2292
PID diagnostics
40520 Effective setpoint acc. to internal R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2250
technology controller MOP ramp-
function generator
40521 Actual value of technology controller R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2266
after filter
40522 Output signal technology controller R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2294
6.3.3.4 Write and read access via FC 3 and FC 6
Function codes used

For data exchange between the master and slave, predefined function codes are used for
communication via Modbus.
The Control Unit uses the Modbus function code 03, FC 03, (read holding registers) for
reading and the Modbus function code 06, FC 06, (preset single register) for writing.
Structure of a read request via Modbus function code 03 (FC 03)

All valid register addresses are permitted as a start address. If a register address is invalid,
exception code 02 (invalid data address) is returned. An attempt to read a write-only register
or a reserved register is replied to with a normal telegram in which all values are set to 0.
Using FC 03, it is possible to address more than 1 register with one request. The number of
addressed registers is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the read request.
Number of registers
If more than 125 registers are addressed, exception code 03 (Illegal data value) is returned.
If the start address plus the number of registers for an address are outside of a defined
register block, exception code 02 (invalid data address) is returned.
Table 6- 14 Structure of a read request for slave number 17
Example
Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code
00 h 2 Register start address "High" (register 40110)
6D h 3 Register start address "Low"
00 h 4 No. of registers "High" (2 registers: 40110; 40111)
02 h 5 Number of registers "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
The response returns the corresponding data set:
Table 6- 15 Slave response to the read request
Example
Byte Description
04 h 2 No. of bytes (4 bytes are returned)
11 h 3 Data of first register "High"
22 h 4 Data of first register "Low"
33 h 5 Data of second register "High"
44 h 6 Data of second register "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "Low"
xx h 8 CRC "High"
Structure of a write request via Modbus function code 06 (FC 06)

The start address is the holding register address. If an incorrect address is entered (a
holding register address does not exist), exception code 02 (invalid data address) is
returned. An attempt to write to a "read-only" register or a reserved register is replied to with
a Modbus error telegram (Exception Code 4 - device failure). In this instance, the detailed
internal error code that occurred on the last parameter access via the holding registers can
be read out via holding register 40499.
Using FC 06, precisely one register can always be addressed with one request. The value
which is to be written to the addressed register is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the write
request.
Table 6- 16 Structure of a write request for slave number 17
Example
Byte Description
00 h 2 Register start address "High" (write register 40100)
63 h 3 Register start address "Low"
55 h 4 Register data "High"
66 h 5 Register data "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
The response returns the register address (bytes 2 and 3) and the value (bytes 4 and 5) that
was written to the register.
Table 6- 17 Slave response to the write request
Example
Byte Description
00 h 2 Register start address "High"
63 h 3 Register start address "Low"
55 h 4 Register data "High"
66 h 5 Register data "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
6.3.3.5 Communication procedure
Procedure for communication in a normal case

Normally, the master sends a telegram to a slave (address range 1 ... 247). The slave sends
a response telegram to the master. This response telegram mirrors the function code, and
the slave enters its own address in the telegram, which enables the master to assign the
slave.
The slave only processes orders and telegrams which are directly addressed to it.
Communication errors
If the slave detects a communication error on receipt (parity, CRC), it does not send a
response to the master (this can lead to "setpoint timeout").
Logical error
If the slave detects a logical error within a request, it responds to the master with an
"exception response". In the response, the highest bit in the function code is set to 1. If the
slave receives, for example, an unsupported function code from the master, the slave
responds with an "exception response" with code 01 (Illegal function code).
Table 6- 18 Overview of exception codes
Exception Modbus name Remark

code
01 Illegal function code An unknown (not supported) function code was sent to the
slave.
02 Illegal Data Address An invalid address was requested.
03 Illegal data value An invalid data value was detected.
04 Server failure Slave has terminated during processing.
Maximum processing time, p2024[0]

For error-free communication, the slave response time (time within which the Modbus master
expects a response to a request) must have the same value in the master and the slave
(p2024[0] in the inverter).
Process data monitoring time (setpoint timeout), p2040

The alarm "Setpoint timeout" (F1910) is issued by the Modbus if p2040 is set to a value > 0
ms and no process data are requested within this time period.
The alarm "Setpoint timeout" only applies for access to process data (40100, 40101, 40110,
40111). The alarm "Setpoint timeout" is not generated for parameter data (40200 … 40522).
Note
This time must be adapted depending on the number of slaves and the baud rate set for the
bus (factory setting = 100 ms).
6.3.4 Communication via BACnet MS/TP
BACnet properties
In BACnet, components and systems are considered to be black boxes which contain a
number of objects. BACnet objects only define behavior outside the device, internal functions
are not determined by BACnet.
Each component is represented by a series of object types and their instances.
Each BACnet device has precisely one BACnet device object. A BACnet device is clearly
identified by an NSAP (Network Service Access Point - comprising network number and
MAC address; MAC: Medium Access Control). This address is BACnet-specific and must not
be confused with the Ethernet MAC address.
Data exchange with the client

The inverter receives control commands and setpoints via service instructions from the
control and transmits its status back to the control. The inverter can also send telegrams
automatically itself, respectively execute services, e.g. I-Am.
Communication settings
● The Control Unit supports BACnet via RS485 (BACnet MS/TP)
● The maximum cable length is 1200 m (3281 ft).
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

You will find the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) in the Internet
under the following link: BACnet files
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38439094)
6.3.4.1 Parameters for setting communication via BACnet

The MAC ID of the inverter can be set using DIP switches on the Control Unit or using
p2021. Using p2021, the address can only be set if all DIP switches for the bus address are
to "OFF" (0).
p2021 is read-only.
Valid BACnet addressing range: 1 … 127
(Page 107).
CAUTION
Table 6- 19 Parameters for setting communication via BACnet MS/TP
P no. Parameter name

p2030 Fieldbus telegram selection
0: No protocol
1: USS
2: Modbus
5: BACnet
p0700 Select the command source
2: Via terminals
6: Via fieldbus
p1000 Select the setpoint source
0: No main setpoint
1: Via motorized potentiometer
2: Via analog setpoint
3: Via fixed speed setpoint
6: Via fieldbus
7: Via analog setpoint 2
p2020 Baud rate
6: 9600 (factory setting)
7: 19200
8: 38400
10: 76800
p2024[0 … 2] Processing times
P2024 [0]: 0 ms … 10000 ms, maximum processing time (APDU timeout), factory
setting = 1000 ms,
P2024 [1 … 2]: No significance for BACnet
p2025[0…3] BACnet communication parameter
 p2025 [0]: 0 … 4194303, Device object instance number,
Factory setting = 1
 p2025 [1]: 1 … 10, Maximum Info Frames, factory setting = 1
 p2025 [2]: 0 … 99, Number of APDU Retries (repeated attempts after fault
telegrams), factory setting = 3
 p2025 [3]: 1 … 127, maximum Master address, factory setting = 127
P no. Parameter name

p2026 Setting of the COV_Increment
(COV = Change of values) 0 … 4194303.000, factory setting = 0.100
COV_Increment: Value change of the "Present Value" of an object instance where an
UnConfirmedCOVNotification or ConfirmedCOVNotification should be transferred
from the server.
 p2026 [0]: COV increment of object instance "Analog Input 0"
You can use these parameters to set for which value changes an
UnConfirmedCOVNotification or ConfirmedCOVNotificationresult is sent. Therefore,
the factory setting 0.100 means that an UnConfirmedCOVNotification or
ConfirmedCOVNotification is sent if the value being considered (e.g. for a control
range from 0 … 10 V) changes by an absolute value of ≥ 0.1. Of course this only
applies if previously a SubscribeCOV service was activated for the particular object
instance.
You can also set the COV increment using the object property "COVIncrement" of the
particular analog input.
p2040 Fieldbus monitoring time
0 ms … 65535000 ms, factory setting = 100 ms
Note: The factory setting for communication with BACnet is possibly too low and
must be increased. Please adapt the value to the requirements and properties of your
particular plant or system.
The reason for the factory setting of 100 ms is that the communication protocols for
USS and Modbus RTU should also be executed via the RS485 interface.
6.3.4.2 Supported services and objects
BIBBs used by the inverter

The BIBBs are a collection of one or several BACnet services The BACnet services are sub-
divided into A and B devices. An A device operates as client and B device as server.
The inverter is a server and therefore operates as B device, as "BACnet Application Specific
Controller" (B-ASC).
The CU230P-2 HVAC uses the BIBBs listed below:
Table 6- 20 Overview of the BIBB used by CU230P-2 HVAC and associated services
Short designation BIBB Service

DS-RP-B Data Sharing-ReadProperty-B ReadProperty
DS-WP-B Data Sharing-WriteProperty-B WriteProperty
DM-DDB-B Device Management-Dynamic Device  Who-Is
Binding-B  I-Am
DM-DOB-B Device Management-Dynamic Object  Who-Has
Binding-B  I-Have
DM-DCC-B Device Management- DeviceCommunicationControl
DeviceCommunicationControl-B
DS-COV-B Data Sharing-COV-B  SubscribeCOV,
 ConfirmedCOVNotification,
 UnConfirmedCOVNotification
The inverter can simultaneously process up to 32 SubscribeCOV services. These can all
refer to the same object instances - or different object instances.
SubscribeCOV is supported for binary value objects (BVxx) and for analog input objects (AI
xx).
Note
SubscribeCOV services are not retentive, i.e. when switching off, COVs, which have not
been executed, are lost and must be re-initiated when the CU restarts.
Table 6- 21 Code numbers of the object types supported in BACnet
Object type Code number for BACnet object type

Device 8
Digital input 3
Digital output 4
Digital value 5
Analog input 0
Analog output 1
Analog value 2
Table 6- 22 Object properties of the "Device" object type
 Object_Identifier  Application_Software_Version  APDU_Timeout

 Object_Name  Protocol_Version  Number_Of_APDU_Retries
 Object_Type  Protocol_Revision  Max Master
 System_Status  Protocol_Services_Supported  Max Info Frames
 Vendor_Name  Protocol_Object_Types_Supported  Device Address Binding
 Vendor_Identifier  Object_List  Database Revision
 Model_Name  Max_APDU_Length_Accepted 1)
 Firmware_Revision  Segmentation_Supported 2)
1) Maximum value = 480, 2) is not supported
Table 6- 23 Object properties of other object types
Object property Object type

Binary input Binary output Binary value Analog input Analog value
Object_Identifier X X X X X
Object_Name X X X X X
Object_Type X X X X X
Present_Value X X X X X
Status_Flags X X X X X
Event_State X X X X X
Out_Of_Service X X X X X
Units X X
Priority_Array X X* X*
Relinquish_Default X X* X*
Polarity X X
Active_Text X X X
Inactive_Text X X X
COV_Increment X
* for command values only (access type C)
Note
Access types are available in the following versions
 C: commandable
 R: Readable
 W: Writable
Table 6- 24 Binary input objects
Instance Object name Description Possible Text active / Access Parameter

ID values text inactive type
BI0 DI0 ACT State of DI 0 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.0
BI7 DI7 ACT State of AI 1 - used as DI ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.11
BI8 DI8 ACT State of AI 2 - used as DI ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.12
BI10 DO0 ACT Controls DO 0 (relay 1) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r747.0
BI11 DO1 ACT Controls DO 1 (relay 2) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r747.1
BI12 DO2 ACT Status of DO2 (relay 3) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r747.2
Table 6- 25 Binary output objects
Instance Object name Description Possible Text active / Access Parameter

ID values text inactive type
BO0 DO0 CMD Controls DO 0 (relay 1) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0730
Table 6- 26 Binary value objects
Instance Object name Description Possible Text Text Access Parameter

ID values active inactive type
BV0 RUN/ STOP Inverter status regardless of RUN/STOP STOP RUN R r0052.2
ACT command source
BV1 FWD/ REV Direction of rotation regardless of REV/ FWD FWD REV R r0052.14
command source
BV2 FAULT ACT Fault status of inverter FAULT/OK FAULT OK R r0052.3
BV3 WARN ACT Warning status of inverter WARN/OK WARN OK R r0052.7
BV4 HAND/ Indicates the source of the AUTO / AUTO LOCAL R r0052.9
AUTO ACT hand/auto inverter control MANUAL
Instance Object name Description Possible Text Text Access Parameter

ID values active inactive type
BV7 CTL ACT indicates if the inverter control ON/OFF 0 1 R r2032[10]
OVERRIDE has been transferred to BACnet
ACT override control via BV93.
Note that the operator panel's
"Manual" operating mode has a
higher priority than the BACnet
override control.
BV8 AT SET- Setpoint reached YES/NO YES NO R r0052.8
POINT
BV9 AT MAX Maximum speed reached YES/NO YES NO R r0052.10
FREQ
BV10 DRIVE Inverter ready YES/NO YES NO R r0052.1
READY
BV15 RUN COM ACT indicates the status of the ON YES/NO 0 1 R r2032[0]
ACT command, regardless of the source
BV16 HIB MOD ACT means that the inverter is ON/OFF 0 1 R r2399[1]
ACT operating in hibernation mode.
BV17 ESM MOD ACT means that the inverter is ON/OFF 0 1 R r3889[0]
operating in emergency mode.
BV20 RUN/ STOP ON command for the inverter (when RUN/STOP 0 1 C r0054.0
CMD controlling via BACnet)
BV21 FWD/ REV Reverse direction of rotation (when REV/ FWD 0 1 C r0054.11
CMD controlling via BACnet)
BV22 FAULT Acknowledge fault (when controlling RESET/NO 0 1 C r0054.7
RESET via BACnet)
BV24 CDS Local/Remote Local/Remo YES NO C r0054.15
te
BV26 RUN ENA Enable inverter operation ENABLE DISABL C r0054.3
CMD D ED
BV27 OFF2 OFF2 status RUN/STOP 0 1 C r0054.1
BV28 OFF3 OFF3 status RUN/STOP 0 1 C r0054.2
Note:
Bits r0054.4, r0054.5 and r0054.6
are also set or reset via BV28
BV50 ENABLE PID Enable PID controller ENABLE DISABL C p2200
D ED
BV90 LOCAL Use HAND (operator panel) to lock LOCK UNLOC C p0806
LOCK inverter control K
BV93 CTL Inverter control using BACnet ON/OFF 0 1 C r0054.10
OVERRIDE override control
CMD
Table 6- 27 Analog input objects
Instanc Object name Description Unit Area Access Parameter

e ID type
AI0 ANALOG INPUT 0 AI0 input signal V/mA -300.0 … 300.0 R r0752[0]
AI1 ANALOG INPUT 1 AI1 input signal V/mA -300.0 … 300.0 R r0752[1]
AI10 ANALOG INPUT 0 Standardized AI 0 input signal % -100.0 … 100.0 R r0755[0]
SCALED
AI11 ANALOG INPUT 1 Standardized AI 1 input signal % -100.0 … 100.0 R r0755[1]
SCALED
Table 6- 28 Analog value objects

e ID type
AV0 OUTPUT FREQ_Hz Output frequency (Hz) Hz -327.68 … 327.67 R r0024
AV1 OUTPUT FREQ_PCT Output frequency (%) % -100.0 … 100.0 R HIW
AV2 OUTPUT SPEED Motor speed RPM -16250 … 16250 R r0022
AV3 DC BUS VOLT DC link voltage. V 0 … 32767 R r0026
AV4 OUTPUT VOLT Output voltage V 0 … 32767 R r0025
AV5 CURRENT Motor current A 0 … 163.83 R r0027
AV6 TORQUE Motor torque Nm - 325.00 … 325.00 R r0031
AV7 POWER Motor power kW 0 … 327.67 R r0032
AV8 DRIVE TEMP Heat-sink temperature °C 0 … 327.67 R r0037
AV9 MOTOR TEMP Measured or calculated motor °C 0 … 327.67 R r0035
temperature
AV10 KWH (NR) Cumulative inverter energy kWh 0 … 32767 R r0039
consumption (cannot be reset!)
AV12 INV RUN TIME (R) Motor's operating hours (is reset h 0 … 4294967295 W p0650
by entering "0")
AV13 INV Model Code number of Power Module --- R r0200
AV14 INV FW VER Firmware version --- R r0018
AV15 INV POWER Rated power of the inverter kW 0 … 327.67 R r0206
AV16 RPM STPT 1 Inverter's reference speed RPM 6.0 … 210000 W p2000
AV17 FREQ STPT PCT Setpoint 1 (when controlling via % -199.99 … 199.99 C HSW
BACnet)
AV18 ACT FAULT Fault number of fault due to be --- 0 … 32767 R r0947[0]
dealt with
AV19 PREV FAULT 1 Fault number of last fault --- 0 … 32767 R r0947[1]
AV20 PREV FAULT 2 Fault number of last but one --- 0 … 32767 R r0947[2]
fault
AV21 PREV FAULT 3 Fault number of the third from --- 0 … 32767 R r0947[3]
last fault
AV22 PREV FAULT 4 Fault number of the fourth from --- 0 … 32767 R r0947[4]
last fault
AV25 Select Setpoint Source Command to select the setpoint --- 0 … 32767 W p1000
source

e ID type
AV28 AO1 ACT Signal from AO 1 mA -100.0 … 100.0 R r0774.0
AV29 AO2 ACT Signal from AO 1 mA -100.0 … 100.0 R r0774.1
AV30 MIN SPEED Minimum speed RPM 0.000 – 19500.000 W p1080
AV31 MAX FREQ Maximum speed RPM 0.000 … 210000.000 W p1082
AV32 ACCEL TIME Rampup time s 0.00 … 999999.0 W p1120
AV33 DECEL TIME Ramp-down time s 0.00 … 999999.0 W P1121
AV34 CUR LIM Current limit A 0.00 … 10000.00 R p0640
AV39 ACT WARN Indication of pending alarm --- 0 … 32767 R r2110[0]
AV40 PREV WARN 1 Indication of the last alarm --- 0 … 32767 R r2110[1]
AV41 PREV WARN 2 Indication of the last but one --- 0 … 32767 R r2110[2]
alarm
6.4 Communication via PROFIBUS
Connect the frequency inverter to PROFIBUS

Inverters with PROFIBUS DP interface have a nine-pin SUB-D socket on the lower side of
the Control Unit to integrate the inverter into a PROFIBUS network.
The SUB D connection is suitable for the SIMATIC RS485 bus connector.
Recommended PROFIBUS connectors

We recommend one of the following connectors for the PROFIBUS cable:
1. 6GK1500-0FC00
2. 6GK1500-0EA02
Both connectors are suitable for all SINAMICS G120 Control Units with respect to the angle
of the outgoing cable.
Note
PROFIBUS communication when the 400 V supply for the inverter is switched off
If the inverter is only supplied via the 400 V line connection for the Power Module, the
PROFIBUS connection for the Control Unit is interrupted as soon as the power supply is
disconnected. To prevent this, the Control Unit must be connected to a separate 24 V power
supply via terminals 31 (+24 V In) and 32 (0 V In).
Permissible cable lengths, routing and shielding the PROFIBUS cable

Information can be found in the Internet
(http://www.automation.siemens.com/net/html_76/support/printkatalog.htm).
6.4.1 Configuring communication via PROFIBUS
6.4.1.1 Task
The inverter is to be controlled from a central SIMATIC controller via PROFIBUS. whereby
the control signals and speed setpoint are to be transferred from an S7-300 CPU to the
drive. In the other direction, the drive is to transfer its status messages and actual speed
value to the central controller via PROFIBUS.
Using a suitable example, the following section provides instructions explaining how to
connect an inverter to a higher-level SIMATIC controller via PROFIBUS. To extend the
PROFIBUS network to include additional inverters, simply repeat the relevant steps.
What prior knowledge is required?

In this example, it is assumed that readers know now to basically use an S7 control and the
STEP 7 engineering tool and is not part of this description.
6.4.1.2 Required components

The examples given in this manual for configuring communication between the control and
inverter are based on the hardware listed below:
Table 6- 29 Hardware components (example)
Component Type Order no. Qty

Central controller
Power supply PS307 2 A 6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0 1
S7 CPU CPU 315-2DP 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 1
Memory card MMC 2MB 6ES7953-8LL11-0AA0 1
DIN rail DIN rail 6ES7390-1AE80-0AA0 1
PROFIBUS connector PROFIBUS connector 6ES7972-0BB50-0XA0 1
PROFIBUS cable PROFIBUS cable 6XV1830-3BH10 1
Drive
SINAMICS G120 Control Unit CU230P-2 DP 6SL3243-0BB30-1PA1 1
SINAMICS G120 Power Module Any - 1
PROFIBUS connector PROFIBUS connector 6GK1500-0FC00 1
In order to configure the communication you also require the following software packages:
Table 6- 30 Software components
Component Type (or higher) Order no. Qty

SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.3 + SP3 6ES7810-4CC07-0YA5 1
STARTER V4.1 SP5 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0 1
Drive ES Basic V5.4 6SW1700-5JA00-4AA0 1
Drive ES Basic is the basic software of the engineering system, which combines the drive
technology and Siemens controllers. The STEP 7 Manager user interface acts as a basis
with which Drive ES Basic is used to integrate drives in the automation environment with
respect to communication, configuration, and data storage.
6.4.1.3 Setting the PROFIBUS address
Setting the PROFIBUS address of the inverter

The inverter's PROFIBUS address is set using DIP switches on the Control Unit or using
p0918. Using p0918, the address can only be set if all DIP switches for the bus address are
either set to "OFF" (0) or to "ON" (127).
If the address switches are set to a value ≠ 0 or 127, this address is always active and
p0918 is read-only.
(Page 107).
Valid PROFIBUS addresses: 1 … 125

Invalid PROFIBUS addresses: 126, 127
CAUTION
6.4.1.4 Creating a STEP 7 project

PROFIBUS communication between the inverter and a SIMATIC control is configured using
the SIMATIC STEP 7 and HW Config software tools.
Procedure
● Create a new STEP 7 project and assign a project name, e.g. "G120_in_S7". Add an S7
300 CPU.
Figure 6-10 Inserting a SIMATIC 300 station into a STEP 7 project
● Select the SIMATIC 300 station in your project and open the hardware configuration (HW
Config) by double clicking on "Hardware".
● Add an S7 300 mounting rail to your project by dragging and dropping it from the
"SIMATIC 300" hardware catalog. Locate a power supply at slot 1 of the mounting rail
and a CPU 315-2 DP at slot 2.
When you add the SIMATIC 300, a window is displayed in which you can define the network.
● Create a PROFIBUS DP network.
Figure 6-11 Inserting a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS DP network
In STEP 7, the inverter can be connected to an S7 control in two ways:

1. Using the inverter GSD
The GSD is a standardized description file for a PROFIBUS slave. The GSD is used by
all controls, which are the PROFIBUS master.
You have two options to obtain the GSD for your inverter:
– You can find the SINAMICS inverter GSD on the Internet
– The GSD is saved in the inverter. The GSD is written to the memory card if you insert
the memory card in the Control Unit and set p0804 to 12. Using the memory card, you
can then transfer the GSD to your PG/your PC.
2. Using the STEP 7 object manager
This somewhat more user-friendly method is only available for S7 controls and installed
Drive_ES_Basic.
The following section describes how to configure the inverter using the GSD.
6.4.1.5 Inserting the inverter into the STEP 7 project

● Install the GSD of the inverter in STEP 7 using HW Config (menu "Options - Install GSD
files").
Once the GSD has been installed, the inverter appears as "SINAMICS G120 CU230P-2 DP
V4.3" object under "PROFIBUS DP - additional field devices" in the hardware catalog of HW
Config.
● Drag and drop the inverter into the PROFIBUS network. Enter the PROFIBUS address
set at the inverter in HW Config.
● Insert the required telegram type from the HW Catalog to slot 1 of the inverter by
'dragging and dropping'.
STEP 7 automatically allocates the address range in which the inverter process data are
located.
The inverter object in the HW Config product catalog contains several telegram types. The
telegram type defines which data is exchanged between the control and inverter. More
information on the telegram types can be found in Chapter Cyclic communication
(Page 147).
Rules for the slot sequence

The following sequence must be maintained when assigning the slots:
1. PKW channel (if one is used)
2. Standard, SIEMENS or free telegram (if one is used)
3. Slave-to-slave module
If you do not use one or several of the modules 1 or 2, configure the remaining modules
starting with the 1st slot.
Note regarding the universal module

It is not permissible to configure the universal module with the following properties:
● PZD length 4/4 words
● Consistent over the complete length
With these properties, the universal module has the same DP identifier (4AX) as the "PKW
channel 4 words" and is therefore identified as such by the higher-level control. As a
consequence, the control does not establish cyclic communication with the inverter.
Remedy: Change the length to 8/8 bytes in the properties of the DP slave. As an alternative,
you can also change the consistency to "unit".
Final steps
● Save and compile the project in STEP 7.
● Establish an online connection between your PC and the S7 CPU and download the
project data to the S7 CPU.
● In the inverter, select the telegram type, which you configured in STEP 7, using
parameter P0922.
The inverter is now connected to the S7 CPU. This therefore defines the communication
interface between the CPU and the inverter. An example of how you can supply this
interface with data can be found in the section STEP 7 program examples (Page 158).
6.4.2 Communication parameters
Table 6- 31 The most important parameters
p0700 = 6 Command source selection You set the command and setpoint source
Selecting the fieldbus as command source during the basic commissioning, see
Commissioning (Page 63)
p1000 = 6 Speed setpoint selection
Selecting the fieldbus as setpoint source
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection (factory setting for CU with PROFIBUS interface: 1)
Set the send and receive telegram, see
1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352 SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, BW-PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, BW-PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram configuring with BICO
Using parameter p0922, you automatically interconnect the corresponding signals of the
inverter to the telegram.
This BICO interconnection can only be changed, if you set p0922 to 999. In this case, select
your required telegram using p2079 and then adapt the BICO interconnection of the signals.
Table 6- 32 Advanced settings
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended
Contrary to p0922, using p2079, a telegram can be set and subsequently extended.
For p0922 < 999, the following applies: p2079 has the same value and is locked. All of
the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are locked.
For p0922 = 999, the following applies: p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to
999, then all interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999, the following applies: The interconnections
contained in the telegram are locked. However, the telegram can be extended.
For further information, please refer to the Parameter Manual.
6.4.3 Cyclic communication

The PROFIdrive profile defines different telegram types. Telegrams contain the data for
cyclic communication with a defined meaning and sequence. The inverter has the telegram
types listed in the table below.
Table 6- 33 Inverter telegram types
Telegram type (p0922) Process data (PZD) - control and status words, setpoints and actual values
PZD01 PZD02 PZD03 PZD04 PZD05 PZD06 PZD PZD
STW1 HSW 07 08
ZSW1 HIW
Telegram 1 STW1 NSOLL_A ⇐ The inverter receives this data from the control
Speed control ZSW1 NIST_A ⇒ The inverter sends this data to the control
PZD 2/2
Telegram 20 STW1 NSOLL_A
Speed control, VIK/NAMUR ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ MIST_ PIST_ MELD_
PZD 2/6 GLATT GLATT GLATT GLATT NAMUR
Telegram 350 STW1 NSOLL_A M_LIM STW3
Speed control ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ ZSW3
PZD 4/4 GLATT GLATT
Telegram 352 STW1 NSOLL_A PCS7 process data
Speed control, PCS7 ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ MIST_ WARN_ FAULT_
PZD 6/6 GLATT GLATT GLATT CODE CODE
Telegram 353 STW1 NSOLL_A
Speed control, ZSW1 NIST_A_
PKW 4/4 and PZD 2/2 GLATT
Telegram 354 STW1 NSOLL_A PCS7 process data
Speed control, ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ MIST_ WARN_ FAULT_
PKW 4/4 and PZD 6/6 GLATT GLATT GLATT CODE CODE
Telegram 999 STW1 Telegram length on receipt can be configured up to max. 8 words
Free interconnection via BICO ZSW1 Telegram length on transmission can be configured up to max. 8 words
PZD n/m (n,m = 1 … 8)
Table 6- 34 Explanation of the abbreviations
Abbreviation Significance Abbreviation Significance

STW1/2 Control word 1/2 PIST_GLATT Actual active power
ZSW1/2 Status word 1/2 MELD_NAMUR Control word according to the VIK-
NAMUR definition
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint M_LIM Torque limit value
NIST_A_GLATT Smoothed speed actual value FAULT_CODE Fault number
IAIST_GLATT Smoothed actual current value WARN_CODE Alarm number
MIST_GLATT Actual torque
Table 6- 35 Telegram status in the inverter
Process data Control ⇒ inverter Inverter ⇒ control

item Status of the received Bits 0…15 in the Defining the word to be Status of the sent word
word received word sent
PZD01 r2050[0] r2090.0 … r2090.15 p2051[0] r2053[0]
PZD02 r2050[1] r2091.0 … r2091.15 p2051[1] r2053[1]
PZD03 r2050[2] r2092.0 … r2092.15 p2051[2] r2053[2]
PZD04 r2050[3] r2093.0 … r2093.15 p2051[3] r2053[3]
PZD05 r2050[4] - p2051[4] r2053[4]
PZD06 r2050[5] - p2051[5] r2053[5]
PZD07 r2050[6] - p2051[6] r2053[6]
PZD08 r2050[7] - p2051[7] r2053[7]
Select telegram
Select the communication telegram using parameters p0922 and p2079. The following
dependencies apply:
● P0922 < 999:
For p0922 < 999, the inverter sets p2079 to the same value as p0922.
With this setting, the inverter defines the length and the content of the telegram. The
inverter does not permit any changes to the telegram.
● p0922 = 999, p2079 < 999:
For p0922 = 999, select a telegram via p2079.
Also with this setting, the inverter defines the length and the content of the telegram. The
inverter does not permit any changes to the telegram content. However, you can extend
the telegram.
● p0922 = p2079 = 999:
For p0922 = p2079 = 999, enter the length and the content of the telegram.
With this setting, you can define the telegram length via the central PROFIdrive
configuration in the master. You define the telegram contents via the signal
interconnections of the BICO technology. Using p2038, you can define the assignment of
the control word according to SINAMICS or VIK/NAMUR.
You will find more details on the interconnection of command and setpoint sources,
depending on the selected protocol, in the List Manual in function block diagrams 2420 to
2472.
6.4.3.1 Control and status words
Description
The control and status words fulfill the specifications of PROFIdrive profile version 4.1 for
"speed control" mode.
Control word 1 (STW1)

Control word 1 (bits 0 … 10 in accordance with PROFIdrive profile and VIK/NAMUR, bits 11
… 15 specific to inverter).
Table 6- 36 Control word 1 and interconnection with parameters in the inverter
Bit Valu Significance Remarks P No.

e
Telegram 20 All other telegrams
0 0 OFF1 Motor brakes with the ramp-down time p1121 at p0840[0] =
standstill (f < fmin) the motor is switched off. r2090.0
1 ON With a positive edge, the inverter goes into the "ready"
state, with additionally bit 3 = 1, the inverter switches on
the motor.
1 0 OFF2 Switch off motor immediately, motor coasts to a p0844[0] =
standstill. r2090.1
1 No OFF2 ---
2 0 Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: Motor brakes with the OFF3 ramp-down p0848[0] =
time p1135 down to standstill. r2090.2
1 No quick stop (OFF3) ---
3 0 Disable operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 Lock ramp-function generator The ramp-function generator output is set to 0 (quickest p1140[0] =
possible deceleration). r2090.4
1 Operating condition Ramp-function generator can be enabled
5 0 Stop ramp-function generator The output of the ramp-function generator is "frozen". p1141[0] =
1 Ramp-function generator enable r2090.5
6 0 Inhibit setpoint Motor brakes with the ramp-down time p1121. p1142[0] =
1 Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time p1120 to the r2090.6
setpoint.
7 1 Acknowledging faults Fault is acknowledged with a positive edge. If the ON p2103[0] =
command is still active, the inverter switches to"closing r2090.7
lockout" state.
8 Not used
9 Not used
10 0 PLC has no master control Process data invalid, "sign of life" expected. p0854[0] =
1 Master control by PLC Control via fieldbus, process data valid. r2090.10
11 1 ---1) Direction reversal Setpoint is inverted in the inverter. p1113[0] =

r2090.11
12 Not used

e Telegram 20 All other telegrams
13 1 ---1) MOP up The setpoint stored in the motorized potentiometer is p1035[0] =
increased. r2090.13
14 1 ---1) MOP down The setpoint stored in the motorized potentiometer is p1036[0] =
decreased. r2090.14
15 1 CDS bit 0 Not used Changes over between settings for different operation p0810 =
interfaces (command data sets). r2090.15
1) If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous telegram is kept.
Control word 3 (STW3)

Control word 3 has the following default assignment. You can change the assignment with
BICO technology.
Table 6- 37 Control word 3 and interconnection with parameters in the inverter

e Telegram 350 All other
telegrams
0 1 Fixed setpoint, bit 0 Not used Selects up to 16 different fixed setpoints. p1020[0] =
r2093.0
1 1 Fixed setpoint, bit 1 Not used p1021[0] =
r2093.1
r2093.2
r2093.3
4 1 DDS selection, bit 0 1) Changes over between settings for different motors p0810 =
(drive data sets). r2093.4
5 1 DDS selection, bit 1 1) p0811 =
r2093.5
6 – Not used
7 – Not used
8 1 Technology controller 1) -- p2200[0] =
enable r2093.8
9 1 DC braking enable 1) -- p1230[0] =
r2093.9
10 – Not used
11 1 1 = Enable droop 1) Enable or inhibit speed controller droop. p1492[0] =
r2093.11
12 1 Torque control active 1) Changes over the control mode for vector control. p1501[0] =
0 Speed control active r2093.12
14 – Not used
15 1 CDS bit 1 1) Changes over between settings for different p0811[0] =
operation interfaces (command data sets). r2093.15
1) If you change over from telegram 350 to another one, then the assignment of the telegram 350 is kept.
Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Status word 1 (bits 0 to 10 in accordance with PROFIdrive profile and VIK/NAMUR, bits 11 to
15 for SINAMICS G120 only).
Table 6- 38 Status word 1 and interconnection with parameters in the inverter

e
Telegram 20 All other telegrams
0 1 Ready for switching on Power supply switched on; electronics initialized; p2080[0] =
pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 Ready for operation Motor is switched on (ON1 command present), no p2080[1] =
active fault, motor can start as soon as "enable r0899.1
operation" command is issued. See control word 1,
bit 0.
2 1 Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, bit 3. p2080[2] =
r0899.2
3 1 Fault present The inverter has a fault. p2080[3] =
r2139.3
4 1 OFF2 inactive Coast to standstill not activated (no OFF2) p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 OFF3 inactive No fast stop active p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 Closing lockout active The motor is only switched on after a further ON1 p2080[6] =
command r0899.6
7 1 Alarm active Motor remains switched on; acknowledgement is p2080[7] =
not required; see r2110. r2139.7
8 1 Speed deviation within tolerance range Setpoint/actual value deviation within tolerance p2080[8] =
range. r2197.7
9 1 Control requested The automation system is requested to assume p2080[9] =
control. r0899.9
10 1 Comparison speed reached or exceeded Speed is greater than or equal to the corresponding p2080[10] =
maximum speed. r2199.1
11 0 I, M or P limit reached Comparison value for current, torque or power has p2080[11] =
been reached or exceeded. r1407.7
12 1 ---1) Holding brake open Signal to open and close a motor holding brake. p2080[12] =
r0899.12
13 0 Alarm motor overtemperature -- p2080[13] =
r2135.14
14 1 Motor rotates forwards Internal inverter actual value > 0 p2080[14] =
0 Motor rotates backwards Internal inverter actual value < 0 r2197.3
15 1 CDS display No alarm, thermal p2080[15] =
power unit overload r0836.0 /
r2135.15
1) If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous telegram is kept.
Status word 3 (ZSW3)

Status word 3 has the following standard assignment. You can change the assignment with
BICO technology.
Table 6- 39 Status word 3 and interconnection with parameters in the inverter
Bit Valu Significance Description P No.

e
0 1 DC braking active -- p2051[3] =
1 1 |n_act| > p1226 Absolute current speed > stationary state detection r0053
2 1 |n_act| > p1080 Absolute actual speed > minimum speed

3 1 i_act ≧ p2170 Actual current ≥ current threshold value
4 1 |n_act| > p2155 Absolute actual speed > speed threshold value 2
5 1 |n_act| ≦ p2155 Absolute actual speed < speed threshold value 2
6 1 |n_act| ≧ r1119 Speed setpoint reached
7 1 DC link voltage ≦ p2172 Actual DC link voltage ≦ threshold value
8 1 DC link voltage > p2172 Actual DC link voltage > threshold value
9 1 Ramping completed Ramp-function generator is not active.
10 1 Technology controller output at lower limit Technology controller output ≦ p2292
11 1 Technology controller output at upper limit Technology controller output > p2291
12 Not used
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used
6.4.3.2 Data structure of the parameter channel
Parameter channel
You can write and read parameter values via the parameter channel, e.g. in order to monitor
process data. The parameter channel always comprises four words.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO $EEUHYLDWLRQV 3.(3DUDPHWHULGHQWLILHU

,1',QGH[
3.( ,1' 3:(
3:(3DUDPHWHUYDOXH
VW QG UGDQG WK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG
Figure 6-12 Structure of the parameter channel
Parameter identifier (PKE), 1st word

The parameter identifier (PKE) contains 16 bits.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( ,1' 3:(
VW QG UGDQG WK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG

630
$. 318
Figure 6-13 PKE - 1st word in parameter channel
● Bits 12 to 15 (AK) contain the request or response identifier.

● Bit 11 (SPM) is reserved and is always 0.
● Bits 0 to 10 (PNU) contain parameter numbers 1 … 1999. For parameter numbers ≥ 2000
an offset must be added that is defined in the 2nd word of the parameter channel (IND).
The meaning of the request identifier for request telegrams (control → inverter) is explained
in the following table.
Table 6- 40 Request identifier (control → inverter)
Request Description Response

identifier identifier
positive negative
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 ↑
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 |
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 |
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 |
6 Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 |
7 Change parameter value (field, word) 1) 4 |
8 Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 |
9 Request number of field elements 6 |
11 Change parameter value (field, double word) and save in EEPROM 5 |
2)
12 Change parameter value (field, word) and save in EEPROM 2) 4 |

13 Change parameter value (double word) and save in EEPROM 2 ↓
14 Change parameter value (word) and save in EEPROM 1 7/8
The meaning of the response identifier for response telegrams (inverter → control) is
explained in the following table. The request identifier determines which response identifiers
are possible.
Table 6- 41 Response identifier (inverter → control)
Response identifier Description

0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Request cannot be processed, task cannot be executed (with error number)
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the
parameter channel interface
If the response identifier is 7 (request cannot be processed), one of the error numbers listed
in the following table will be saved in parameter value 2 (PWE2).
Table 6- 42 Error numbers for the response "Request cannot be processed"

0 Impermissible parameter number (PNU) Parameter does not exist
1 Parameter value cannot be changed The parameter can only be read
2 Minimum/maximum not achieved or –
exceeded
3 Wrong subindex –
4 No field An individual parameter was addressed
with a field request and subindex > 0
5 Wrong parameter type / wrong data type Confusion of word and double word
6 Setting is not permitted (only resetting) –
7 The descriptive element cannot be changed Description cannot be changed
11 Not in the "master control" mode Change request without "master control"
mode (see P0927)
12 Keyword missing –
17 Request cannot be processed on account of The current inverter status is not
the operating state compatible with the received request
20 Illegal value Modification access with a value which is
within the value limits but which is illegal for
other permanent reasons (parameter with
defined individual values)
101 Parameter number is currently deactivated Dependent on the operating state of the
inverter
102 Channel width is insufficient Communication channel is too small for
response
104 Illegal parameter value The parameter can only assume certain
values.
106 Request not included / task is not supported After request ID 5, 10, 15

107 No write access with enabled controller The operating state of the inverter prevents
a parameter change
200/201 Changed minimum/maximum not achieved The maximum or minimum can be limited
or exceeded further during operation.
204 The available access authorization does not –
cover parameter changes.
Parameter index (IND)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( ,1' 3:(
VW QG UGDQG WK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG

6XELQGH[,1' 3DJHLQGH[
Figure 6-14 Structure of the parameter index (IND)
● For indexed parameters, select the index of the parameter by transferring the appropriate
value between 0 and 254 to the subindex within a job.
● The page index is used to switch over the parameter numbers. Use this byte to add an
offset to the parameter number that is transferred in the 1st word of the parameter
channel (PKE).
Page index: Offset of parameter number

The parameter numbers are assigned to several parameter ranges. The following table
shows which value you must transfer to the page index to achieve a particular parameter
number.
Table 6- 43 Page index setting dependent on parameter range
Parameter range Page index Hex value

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0000 … 1999 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x00
2000 … 3999 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x80
6000 … 7999 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0x90
8000 … 9999 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0x20
10000 … 11999 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0xA0
20000 … 21999 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0x50
Parameter value (PWE)

The parameter value (PWE) is transferred as a double word (32 bits). Only one parameter
value may be transferred per telegram.
A 32 bit parameter value includes PWE1 (high-order word, third word) and PWE2 (low-order
word, fourth word).
A 16 bit parameter value is transferred in PWE2 (low-order word, fourth word). In this case,
PWE1 (high-order word, 3rd word) must be set to 0.
Example of read request for parameter P7841[2]

To obtain the value of the indexed parameter P7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
● Request parameter value (field): Bits 15 … 12 in the PKE word:
● Parameter number without offset: Bits 10 … 0 in the PKE word:
Because you can only code parameter numbers from 1 … 1999 in the PKE, you must
deduct as large an offset as possible, a number divisible by 2000, from the parameter
number, and transfer the result of this calculation to the PKE word.
In our example, this means: 7841 - 6000 = 1841
● Coding the offset of the parameter number in the page index byte of the IND word:
In this example: When offset = 6000, this corresponds to a page index value of 0x90.
● Index of parameter in the subindex byte of the IND word:
In this example: Index = 2
● Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.
Table 6- 44 Request to read parameter P7841[2]
AK PNU (10 bits) Subindex Page index PWE1 PWE2
(H byte) (L byte) (high-order word) (low-order word)
0x6 0 0x731 (decimal: 1841) 0x02 0x90 0x0000 0x0000
Rules for editing requests and responses

● You can only request one parameter per transmitted telegram
● Each received telegram contains only one response
● The request must be repeated until the right response is received
● The response is assigned to a request by means of the following identifiers:
– Suitable response identifier
– Suitable parameter number
– Suitable parameter index IND, if required
– Suitable parameter value PWE, if necessary
● The complete request must be sent in a telegram. Request telegrams cannot be
subdivided. The same applies to responses.
6.4.4 Acyclic communication

The contents of the transferred data set corresponds to the structure of the acyclic
parameter channel according to the PROFIdrive profile, Version 4.1
(http://www.profibus.com/).
The acyclic data transfer mode generally allows:
● The transfer of large volumes of user data (up to 240 bytes). A parameter
request/response must fit into a data set (max. 240 bytes). The requests/responses are
not distributed over several data sets.
● Transfer of complete fields or field parts or the complete parameter description.
● Transfer of different parameters in one access (multiple request).
● Reading of profile-specific parameters over an acyclic channel
● Acyclic data transfer in parallel with cyclic data transfer.
Only one parameter request is processed at a time (no pipelining). No spontaneous
messages are transferred.
The PROFIBUS DP expansions DPV1 comprise the definition of acyclic data exchange.
It supports concurrent access by other PROFIBUS masters (Class 2 master, e.g.
commissioning tool).
Suitable channels are provided in the inverters of the SINAMICS G120 series for the
different masters/different data transfer types:
● Acyclic data exchange with the same Class 1 master using the DPV1 functions READ
and WRITE (with data set 47 (DS47)).
● Acyclic data exchange with the help of a SIEMENS startup tool (Class 2 master, e.g.
STARTER). The startup tool can acyclically access parameters and process data in the
inverter.
● Acyclic data exchange with a SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface) (second Class 2
master). The SIMATIC HMI can acyclically access parameters in the inverter.
● Instead of a SIEMENS startup tool or a SIMATIC HMI, it is also possible for an external
master (Class 2 master) as defined in the acyclic parameter channel according to the
PROFIdrive profile, Version 4.1 (with DS47), to access the inverter.
An example of acyclic data transmission can be found in the STEP 7 program examples
(Page 158) section.
6.4.5 STEP 7 program examples
6.4.5.1 STEP 7 program example for cyclic communication
S7 program for controlling the inverter

In the following example, the control and inverter communicate via standard telegram 1. The
control specifies control word 1 (STW1) and the speed setpoint, while the inverter responds
with status word 1 (ZSW1) and its actual speed.
Figure 6-15 Controlling the inverter via PROFIBUS
Figure 6-16 Status evaluation of the inverter via PROFIBUS
Information about the S7 program

The hexadecimal numeric value 047E is written to control word 1. The bits of control word 1
are listed in the following table.
Table 6- 45 Assignment of the control bits in the inverter to the SIMATIC flags and inputs
HEX BIN Bit in Significance Bit in Bit in Bit in Inputs

STW1 MW1 MB1 MB2
E 0 0 ON/OFF1 8 0 E0.0
1 1 ON/OFF2 9 1
1 2 ON/OFF3 10 2
1 3 Operation enable 11 3
7 1 4 Ramp-function generator enable 12 4
1 5 Start ramp-function generator 13 5
1 6 Setpoint enable 14 6
0 7 Acknowledge fault 15 7 E0.6
4 0 8 Jog 1 0 0
0 9 Jog 2 1 1
1 10 PLC control 2 2
0 11 Setpoint inversion 3 3
0 0 12 Irrelevant 4 4
0 13 Motorized potentiometer ↑ 5 5
0 14 Motorized potentiometer ↓ 6 6
0 15 Data set changeover 7 7
In this example, inputs E0.0 and E0.6 are linked to the -bit ON/OFF1 or to the "acknowledge
fault" bit of STW 1.
The hexadecimal numeric value 2500 specifies the setpoint frequency of the inverter. The
maximum frequency is the hexadecimal value 4000 (also see Data exchange via the fieldbus
(Page 106)).
The control cyclically writes the process data to logical address 256 of the inverter. The
inverter also writes its process data to logical address 256. You define the address area in
HW Config, seeInserting the inverter into the STEP 7 project (Page 145).
6.4.5.2 STEP 7 program example for acyclic communication
Simple S7 program for parameterizing the inverter

The number of simultaneous requests for acyclic communication is limited. More detailed
information can be found in the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15364459).
M9.0 Starts reading parameters M9.2 displays the read process

M9.1 Starts writing parameters M9.3 displays the write process
Figure 6-17 STEP 7 program example for acyclic communication - OB1
FC1 to read parameters from the inverter

Inverter parameters are read via SFC 58 and SFC 59.
Figure 6-18 Function block for reading parameters
You first have to define how many parameters (MB62), which parameter numbers (MW50,
MW52, etc.), and how many parameter indices (MB58, MB59, etc.) are read for each
parameter number. The specifications are saved in DB1.
SFC 58 copies the specifications for the parameters to be read from DB1 and sends them to
the inverter as a read request. No other read requests are permitted while this one is being
processed.
Once the read request has been issued and a waiting time of one second has elapsed, the
parameter values are copied from the inverter via SFC 59 and saved in DB2.
FC3 to write parameters to the inverter
Figure 6-19 Function block for writing parameters
You first have to define which value (MW35) is written to which parameter index (MW23) of
which parameter (MW21). The specifications are saved in DB3.
SFC 58 copies the specifications for the parameters to be written from DB3 and sends them
to the inverter. No other write requests are permitted while this one is being processed.
For more information about SFC 58 and SFC 59, consult the STEP 7 online help.
6.5 Communication over CANopen
Integrating the inverter into CANopen

Inverters are integrated into CANopen using Electronic Data Sheets (EDS files).
You can find this manual in the Internet under:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/35209032
Additional information ...

● can be found on the CAN Internet pages (http://www.can-cia.org)
● the CANdictionary under CAN downloads (http://www.can-cia.org/index.php?id=6)
provides an explanation of CAN terminology.
6.5.1 Connecting inverter to CAN bus
Description
Inverters with CANopen interface have a 9-pin, SUB-D pin connector on the lower side of the
Control Unit in order to integrate the inverter into the CANopen fieldbus system. The
connections of this pin connector are short-circuit proof and isolated.
CANopen cable connector

For setting up a CANopen network, you can use cables for serial 9-pin connections with
SUB-D connectors.
This is subsequently described:
Table 6- 46 Pin assignment of the connector
1 --- Not assigned

2 CAN_L CAN signal (dominant low)

3 CAN_GND CAN ground
4 --- Not assigned
5 (CAN _SHLD) Optional shield

6 (GND) Optional CAN ground
7 CAN_H CAN signal (dominant high)
8 --- Not assigned
9 --- Not assigned
Table 6- 47 Permissible cable lengths, depending on the baud rate
Baud rate (kbit/s) Maximum cable lengths

1000 18 m 59 ft
800 39 m 128 ft
500 100 m 328 ft
250 270 m 886 ft
125 610 m 2000 ft
50 1600 m 5300 ft
20 4150 m 13700 ft
10 8400 m 27600 ft
General specifications for CANopen and requirements for fault-free communication

You can integrate up to 126 stations into a CANopen network. These must be subdivided
into segments of up to 32 stations. For the first and last station of each segment, you have to
activate the bus terminating resistor via the DIP switch on the right next to the SUB-D socket.
You can disconnect one or more slaves from the bus (by unplugging the bus connector)
without interrupting the communication for the other stations, but not the first or last.
NOTICE
When the bus is operating, the first and last bus station must be continuously connected to
the supply.
Note
Communication with the controller, even when the line voltage is switched off
You will have to supply the Control Unit with 24 V DC on terminals 31 and 32 if you require
communication to take place with the controller when the line voltage is switched off.
Setting the CANopen address

The CANopen address of the inverter can be set using DIP switches on the Control Unit or
using p8620. Using p8620, the address can only be set if all DIP switches for the bus
address are either set to "OFF" (0) or to "ON" (127).
If the address switches are set to a value ≠ 0 or 127, this address is always active and
p8620 is read-only.
(Page 107).
CAUTION
6.5.2 Interconnecting the CAN control word

The CAN control word is automatically connected up via parameter p8790. The following
setting options are available:
P8790 = 0 No interconnection
P8790 = 1: BI: p0840.0 (BI: ON/OFF1) = r209x.0
BI: p0844.0 (BI: 1. OFF2) = r209x.1
BI: p0848.0 (BI: 1. OFF3) = r209x.2
BI: p0852.0 (BI: Enable operation) = r209x.3
BI: p2103.0 (BI: 1. Acknowledge faults) = r209x.7
The specified BICO interconnections are automatically established if the CANopen control
word is mapped to one of the positions x = 0 ... 3 in the receive process data buffer.
Write access is rejected if a CANopen control word is not mapped at one of these positions.
This causes the commissioning software to interrupt the project download.
6.5.3 Objects to access SINAMICS parameters
Description
All inverter parameters can be addressed via the SDO parameter channel in the
2000 hex to 470F hex range of the object directory.
The parameter numbers of the inverter must be converted to hex values and an offset of
2000 hex must also be applied. This figure is the object number contained in the SDO
request for the parameter number of the inverter.
There is no need to distinguish between write and display parameters (p and r parameters).
Table 6- 48 Examples of conversions of inverter parameters to manufacturer-specific CANopen

objects
Inverter CANopen object Name of inverter parameter

parameter number
P0010 200A hex Commissioning parameter filter
r0062 203E hex Speed setpoint
r0947 23B3 hex Fault number
Setting accessing options

The access settings are entered in parameter p8630[0…2]
p8630[0]: Access to virtual CANopen objects
● p8630[0] = 0: No access to virtual CANopen objects
● p8630[0] = 1: Access to virtual CANopen objects
● p8630[0] = 2: Not relevant for G120 inverters
p8630[1]: Selection of index range of inverter parameters
A maximum total of 255 indices can be transferred in a CANopen object. Should it be
necessary to transfer parameters with more indices, an additional CANopen object must be
set up. It is possible to transfer a maximum of 1024 indices.
● p8630[1] = 0: 0 … 255
● p8630[1] = 1: 256 … 511
● p8630[1] = 2: 512 … 767
● p8630[1] = 3: 768 … 1023
P8630[2] Parameter range selection
● P8630[2] = 0: 1 ... 9999
Note
Since all parameter numbers of the G120 inverter are in the < 10000 range, it is only
necessary to set P8630[2] = 0.
If the inverter were to use parameter numbers ≥ 10000, it would be possible to set ranges
from 10000 ... 39999 using indices 1 ... 3.
6.5.4 CANopen functionality of the inverter
Introduction
CANopen is a CAN-based communication protocol with linear topology that operates on the
basis of communication objects (COB).
The communication objects can be subdivided as follows:
● Service data objects (SDO) for reading and changing parameters
● Process data objects (PDO) for transferring process data
● Network management objects (NMT) for controlling CANopen communication and for
monitoring the individual nodes on the basis of a master-slave relationship.
● Additional objects such as synchronize (SYNC), time stamp and error messages (EMCY).
The CU230P-2 CAN supports the following communication objects:
● NMT
● PDO
● SDO
● SYNC
● EMCY
The CU230P-2 CAN works with communication objects from the following profiles:
● CANopen communication profile DS 301 version 4.0
● Device profile DSP 402 (drives and motion control) version 2.0
● Indicator profile DR303-3 version 1.0.
The communication monitoring can be used via both node guarding and heartbeat protocol
(heartbeat producer).
Note
Communication status after CAN controller state "Bus off" (inverter fault F8700, fault value 1)
If this fault is acknowledged by an OFF/ON, the bus off state is also canceled and
communication is re-established after the next boot.
If the fault is acknowledged by means of DI2, or directly with p3981, the inverter remains in
the bus off state. To initialize the communication links, p8608 = 1 must be set in this case.
WARNING
If a bus fault has occurred, the CAN communication links are not restored if the fault is
acknowledged by means of digital input DI2 (p3981 = 1).
If p8641 = 0 is set (inverter does not switch to fault status after a bus fault), it means that
the motor cannot be stopped via the control system unless communication has been
restored beforehand with p8608 = 1.
6.5.5 General CANopen functions
COB ID
Each COB (communication object) can be uniquely identified by means of an identifier (COB
ID), which is a part of the COB. CAN specification 2.0A supports up to 2048 COBs, which
are identified by means of 11-bit identifiers.
A list of COB identifiers, which contains all the COBs that can be accessed via CAN, is
available in the object directory for the relevant SINAMICS inverter.
The COB ID can be used to prioritize the communication objects. This means in particular
that different processing methods (cyclic, event-controlled, on request or synchronized) can
be defined for different process data.
COB IDs for SINAMICS

The following table contains the COB IDs for transmit and receive telegrams defined for the
"Predefined Connection Set" for SINAMICS inverters (drive objects). The object directory
index (OD index) starts at 1800 for the TPDO and at 1400 for the RPDO.
Table 6- 49 Identifier assignment
Communication Function Resulting COB ID OD index (hex)

objects code
dec bin hex Explanation
TPDO 3 0011 181–1FF 180 hex + node ID 1800
RPDO 4 0100 201–27F 200 hex + node ID 1400
6.5.5.1 Network management (NMT service)
Introduction
Network management (NMT) is node-oriented and has a master-slave structure.
The NMT services can be used to initialize, start, monitor, reset, or stop nodes. All NMT
services have the COB ID = 0. This cannot be changed.
The SINAMICS inverter is an NMT slave and can adopt the following statuses in CANopen:
● Initialization
The inverter passes through this state after Power On. In the factory setting, the inverter
then enters the "Pre-Operational" state, which also corresponds to the CANopen
standard. The setting can be changed using p8684 as follows:
– p8684 = 4 Stopped
– p8684 = 5 Operational
– p8684 = 127 Pre-Operational (factory setting)
● Pre-Operational
In this state, the node cannot process any process data (PDO). It can, however, be
parameterized or operated via SDOs, which means that setpoints can also be specified
using SDO.
● Operational
In this state, the node can process both SDO and PDO.
● Stopped
In this state, the node cannot process either PDO or SDO. Stopped mode is exited by
specifying one of the following commands:
– Enter Pre-Operational
– Start Remote Node
– Reset Node
– Reset Communication
The NMT recognizes the following transitional states:
● Start Remote Node:
command for switching from the "Pre-Operational" communication status to
"Operational". The drive can only transmit and receive process data (PDO) in
"Operational" status.
● Stop Remote Node
command for switching from "Pre-Operational" or "Operational" to "Stopped". The node
can only process NMT commands in the "Stopped" status.
● Enter Pre-Operational
command for switching from "Operational" or "Stopped" to "Pre-Operational". In this state,
the node cannot process any process data (PDO). It can, however, be parameterized or
operated via SDOs, which means that setpoints can also be specified.
● Reset Node:
command for switching from "Operational", "Pre-Operational", or "Stopped" to
"Initialization". When the Reset Node command is issued, all the objects (1000 hex -
9FFF hex) are reset to the status that was present after "Power On".
● Reset Communication:
command for switching from "Operational", "Pre-Operational", or "Stopped" to
"Initialization". When the Reset Communication command is issued, all communication
objects (1000 hex - 1FFF hex) are reset to the status that was present after "Power On".
3RZHU2Q
,QLWLDOL]DWLRQ
$XWRPDWLF
WUDQVPLVVLRQ
5HVHW
5HVHW 1RGH
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
3UH2SHUDWLRQDO
6WRS
6WDUW5HPRWH 5HPRWH1RGH
1RGH
(QWHU
3UH2SHUDWLRQDO 5HVHW
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
5HVHW
6WRSSHG 1RGH
6WDUW
5HPRWH1RGH
(QWHU
3UH2SHUDWLRQDO
5HVHW
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ 6WRS5HPRWH
1RGH 5HVHW
2SHUDWLRQDO 1RGH
Figure 6-20 CANopen status diagram
The transition states and addressed nodes are displayed using the command specifier and
the Node_ID:
Table 6- 50 Overview of NMT commands
NMT Master Request ----> NMT Slave message

Command Byte 0 (command specifier, CS) Byte 1
Start 1 (01hex) Node ID of the addressed node
Stop 2 (02hex) Node ID of the addressed node
Enter Pre-Operational 128 (80hex) Node ID of the addressed node
Reset Node 129 (81hex) Node ID of the addressed node
Reset Communication 130 (82 hex) Node ID of the addressed node
The NMT master can simultaneously direct a request to one or more slaves. The following is
applicable:
● Requirement of a slave:
The slave is addressed using its node ID (1 - 127).
● Requirement for all slaves:
Node ID = 0
The current state of the node is displayed via p8685. It can also be changed directly using
this parameter:
 p8685 = 0 Initializing (cannot be changed)

 p8685 = 4 Stopped
 p8685 = 5 Operational
 p8685 = 127 Pre-Operational (factory setting)
 p8685 = 128 Reset Node
 p8685 = 129 Reset Communication
6.5.5.2 PDO and PDO services
PDO
The real-time data transfer for CANopen takes place using "Process Data Objects (PDO)".
In the configuration, the PDOs are linked with objects from the object directory that require
real-time data transfer (PDO mapping).
The number of PDOs and their mapping structure is transferred to the device via SDO
services (during configuration of the device).
The following variants of PDO exist:
● TPDO (Transmit PDO): Sends data.
TPDO are sent via two preselected channels. TPDO always uses two permanently set
channels.
● RPDO (Receive PDO): Receives data.
SINAMICS drives can receive up to 24 RPDOs. One channel in the CAN controller is
assigned for each activated RPDO.
RPDO parameters in the inverter: p8700 … p8717

in CAN: 1400 hex ff,
TPDO parameters: in the inverter: p8720 … p8737
in CAN: 1800 hex ff
The inverter supports the following PDO data transfer types:
Transmission Value in index 1 of PDO Explanation

type the RPDO- type
TPDO parameter
Synchronous, 0 TPDO  TPDO is only sent if a SYNC is received and a
non-cyclic process data has changed in the telegram.
Synchronous, n = 1 … 240 TPDO  TPDO is sent after each nth SYNC,
cyclic RPDO  RPDO is accepted after each nth SYNC
Asynchronous, 254, 255 TPDO,  TPDO is sent if process data has changed in the
cyclic RPDO telegram.
 RPDO is directly accepted when it is received.
Asynchronous, 254, 255 + event TPDO  TPDO sent in the "Event Time" interval.
cyclic time
CANopen devices with TPDO are known as PDO producers and CANopen devices with
RPDO are known as PDO consumers.
The PDO is defined by the PDO communication parameter and the PDO mapping
parameter. The structure of these two parameters is listed in the following tables.
Table 6- 51 PDO communication parameters 1400h ff (RPDO), 1800h ff (TPDO)
Subindex Name Data type

00h Highest subindex that is supported UNSIGNED8
01h COB ID UNSIGNED32
02h Transfer mode UNSIGNED8
03h Inhibit time (only for TPDO) UNSIGNED16
04h Reserved (only for TPDO) UNSIGNED8
05h Event timer (only for TPDO) UNSIGNED16
Table 6- 52 PDO mapping parameters 1600h ff (RPDO), 1A00h ff (TPDO)
Subindex Name Data type

00h Number of objects mapped to the PDO (max. 4) UNSIGNED8
01h First mapped object UNSIGNED32
02h Second mapped object UNSIGNED32
03h Third mapped object UNSIGNED32
04h Fourth mapped object UNSIGNED32
Note
PDO communication parameter
 For receive telegrams: p8700 to p8707,
 For transmit telegrams: p8720 to p8727.
PDO mapping parameter
 For receive telegrams: p8710 to p8717,
 For transmit telegrams: p8730 to p8737.
Transmission modes for process data objects (PDO)

The following types of transmission are possible for PDO:
● Synchronous data transmission
– Cyclic
– Acyclic (only for TPDO)
● Asynchronous data transmission
– Cyclic (only for TPDO)
– Acyclic
Synchronous data transmission

In order for the devices on the CANopen bus to remain synchronized during transmission, a
synchronization object (SYNC object) must be transmitted at periodic intervals.
Each PDO that is transferred as a synchronous object must be assigned a transmission type
1 ... n. The following is applicable:
● Transmission type 1: The PDO is transferred in every SYNC cycle.
● Transmission type n: The PDO is transferred in every nth SYNC cycle.
The following diagram shows the principle of synchronous and asynchronous transmission:
6\QFZLQGRZ 6\QFZLQGRZ
$V\QFKURQRXV3'2
$V\QFKURQRXV3'2
$V\QFKURQRXV3'2
)LUVWV\QFREMHFW
QWKV\QFREMHFW
6\QFKURQRXV3'2WUDQVPLVVLRQPRGH
6\QFKURQRXV3'2WUDQVPLVVLRQPRGHQ
6\QFKURQRXV3'2WUDQVPLVVLRQPRGHQ
W
Figure 6-21 Principle of synchronous and asynchronous transmission
For synchronous TPDOs, the transmission mode also identifies the transmission rate as a
factor of the SYNC object transmission intervals. Here, transmission type "1" means that the
message will be transmitted in every SYNC object cycle. Transmission type "n" means that
the message will be transmitted in every nth SYNC object cycle.
Data from synchronous RPDOs that are received after a SYNC signal is not transmitted to
the application until after the next SYNC signal.
Note
The SYNC signal does not synchronize the applications in the SINAMICS drive, only the
communication on the CANopen bus
Asynchronous data transmission

Asynchronous PDOs are transferred - cyclically or acyclically - without reference to the
SYNC signal.
PDO services
The PDO services can be subdivided as follows:
● Write PDO
● Read PDO
● SYNC service
Write PDO
The "Write PDO" service is based on the "push" model. The PDO has exactly one producer.
There can be no consumer, one consumer, or multiple consumers.
Via Write PDO, the producer of the PDO sends the data of the mapped application object to
the individual consumer.
Read PDO
The "Read PDO" service is based on the "pull" model. The PDO has exactly one producer.
There can be one consumer or multiple consumers.
Via Read PDO, the consumer of the PDO receives the data of the mapped application object
from the producer.
SYNC service
The SYNC object is periodically sent from the SYNC producer. The SYNC signal represents
the basic network cycle. The time interval between two SYNC signals is determined in the
master by the standard parameter "Communication cycle time".
In order to ensure CANopen accesses in real-time, the SYNC object has a high priority,
which is defined using the COB ID. This can be changed via p8602 (factory setting = 80hex).
The service runs unconfirmed.
Note
The COB ID of the Sync object must be set to the same value for all nodes of a bus that
respond to the SYNC telegram from the master.
The COB ID of the SYNC object is defined in the object 1005h.
6.5.5.3 PDO mapping
Introduction
PDO mapping is used to link (map) standardized drive objects (process data, e.g. setpoints
or actual values) and "free objects" from the object directory for the PDO service to
telegrams.
The PDO transfers the data values for these objects.
For this purpose, a maximum of 8 receive and 8 transmit PDOS are available.
A CAN telegram can transfer up to 8 bytes of user data. The user uses the mapping to
decide which user data is to be transferred in a PDO.
Example
The following diagram shows an example of PDO mapping (values are hexadecimal (e.g.
object size 10 hex = 16 bits)):
7UDQVIHUULQJWKHGDWD
YDOXHVRI53'2REMHFWV
0DSSLQJWKHSDUDPHWHUVIRU53'2WUDQVIHU
FUHDWHGE\XVHU
([WUDFWIURPWKHGHYLFHREMHFWGLUHFWRU\
6,1$0,&6 (QWU\1R 6SHFLILFDWLRQRI
SDUDPHWHU DSSOLFDWLRQREMHFWV ,QGH[ 6XE FRQWUROZRUG ELWV
LQG
,QGH[ 6XE 2EMHFWVL]H
LQGH[
0DSSLQJ FRQWUROZRUG ELWV
S>@ REMHFW
VWDWXVZRUG ELWV
S>@ 0DSSLQJ WDUJHWYHORFLW\ ELWV
REMHFW
FRQWUROHIIRUW ELWV
+HDGHU 7UDLOHU

&RQWUROZRUG WDUJHWYHORFLW\
5'2UHFHLYHWHOHJUDPZLWKWKH
SUHGHILQHGGULYHREMHFW
Figure 6-22 PDO mapping for control word and setpoint velocity
6.5.5.4 SDO services
Introduction
SDO services allow you to access the object directory for the connected drive unit. An SDO
connection is a peer-to-peer connection between an SDO client and a server.
The drive unit with its object directory is an SDO server.
The identifiers for the first SDO channel of a drive unit are defined according to CANopen as
follows:
Receiving: Server <= Client: COB ID = 600 hex + node ID

Transmitting: Server => Client: COB ID = 580 hex + node ID
Properties
The SDOs have the following properties:
● Confirmed transfer of objects
● Transmission always asynchronous (corresponds to acyclic data exchange with
PROFIBUS DB)
● Transmission of values > 4 bytes (normal transfer)
● Transmission of values ≤ 4 bytes (expedited transfer)
● All drive unit parameters can be addressed via SDO.
Structure of the SDO protocols

The SDO services use the appropriate protocol depending on the task. The most important
are:
● SDO Protocol Write
● SDO Protocol Read
● SDO Protocol Cancel Transfer Protocol
SDO Protocol Write

This protocol is used to write data to the drive unit. Request by "Write Request", confirmation
by "Write Response".
Table 6- 53 SDO Protocol Write
Byte 0 Bytes 1 and 2 Byte 3 Bytes 4 ... 7

Write Request (request from the CANopen master to the inverter to write data)
cs = 2Fhex index subindex data byte 4
cs = 2Bhex index subindex data byte 4-5
cs = 27hex index subindex data byte 4-6
Write Response (confirmation from the inverter to the master after successful writing)
Cs = 60 index subindex Reserved
SDO Protocol Read

This protocol is used to read data from the drive unit. Read request by "Read Request",
confirmation by "Read Response".
Table 6- 54 SDO Protocol Read

Read Request (request from the CANopen master to the inverter to read data and send it to the master)
cs = 40 index subindex Reserved
Read Response (data from the inverter is sent to the master)
cs = 4Fhex index subindex data byte 4
cs = 4Bhex index subindex data byte 4-5
SDO Protocol Cancel Transfer Protocol

This protocol is used to perform the SDO service "Cancel Transfer Protocol".
Table 6- 55 SDO Protocol Cancel Transfer Protocol
Master -> Slave / Slave -> Master

Error Response
cs = 80 index subindex SDO abort code (unsigned 32)
SDO abort codes
Table 6- 56 SDO abort codes
Abort code Description

0503 0000h Toggle bit not alternated
0504 0000h SDO protocol timed out
0504 0001h Client/server command specifier not valid or unknown
0504 0002h Invalid block size (block mode only)
0504 0003h Invalid sequence number (block mode only)
0504 0004h. CRC error (block mode only)
0504 0005h Out of memory
0601 0000h Unsupported access to an object
0601 0001h Attempt to read a write-only object
0601 0002h Attempt to write a read-only object
0602 0000h Object does not exist in the object dictionary
0604 0041h Object cannot be mapped to the PDO
0604 0042h The number and length of the objects to be mapped would exceed PDO length
0604 0043h General parameter incompatibility reason
0604 0047h General internal incompatibility in the device
0602 0000h Object does not exist in the object dictionary
0604 0041h Object cannot be mapped to the PDO
0604 0042h The number and length of the objects to be mapped would exceed PDO length
0604 0043h General parameter incompatibility reason
0604 0047h General internal incompatibility in the device
0606 0000h Access failed due to a hardware error
0607 0010h Data type does not match, length of service parameter does not match.
0607 0012h Data type does not match, length of service parameter too high.
0607 0013h Data type does not match, length of service parameter too low.
0609 0011h Subindex does not exist
0609 0030h Value range of parameter exceeded (only for write access)
0609 0031h Value of parameter written too high
0609 0032h Value of parameter written too low
0609 0036h Maximum value is less than minimum value
0800 0000h General error
0800 0020h Data cannot be transferred to or stored in the application
0800 0021h Data cannot be transferred to or stored in the application because of local control
0800 0022h Data cannot be transferred to or stored in the application because of the current device state.
0800 0023h Object dictionary dynamic generation failed or no object dictionary is present (e.g. object dictionary is
generated from file and generation fails because of a file error).
6.5.6 Communication objects
6.5.6.1 Overview
Section content
This section lists the objects (data values) that are used in SINAMICS for communication via
CANopen. The individual objects are:
● Configuration objects
● Manufacturer-specific objects
● Objects in drive profile DSP402
The objects are stored in the object directory of the inverter.
6.5.6.2 Configuration objects
Introduction
Eight PDOs per drive can be parameterized for transmitting and receiving.
For each PDO, the following configuration objects are available:
● Communication parameters and
● Mapping parameters (max. 8 bytes)
Rule
The "predefined connection set" column contains the predefined values for the "predefined
connection set".
Communication parameters and indices for the configuration objects of the receive PDO
The following table lists the communication parameters together with the indices for the
individual configuration objects of the receive PDOs:
Table 6- 57 Configuration objects of receive PDOs - communication parameters
OD Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Transmi Data type Predefined Read/
Index Index parameters ssion Connection Set write
(hex) (hex)
1400 Receive PDO 1 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported SDO Unsigned8 2 R
1 COB ID used by PDO p8700.0 SDO Unsigned32 200 hex + node ID R/W
2 Transmission type p8700.1 SDO Unsigned8 FE hex R/W
1 COB ID used by PDO p8702.0 SDO Unsigned32 8000 06DF hex R/W
Table 6- 58 Configuration objects receive PDO - mapping parameters
Index Index parameters ssion Connection write
(hex) (hex) Set
1600 Receive PDO 1 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects SDO Unsigned8 1 R
in PDO
1 PDO mapping for the first application p8710.0 SDO Unsigned32 6040 hex R/W
object to be mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second p8710.1 SDO Unsigned32 0 R/W
application object to be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application p8710.2 SDO Unsigned32 0 R/W
object to be mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application p8710.3 SDO Unsigned32 0 R/W
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second p8711.1 SDO Unsigned32 6042 hex R/W
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
1 PDO mapping for the first application p8712.0 SDO Unsigned32 0 R/W
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
Index Index parameters ssion Connection write
(hex) (hex) Set
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
Communication parameters and indices for the configuration objects of the send PDO
The following table lists the communication parameters together with the indices for the
individual configuration objects of the transmit PDOs:
Table 6- 59 Configuration objects of transmit PDOs - communication parameters
OD Sub- Object name SINAMICS Trans- Data type Predefined Read/

Index Index parameter mission connection set write
(hex) (hex)
1800 Transmit PDO 1 communication parameter
3 Inhibit time p8720.2 SDO Unsigned16 0 R/W
4 Reserved p8720.3 SDO Unsigned8 --- R/W
5 Event timer p8720.4 SDO Unsigned16 0 R/W
1 COB ID used by PDO p8722.0 SDO Unsigned32 C000 06DF hex R/W

Index Index parameter mission connection set write
(hex) (hex)
Table 6- 60 Configuration objects of transmit PDOs - mapping parameters

Index Index parameter mission connection write
(hex) (hex) set
1A00 Transmit PDO 1 mapping parameter
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped

(hex) (hex) set
2 PDO mapping for the second p8731.1 SDO Unsigned32 6044 hex R/W
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped

(hex) (hex) set
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
in PDO
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
object to be mapped
6.5.6.3 Free objects
OD index Description Data type Default Can be

(hex) per PZD written
values to/
read
5800 to 580F 16 freely-interconnectable receive process data Integer16 0 R/W
5810 to 581F 16 freely-interconnectable transmit process Integer16 0 R
data
You can interconnect any process data objects using receive/transmit words/double words of
the receive and transmit buffer.
Scaling the process data of the free objects:
● 16-bit (word): 4000hex corresponds to 100 %
If the process data is a temperature value, the scaling of the free objects appears as follows:
● 16-bit (word): 4000hex corresponds to 100 °C
6.5.6.4 Objects in drive profile DSP402
Overview
The following table lists the object directory with the index of the individual objects for the
drives. The "SINAMICS parameter" column contains the SINAMICS parameter number.
Table 6- 61 Objects in drive profile DSP402
OD index Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Transmissi Data type Default Read/
(hex) index parameters on values write
(hex)
Predefinitions
67FF Single device type SDO
Common entries in the object dictionary
6007 Abort connection option code p8641 SDO Integer32 0 R/W
6502 Supported drive modes SDO Integer32
6504 Drive manufacturer SDO String
Device control
6040 Control word p8890 PDO/SDO Unsigned16 – R/W 1)
6041 Status word r8784 PDO/SDO Unsigned16 – R
6060 Modes of operation p1300 SDO Integer16 – R/ 2)
6061 Modes of operation display p1300 SDO Integer16 – R/W
Profile torque mode
6071 Target torque p1513[0] SDO/PDO Integer16 – R/W 1)
Set torque
6072 Max. torque p1520/p1521 SDO 0 0 0
6074 Torque demand value r0080 SDO/PDO Integer16 – R
Actual torque
Velocity mode
6042 0 vl target velocity r0060 SDO/PDO Integer16 0 R/W
6044 0 vl control effort r0063 SDO/PDO Integer16 - R
1) SDO access is only possible after mapping the objects and the BICO interconnection to
display parameters.
2) Object cannot be written to as a CANopen device profile is not supported, only
manufacturer-specific operating data
Functions 7
Before you set the inverter functions, you should have completed the following
commissioning steps:
● Commissioning (Page 63)
● If necessary: Configuring the terminal strip (Page 97)
● If necessary: Connection to a fieldbus (Page 105)
7.1 Overview of the inverter functions
+9$&IXQFWLRQV
$GGLWLRQDOWHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU 3URWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQV
0XOWL]RQHFRQWURO
(PHUJHQF\RSHUDWLRQ &RPPDQGVRXUFHV 2YHUFXUUHQW
0RWRU6WDJLQJDQG 2YHUYROWDJH
$XWRFKDQJH 'LJLWDOLQSXWV
)LHOGEXV 2YHUWHPSHUDWXUH
%\SDVV
6\VWHP
+LEHUQDWLRQ SURWHFWLRQ
0RWRUFRQWURO 6HWSRLQWVRXUFHV
$QDORJLQSXWV
9IFRQWURO ,QYHUWHUFRQWURO
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV
9HFWRUFRQWURO 7ZRZLUHFRQWURO 0RWRU
&RQWUROYLDILHOGEXV SRWHQWLRPHWHU
-RJPRGH
7HFKQR )LHOGEXV 6WDWXV
ORJLFDO
PHVVDJHV
IXQFWLRQV
%UDNLQJ 6HWSRLQWFDOFXODWLRQ
'LJLWDORXWSXWV
)O\LQJUHVWDUW 5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
$QDORJRXWSXWV
$XWRPDWLFUHVWDUW /LPLWDWLRQ
)LHOGEXV
)UHHIXQFWLRQEORFNV
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
Figure 7-1 Overview of inverter functions
Functions
7.1 Overview of the inverter functions
Functions relevant to all applications Functions required in special applications only

The functions that you require in each application are The functions whose parameters you only need to adapt
located at the center of the function overview above. when actually required are located at the outer edge of the
The parameters of these functions are provided with a upper function overview.
matching basic setting during quick commissioning so that
in many cases, the motor can be operated without requiring
additional parameterization.
Inverter control is responsible for all of the The production functions avoid overloads
other inverter functions. Among other and operating states that could cause
things, it defines how the inverter responds damage to the motor, inverter and driven
to external control signals. load. The motor temperature monitoring,
Inverter control (Page 193) for example, is set here.
Protection functions (Page 210)
The command source defines where the The status messages provide digital and
control signals are received from to switch analog signals at the Control Unit outputs
on the motor, e.g. via digital inputs or a or via the fieldbus. Examples include the
fieldbus. current speed of the motor or fault
Command sources (Page 194) message issued by the inverter.
Status messages (Page 219)
The setpoint source defines how the speed The technological functions allow you to
setpoint for the motor is specified, e.g. via activate a motor holding brake or
an analog input or a fieldbus. implement a higher-level pressure or
Setpoint sources (Page 195) temperature control using the technology
controller, for example.
Technological functions (Page 220)
The setpoint calculation uses a ramp- The HVAC functions provide solutions
function generator to prevent speed steps especially for applications containing
occurring and to limit the speed to a pumps, fans and heating/air-conditioning
permissible maximum value. systems.
Setpoint calculation (Page 201) HVAC functions (Page 240)
The motor closed-loop control ensures that

the motor follows the speed setpoint.
0 Motor control (Page 203)
Functions
7.2 Inverter control
7.2 Inverter control

If the inverter is controlled using digital inputs, two control command define when the motor
starts, stops and whether clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation is selected (two-wire
control).
Table 7- 1 Controlling the motor
Control commands Explanation
0RWRU 0RWRUVWRSV 0RWRU 0RWRUVWRSV

URWDWLQJ URWDWLQJ
&: &&:
Two-wire control
1. Control command: Switch motor on
0RWRURQ or off (ON/OFF command)
W
2. Control command: Reverses the
5HYHUVHPRWRU
motor direction of rotation
0RWRU21
$FWLYH
5HYHUVH
PRWRU $FWLYH $FWLYH
0RWRU
VSHHG
R
W
R 2))
Figure 7-2 Motor control using digital inputs
Table 7- 2 Function table
Motor ON Reverse Function

motor
0 0 OFF1: The motor decelerates to a standstill
0 1 OFF1: The motor decelerates to a standstill
1 0 The motor accelerates to the setpoint
1 1 The motor accelerates to the inverted setpoint
Functions
7.3 Command sources
Table 7- 3 Parameterizing the function
P0700 = 2 Controls the motor using the digital inputs of the inverter
P0701 = 1 The motor is power-up with digital input 0 (factory setting)
Further options:
The motor can be powered-up with any other digital input, e.g. with digital input 3 via
P0704 = 1
P0702 = 12 The motor is reversed with digital input 1 (factory setting)
Further options:
The motor can be reversed with any other digital input, e.g. with digital input 3 via
P0704 = 12
7.3 Command sources

The command source is the interface via which the inverter receives its control commands.
The following interfaces are available:
● Digital inputs
● Fieldbus
Note
The "Get master control" or "Manual/Auto changeover" function can also be used to
specify commands and setpoints via STARTER or the Operator Panel.
Change command source

You selected the command source in the basic commissioning. If you must subsequently
change the command source, set the following parameters:
P0700 =2 Digital inputs,

factory setting for inverters without PROFIBUS interface.
=6 Fieldbus,
factory setting for inverters with PROFIBUS interface.
Digital inputs as command source

If you wish to control the motor via digital inputs, select one of the two following options:
1. You use the factory settings for the digital inputs. Additional information is available in the
section Wiring examples for the factory settings (Page 72).
2. You adapt the function of the digital inputs to your application. How you do this is
described in Section Digital inputs (Page 97).
Functions
7.4 Setpoint sources
Fieldbus as command source

If you wish to control the motor via a fieldbus, you must connect the inverter to a higher-level
control. For additional information, see chapter Connection to a fieldbus (Page 105).
7.4.1 Selecting the setpoint source

The setpoint source is the interface via which the inverter receives its setpoint. The following
options are available:
● Motorized potentiometer simulated in the inverter.
● Inverter analog input.
● Fixed setpoints saved in the inverter.
● Inverter fieldbus interface.
Depending on the parameterization, the setpoint in the inverter has one of the following
meanings:
● Speed setpoint for the motor.
● Torque setpoint for the motor.
● Setpoint for a process variable.
The inverter receives a setpoint for a process variable, e.g. the level of liquid in a
container, and calculates its speed setpoint using the internal technology controller.
Changing the setpoint source

You selected the setpoint source in the basic commissioning. If you must subsequently
change the setpoint source, set the following parameters:
p1000 =0 No main setpoint

=1 MOP setpoint / motorized potentiometer
=2 Analog setpoint
Factory setting for inverters without PROFIBUS interface
=3 Fixed setpoint
=6 Fieldbus
Factory setting for inverters with PROFIBUS interface
=7 Analog setpoint 2
Adding setpoints from different sources

Parameter P1000 can also be used to add more setpoint sources, e.g. you can specify the
speed setpoint as the result of adding together the fieldbus and analog input setpoints.
For more information, see the List Manual (P1000 in the parameter list and function diagram
3030).
Functions
7.4.2 Analog input as setpoint source

If you use an analog input as setpoint source, then you must adapt this analog input to the
type of connected signal (± 10 V, 4 … 20 mA, …). Additional information is available in
Section Analog inputs (Page 100).
7.4.3 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source

The 'motorized potentiometer' (MOP) function simulates an electromechanical potentiometer
for entering setpoints. You can continuously adjust the motorized potentiometer (MOP) using
the control signals "raise" and "lower". The control signals are received via the digital inputs
of the inverter or from the operator panel that has been inserted.
Typical applications
● Entering the speed setpoint during the commissioning phase.
● Manual operation of the motor should the higher-level control fail.
● Entering the speed setpoint after changeover from automatic operation to manual
operation.
● Applications with largely constant setpoint and without higher-level control.
212))
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
023UDLVH
VHWSRLQW W
3
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
W
023ORZHU
VHWSRLQW
3
023U W
3
3 3
3
Figure 7-3 Function chart of motorized potentiometer
Functions
Motorized potentiometer parameters
Table 7- 4 Basic setup of motorized potentiometer
P1000 = 1 Select speed setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
P1047 MOP ramp-up time (factory setting 10 s)
P1048 MOP ramp-down time (factory setting 10 s)
P1040 Start value of MOP (factory setting 0 rpm)
Determines the start value [rpm] that becomes effective when the motor is switched
on
Table 7- 5 Extended setup of motorized potentiometer
P1030 Configuration of the MOP, parameter value with four independently adjustable bits
00 … 03 (factory setting 0110 bin)
Bit 00: Save setpoint after switching off motor
0: After the motor is switched on, p1040 is specified as the setpoint
1: Setpoint is saved after the motor is switched off and set to the saved value once it
is switched on
Bit 01: Configure ramp-function generator in automatic mode (1-signal via BI: p1041)
0: No ramp-function generator in automatic mode (ramp-up/-down time = 0)
1: With ramp-function generator in automatic mode
In manual mode (0-signal via BI: p1041) the ramp-function generator is always active
Bit 02: Configure initial rounding
0: No initial rounding
1: With initial rounding. The initial rounding is a sensitive way of specifying small
setpoint changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).
Bit 03: Store setpoint in power-independent manner
0: No power-independent saving
1: Setpoint is saved in the event of a power failure (bit 00 = 1)
P1035 Signal source to increase setpoint (factory setting 0)
Automatically pre-assigned during commissioning, e.g. with the button on the
Operator Panel
P1036 Signal source to reduce setpoint (factory setting 0)
Automatically pre-assigned during commissioning, e.g. with the button on the
operator panel
P1037 Maximum setpoint (factory setting 0 rpm)
Automatically pre-assigned during commissioning
P1038 Minimum setpoint (factory setting 0 rpm)
Automatically pre-assigned during commissioning
P1039 Signal source to invert minimum and maximum setpoints (factory setting 0)
P1041 Signal source to switch from manual to automatic (factory setting 0)
P1042 Signal source for setpoint in automatic mode (factory setting 0)
P1043 Signal source to accept set value (factory setting 0)
E.g. command to switch on motor
P1044 Signal source for set value (factory setting 0)
Functions
For more information about the motorized potentiometer, see the List Manual (function
diagram 3020 and the parameter list).
Example of parameterization of the motorized potentiometer
Table 7- 6 Implementing a motorized potentiometer using digital inputs
P0700 = 2 Command source Digital inputs
P0701 = 1 Pre-assignment for digital input 0
The motor is switched on and off via digital input 0
The MOP setpoint is increased via digital input 1
The MOP setpoint is reduced via digital input 2
P1000 = 1 Setpoint selection: MOP setpoint
P1040 = 10 MOP start value
Each time the motor is switched on a setpoint corresponding to 10 rpm is specified
P1047 = 5 MOP ramp-up time:
The MOP setpoint is increased from zero to maximum (p1082) in 5 seconds
P1048 = 5 MOP ramp-down time:
The MOP setpoint is reduced from maximum (p1082) to zero in 5 seconds
7.4.4 Fixed speed as setpoint source

In many applications after switching on the motor, all that is needed is to run the motor at a
constant speed or to switch between different speeds. Examples of this simplified
specification of speed setpoint are:
● Conveyor belt with two different speeds.
● Grinding machine with different speeds corresponding to the diameter of the grinding
wheel.
If you use the technology controller in the inverter, then you can enter process variables that
remain constant over time using a fixed setpoint, e.g.:
● Closed-loop control of a constant flow with a pump.
● Closed-loop control of a constant temperature using a fan.
Procedure
You can set up to 16 various fixed setpoints and select these either via digital inputs or the
fieldbus. The fixed setpoints are defined using parameters P1001 to P1004 and can be
assigned to the corresponding command sources (e.g. the digital inputs) using P1020 to
P1023.
Functions
The various fixed setpoints can be selected in two ways:

1. Direct selection:
Precisely one fixed speed setpoint is assigned to each selection signal (e.g. a digital
input). As several selection signals are selected, the associated fixed speed setpoints are
added together to from a total setpoint.
Direct selection is particularly well suited to controlling the motor using the inverter's
digital inputs.
2. Binary selection:
Precisely one fixed speed setpoint is assigned to each possible combination of selection
signals.
Binary selection should preferably be used with a central control and when linking the
inverter to a fieldbus.
Table 7- 7 Parameters for direct selection of fixed setpoints
P1016 = 1 Direct selection of fixed setpoints (factory setting)
P1001 Fixed setpoint 1Factory setting: 0 rpm)
P1020 Signal source for selection of fixed setpoint 1 (factory setting: 722.3, i.e. selection
via digital input 3)
P1023 Signal source for selection of fixed setpoint 4 (factory setting: 0, i e. selection is
locked)
Table 7- 8 Function diagram of direct selection of fixed setpoints
Fixed setpoint selected BICO interconnection of The resultant fixed setpoint corresponds to the
by selection signals parameter values of …
(example)
Digital input 3 (DI 3) P1020 = 722.3 P1001
DI 3 and DI 4 P1001 + P1002
DI 3 and DI 5 P1001 + P1003
DI 3, DI 4 and DI 5 P1001 + P1002 + P1003
DI 3, DI 4, DI 5 and DI 6 P1001 + P1002 + P1003 + P1004
You will find further information about the fixed setpoints and binary selection in function
block diagrams 3010 and 3011 in the List Manual.
Functions
Example: Selecting two fixed speed setpoints using digital input 2 and digital input 3
The motor is to run at two different speeds:
● The motor is switched on with digital input 0
● When digital input 2 is selected, the motor is to run at a speed of 300 rpm.
● When digital input 3 is selected, the motor is to accelerate to a speed of 2000 rpm.
● When digital input 1 is selected, the motor should go into reverse
Table 7- 9 Parameter settings for the example
P0700 = 2 Selecting the command source: Digital inputs
P0701 = 1 Switching on motor using DI 0 - factory setting
P0702 = 12 Direction reversal using DI 1 - factory setting
P1001 = 300.000 Defines the fixed setpoint 1 in [rpm]
P1002 = 2000.000 Defines the fixed setpoint 2 in [rpm]
P1020 = 722.2 Connect up fixed setpoint 2 with DI 2.
r0722.2 = Parameter, which displays the status of digital input 2.
P1021 = 722.3 Connect fixed setpoint 3 with the status of DI 3.
r0722.3 = Parameter, which displays the status of digital input 3.
7.4.5 Running the motor in jog mode (JOG function)

Using the "jog" function (JOG function), you can switch the motor on and off using a control
command or the operator panel. The speed to which the motor accelerates for "Jog" can be
set.
The motor must be switched-off before you issue the "jog" control command. "Jog" has no
effect when the motor is switched on.
The "Jog" function is typically used to manually switch-on a motor after switching over from
automatic to manual operation.
Setting jogging
The "Jog" function has two different speed setpoints, e.g. for motor counter-clockwise
rotation and clockwise rotation.
With an operator panel, you can always select the "Jog" function. If you wish to use
additional digital inputs as control commands, you must interconnect the particular signal
source with a digital input.
Functions
7.5 Setpoint calculation
Table 7- 10 Parameters for the "Jog" function
Parameters Description
p1055 Signal source for jogging 1 - jog bit 0 (factory setting: 0)
If you wish to jog via a digital input, then set p1055 = 722.x
p1056 Signal source for jogging 2 - jog bit 1 (factory setting: 0)
If you wish to jog via a digital input, then set p1056 = 722.x
p1058 Jogging 1 speed setpoint (factory setting, 150 rpm)
p1059 Jogging 2 speed setpoint (factory setting, 150 rpm)
7.4.6 Specifying the motor speed via the fieldbus

If you enter the setpoint via a fieldbus, you must connect the inverter to a higher-level
control. For additional information, see chapter Connection to a fieldbus (Page 105).

The setpoint calculation modifies the speed setpoint, e.g. it limits the setpoint to a maximum
and minimum value and using the ramp-function generator prevents the motor from
executing speed steps.
3RVLWLYH 5DPSXS 5DPS

/LPLWDWLRQ WLPH GRZQWLPH
6SHHGVHWSRLQWIURP 6SHHGVHWSRLQWIRU
VHWSRLQWVRXUFH PRWRUFRQWURO
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
QHJDWLYH
/LPLWDWLRQ
Figure 7-4 Setpoint calculation in the inverter
7.5.1 Minimum speed and maximum speed

The speed setpoint is limited by both the minimum and maximum speed.
When the motor is switched on, it accelerates to the minimum speed regardless of the speed
setpoint. The set parameter value applies to both directions of rotation. Beyond its limiting
function, the minimum speed serves as a reference value for a series of monitoring
functions.
The speed setpoint is limited to the maximum speed in both directions of rotation. The
inverter generates a message (fault or alarm) when the maximum speed is exceeded.
Functions
The maximum speed also acts as an important reference value for various functions (e.g. the
ramp-function generator).
Table 7- 11 Parameters for minimum and maximum speed
P1080 Minimum speed
P1082 Maximum speed
7.5.2 Ramp-function generator

The ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel limits the speed of changes to the
speed setpoint. The ramp-function generator does the following:
● The soft acceleration and braking of the motor reduces the stress on the mechanical
system of the driven machine.
● Acceleration and braking distance of the driven machine (e.g. a conveyor belt) are
independent of the motor load.
Ramp-up/down time
The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator can be set independently
of each other. The times that you select depend purely on the application in question and
can range from just a few 100 ms (e.g. for belt conveyor drives) to several minutes (e.g. for
centrifuges).
When the motor is switched on/off via ON/OFF1, the motor also accelerates/decelerates in
accordance with the times set in the ramp-function generator.
Table 7- 12 Parameters for ramp-up time and ramp-down time
P1120 Ramp-up time 6SHHG
Duration of acceleration (in seconds)
from zero speed to the maximum 0D[LPXP
speed P1082 VSHHG
6HWSRLQW
P1121 Ramp-down time
Duration of deceleration in seconds
from the maximum speed P1082 to
standstill
3 3 W
For more information about this function, see the List Manual (function diagram 3060 and the
parameter list).
Functions
7.6 Motor control
The quick-stop function (OFF3) has a separate ramp-down time, which is set with P1135.
Note
If the ramp-up/down times are too short, the motor accelerates/decelerates with the
maximum possible torque and the set times will be exceeded.
Extended ramp-function generator

In the extended ramp-function generator, the acceleration process can be made "softer"
using initial and final rounding via parameters p1130 … p1134. Here, the ramp-up and ramp-
down times of the motor are increased by the rounding times.
Rounding does not affect the ramp-down time in the event of a quick stop (OFF3).
For more information, see the List Manual (the parameter list and function diagram 3070).
7.6 Motor control

For induction motors, there are two different open-loop control or closed-loop control
techniques:
0
● Open-loop control with V/f-characteristic (V/f control)
● Field-oriented control (vector control)
Criteria for selecting either V/f control or vector control

V/f control is perfectly suitable for almost any application in which the speed of induction
motors is to be changed. Examples of typical applications for V/f control include:
● Pumps
● Fans
● Compressors
● Horizontal conveyors
Commissioning vector control takes more time than when commissioning V/f control. When
compared to V/f control, vector control offers the following advantages:
● The speed is more stable for motor load changes.
● Shorter accelerating times when the setpoint changes.
● Acceleration and braking are possible with an adjustable maximum torque.
● Improved protection of the motor and the driven machine as a result of the adjustable
torque limiting.
● The full torque is possible at standstill.
● Torque control is only possible with vector control.
Functions
7.6 Motor control
Examples of typical applications in which vector control is used:

● Hoisting gear and vertical conveyors
● Winders
● Extruders
It is not permissible to use vector control in the following cases:

● If the motor is too small in comparison to the inverter (the rated motor power may not be
less than one quarter of the rated inverter power)
● If several motors are connected to one inverter
● If a power contactor is used between the inverter and motor and is opened while the
motor is powered up
● If the maximum motor speed exceeds the following values:
Inverter pulse frequency 2 kHz 4 kHz and higher

Pole number of the motor 2-pole 4-pole 6-pole 2-pole 4-pole 6-pole
Maximum motor speed [rpm] 9960 4980 3320 14400 7200 4800
7.6.1 V/f control

V/f control sets the voltage at the motor terminals on the basis of the specified speed
setpoint. The relationship between the speed setpoint and stator voltage is calculated using
characteristic curves. The inverter provides the two most important characteristics (linear
and square-law). User-defined characteristic curves are also supported.
V/f control is not a high-precision method of controling the speed of the motor. The speed
setpoint and the speed of the motor shaft are always slightly different. The deviation
depends on the motor load. If the connected motor is loaded with the rated torque, the motor
speed is below the speed setpoint by the amount of the rated slip. If the load is driving the
motor (i.e. the motor is operating as a generator), the motor speed is above the speed
setpoint.
7.6.1.1 V/f control with linear characteristic
V/f control with a linear characteristic is 9ROWDJH 8

mainly used in applications in which the
motor torque must be independent of the 5DWHGYROWDJH
motor speed. Examples of such
applications include horizontal conveyors
or compressors.
5DWHGIUHTXHQF\ )UHTXHQF\I
Functions
7.6 Motor control
V/f control with a parabolic characteristic 9ROWDJH 8

is used in applications in which the motor
torque increases with the motor speed. 5DWHGYROWDJH
Examples of such applications include
pumps and fans.
V/f control with square-law characteristic
reduces the losses in the motor and
inverter due to lower currents than when
a linear characteristic is used. 5DWHGIUHTXHQF\ )UHTXHQF\ I
P1300 Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode
0: V/f control with linear characteristic
2: V/f control with parabolic characteristic
Note
V/f control with a square-law characteristic must not be used in applications in which a high
torque is required at low speeds.
7.6.1.2 Additional characteristics for the V/f control

In addition to linear and square-law characteristics, there are the following additional
versions of the V/f control that are suitable for special applications.
Table 7- 13 Additional V/f control versions (P1300)
Parameter Application
P1300 = 1 Linear V/f characteristic with Flux Current Control (FCC)
Voltage losses across the stator resistance are automatically compensated. This is
particularly useful for small motors since they have a relatively high stator resistance.
The prerequisite is that the value of the stator resistance in P350 is parameterized as
accurately as possible.
P1300 = 3 Freely adjustable V/f 9ROWDJH 8
characteristic, which
supports the torque 0D[LPXPYROWDJH
behavior of U
synchronous motors
S8
(SIEMOSYN motors)
S8
S8
S8
U
+] S S )UHTXHQF\ I
I I
S S S
I I
Functions
7.6 Motor control
Parameter Application
P1300 = 4 Linear V/f characteristic with ECO
P1300 = 7 Square-law V/f characteristic with ECO
ECO mode is suitable for applications requiring a lower level of dynamic performance
and a constant speed setpoint and delivers an energy saving of up to 40 %.
When the setpoint is reached and remains unchanged for 5 s, the inverter
automatically reduces its output voltage to optimize the motor's operating point. ECO
mode is deactivated in the event of setpoint changes or if the inverter's DC-link
voltage is too high or too low.
In ECO mode set the slip compensation (P1335) to 100 %. In the event of minor
fluctuations in the setpoint, you have to raise the ramp-function generator tolerance
using p1148.
Note: Sudden load variations can cause the motor to stall.
P1300 = 5 Linear V/f characteristic for textile applications where it is important that the motor
P1300 = 6 speed is kept constant under all circumstances. This setting has the following effects:
1. When the maximum current limit is reached, the stator voltage is reduced but not
the speed.
2. Slip compensation is locked.
P1300 = 19 V/f control without characteristic. The interrelationship between the frequency and
voltage is not calculated in the inverter, but is specified by the user. With BICO
technology, P1330 defines the interface via which the voltage setpoint is entered
(e.g. analog input → P1330 = 755).
For more information about this function, see function diagram 6300 in the List Manual.
7.6.1.3 Optimizing with a high break loose torque and brief overload
The ohmic losses in the motor stator resistance and the motor cable play a more significant
role the smaller the motor and the lower the motor speed. You can compensate for these
losses by raising the V/f characteristic.
There are also applications where the motor temporarily needs more than its rated current in
the lower speed range or during acceleration in order to adhere to the speed setpoint.
Examples of such applications are:
● Driven machines with a high break loose torque
● Utilizing the brief overload capability of the motor when accelerating
Functions
7.6 Motor control
Voltage increase in V/f control (boost)
9ROWDJH 9
5DWHGYROWDJH
3
3
3
5DWHGIUHTXHQF\ )UHTXHQF\ I
Figure 7-5 Voltage boost using a linear V/f characteristic as an example
Voltage losses resulting from long motor cables and the ohmic losses in the motor are
compensated for using parameter p1310. An increased break loose torque when starting
and accelerating is compensated using parameter p1312 and/or p1311.
The voltage boost is active for every characteristic type of the V/f control.
Note
Only increase the voltage boost in small steps until satisfactory motor behavior is reached.
Excessively high values in p1310 ... p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off
(trip) the inverter due to overcurrent .
Table 7- 14 Optimizing the starting characteristics for a linear characteristic
P1310 Permanent voltage boost (factory setting 50 %)
The voltage boost is effective from standstill up to the rated speed.
It is at its highest at zero speed and reduces continuously as the speed increases.
Value of voltage boost at zero speed in V:
1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (r0395) × p1310 / 100 %.
P1311 Voltage boost on acceleration
The voltage boost on acceleration is independent of speed and occurs when the
setpoint is increased. It disappears as soon as the setpoint is reached.
Value in V: 1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (r0395) x p1311 /
100 %
P1312 Voltage boost at start up
The voltage boost during start-up results in an additional voltage boost during power-
up, but only for the first time the motor accelerates after having been switched on.
Value in V: 1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (r0395) x p1312 /
100 %
You will find more information about this function in the parameter list and in function
diagram 6300 of the List Manual.
Functions
7.6 Motor control
7.6.2 Vector control
7.6.2.1 Properties of vector control

Using a motor model, the vector control calculates the load and the motor slip. As a result of
this calculation, the inverter controls its output voltage and frequency so that the motor
speed follows the setpoint, independent of the motor load.
Vector control is possible without directly measuring the motor speed. This closed-loop
control is also known as sensorless vector control.
7.6.2.2 Commissioning vector control

Vector control only functions error-free if, during the basic commissioning, the motor data
were correctly parameterized and a motor data identification was performed with the motor in
the cold state.
You can find the basic commissioning in the following sections:
● Commissioning with the BOP-2 (Page 74)
● Commissioning with STARTER (Page 79)
Optimizing vector control

● Carry out the automatic speed controller optimization using (P1960 = 1)
Table 7- 15 The most important vector control parameters
P1300 = 20 Control type: Vector control without speed encoder
P0300 … Motor data are transferred from the motor rating plate during the quick commissioning
P0360 and calculated with the motor data identification
P1442 … Speed controller parameters
P1496
P1511 Additional torque
P1520 Upper torque limit
P1521 Lower torque limit
P1530 Motoring power limit
P1531 Regenerative power limit
Additional information about this function is provided in the parameter list and in function
diagrams 6030 onwards in the List Manual.
You will find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7494205):
Functions
7.6 Motor control
7.6.2.3 Torque control

Torque control is part of the vector control and normally receives its setpoint from the speed
controller output. By deactivating the speed controller and directly entering the torque
setpoint, the closed-loop speed control becomes closed-loop torque control. The inverter
then no longer controls the motor speed, but the torque that the motor generates.
Typical applications for torque control

The torque control is used in applications where the motor speed is specified by the
connected driven load. Examples of such applications include:
● Load distribution between master and slave drives:
The master drive is speed controlled, the slave drive is torque controlled.
● Winding machines
Commissioning the torque control

The torque control only functions error-free if, during the basic commissioning, you correctly
parameterized the motor data and performed the motor data identification with the motor in
the cold state.
You can find the basic commissioning in the following sections:
● Commissioning with the BOP-2 (Page 74)
● Commissioning with STARTER (Page 79)
Table 7- 16 The most important torque control parameters
P1300 = … Control type:
20: Vector control without speed encoder
22: Torque control without speed encoder
P0300 … Motor data are transferred from the motor rating plate during the quick commissioning
P0360 and calculated with the motor data identification
P1511 = … Additional torque
P1520 = … Upper torque limit
P1521 = … Lower torque limit
P1530 = … Motoring power limit
P1531 = … Regenerative power limit
Additional information about this function is provided in the parameter list and in function
diagrams 6030 onwards in the List Manual.
Functions
7.7 Protection functions

The frequency inverter offers protective functions against overtemperature and overcurrent
for both the frequency inverter as well as the motor. Further, the frequency inverter protects

itself against an excessively high DC link voltage when the motor is regenerating.
The load torque monitoring functions provide effective plant and system protection.
7.7.1 Inverter temperature monitoring

The inverter temperature is essentially determined by the resistive losses of the output
current and the switching losses which occur when pulsing the Power Module. The inverter
temperature falls when either the output current or the pulse frequency of the Power Module
is reduced.
I2t monitoring (A07805 - F30005)

The Power Module's I2t monitoring controls the inverter utilization by means of a current
reference value. The utilization is specified in r0036 [%].
Monitoring the chip temperature of the power unit (A05006 - F30024)

The temperature difference between the power chip (IGBT) and heat sink is monitored using
A05006 and F30024. The measured values are specified in r0037[1] [°C].
Heat sink monitoring (A05000 - F30004)

The power unit heat sink temperature is monitored using A05000 and F30004. The values
are specified in r0037[0] [°C].
Inverter response
P0290 Power unit overload response(Factory setting for all Power Modules except for PM260:
2nd factory setting for PM260: 0)
Setting the reaction to a thermal overload of the power unit:
0: Reduce output current (in vector control mode) or speed (in V/f mode)
1: No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached (F30024)
2: Reduce pulse frequency and output current (in vector control mode) or pulse
frequency and speed (in V/f mode)
3: Reduce pulse frequency
P0292 Power unit temperature warning threshold (factory setting: Heat sink [0] 5°C, power
semiconductor [1] 15°C)
The value is set as a difference to the shutdown temperature.
Functions
7.7.2 Motor temperature monitoring using a temperature sensor

You can use temperature measurement in the motor to offer the motor thermal protection as
follows:
● with PTC sensor
● KTY 84 sensor
● ThermoClick sensor
The motor's temperature sensor is connected to the Control Unit.
Temperature measurement via PTC

The PTC sensor is connected to terminals 14 and 15.
● Overtemperature: The threshold value to switch over to an alarm or fault is 1650 Ω. After
the PTC responds, alarm A07910 or shutdown with fault F07011 is initiated
corresponding to the setting in p0610.
● Short-circuit monitoring: Resistance values < 20 Ω indicate a temperature sensor short-
circuit
Temperature measurement using KTY 84

The device is connected to terminals 14 (anode) and 15 (cathode) in the forward direction of
the diode. The measured temperature is limited to between -48 °C and +248°C and is made
available for further evaluation.
● When the alarm threshold is reached (set via p0604; factory setting: 130 °C), alarm
A7910 is triggered. Response -> p0610)
● Fault F07011 is output (depending on the setting in p0610) if
– the fault threshold temperature (settable in p0605) is reached
– the alarm threshold temperature (settable in p0604) is reached and is still present after
the delay time as expired.
Wire-break and short-circuit monitoring via KTY 84

● Wire break: Resistance value > 2120 Ω
● Short circuit: Resistance value < 50 Ω
As soon as a resistance outside this range is measured, A07015 "Alarm temperature sensor
fault" is activated and after the delay time expires, F07016 "Motor temperature sensor fault"
is initiated.
Temperature monitoring via ThermoClick sensor

The ThermoClick sensor responds at values ≥100 Ω. After the ThermoClick sensors has
responded, either alarm A07910 or shutdown with fault F07011 is initiated corresponding to
the setting in p0610.
Functions
Parameters to set the motor temperature monitoring with sensor
Table 7- 17 Parameters for detecting the motor temperature via a temperature sensor
P0335 Specify the motor cooling
0: Self-ventilated - with fan on the motor shaft (IC410* or IC411*) - (factory setting)
1: Forced ventilation - with a separately driven fan (IC416*)
2: Self-ventilated and inner cooling* (open-circuit air cooled)
3: Forced ventilated and inner cooling* (open-circuit air cooled)
P0601 Motor temperature sensor type Terminal no.
0: No sensor (factory setting) 14 PTC+
1: PTC thermistor (→ P0604) KTY anode
2: KTY84 (→ P0604) ThermoClick
4: ThermoClick sensor
15 PTC-
KTY cathode
ThermoClick
P0604 Motor temperature alarm threshold (factory setting 130°C)
The alarm threshold is the value at which the inverter is either shut down or Imax is
reduced (P0610)
P0605 Motor temperature fault threshold (Factory setting: 145℃)
P0610 Motor overtemperature response
Determines the response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
0: No motor response, only an alarm
1: Alarm and reduction of Imax (factory setting)
reduces the output speed
2: Fault message and shutdown (F07011)
P0640 Current limit (input in A)
*According to EN 60034-6
7.7.3 Protecting the motor by calculating the motor temperature

The temperature calculation is only possible in the vector control mode (P1300 ≥ 20) and
functions by calculating a thermal motor model.
Table 7- 18 Parameter to sense the temperature without using a temperature sensor
P0621 = 1 Motor temperature measurement after restarting
0: No temperature measurement (factory setting)
1: Temperature measurement after the motor is switched on for the first time
2: Temperature measurement each time that the motor is switched on
P0622 Magnetization time of the motor for temperature measurement after starting (set
automatically as the result of motor data identification)
P0625 = 20 Ambient motor temperature
Enter the ambient motor temperature in°C at the instant that the motor data is
acquired (factory setting: 20°C).
The difference between the motor temperature and motor environment (P0625) must
lie within a tolerance range of approx. ± 5 °C.
Functions
7.7.4 Overcurrent protection

During vector control, the motor current remains within the torque limits set there.
During V/f control, the maximum current controller (Imax controller) protects the motor and
inverter against overload by limiting the output current.
Method of operation of Imax controller

If an overload situation occurs, the speed and stator voltage of the motor are reduced until
the current is within the permissible range. If the motor is in regenerative mode, i.e. it is
being driven by the connected machine, the Imax controller increases the speed and stator
voltage of the motor to reduce the current.
Note
The inverter load is only reduced if the motor torque decreases at lower speeds (e.g. for
fans).
In the regenerative mode, the current only decreases if the torque decreases at a higher
speed.
Settings
NOTICE
The factory setting of the Imax controller only needs to be changed in exceptional cases by
appropriately trained personnel.
Table 7- 19 Imax controller parameters
P0305 Rated motor current
P0640 Motor current limit
P1340 Proportional gain of the Imax controller for speed reduction
P1341 Integral time of the Imax controller for speed reduction
P1345 Proportional gain of the Imax controller for voltage reduction
P1346 Integral time of the Imax controller for voltage reduction
r0056.13 Status: Imax controller active
r1343 Speed output of Imax controller
Shows the amount to which the I-max controller reduces the speed.
r1344 Voltage output of Imax controller
Shows the amount by which the I-max controller reduces the inverter output voltage.
For more information about this function, see function diagram 1690 in the List Manual.
Functions
7.7.5 Limiting the maximum DC link voltage
How does the motor generate overvoltage?

An induction motor operates as a generator if it is driven by the connected load. A generator
converts mechanical power into electrical power. The electrical power flows back into the
inverter.
As a consequence, the DC link voltage in the inverter increases. The inverter can only
reduce the DC link voltage again if it has an energy recovery feature or it has a braking
resistor.
Above a critical DC link voltage both the inverter as well as the motor will be damaged.
Before the voltage can reach critical levels, however, the inverter switches the motor off with
the fault message "DC link overvoltage".
Protecting the motor and inverter against overvoltage

The VDCmax controller prevents – as far as is technically possible – the DC link voltage from
reaching critical levels.
The VDCmax controller is not suitable for applications in which the motor is permanently in the
regenerative mode, e.g. in hoisting gear or when large flywheel masses are subject to
braking. For applications such as these, you must select an inverter that is equipped with a
braking resistor (Power Module PM240 plus external braking resistor) or can feed energy
back into the line supply (Power Modules PM250 and PM260).
There are two different groups of parameters for the VDCmax controller, depending on whether
the motor is being operated with V/f control or vector control.
Table 7- 20 VDCmax controller parameters
Parameter for Parameter for Description

V/f control vector control
p1280 = 1 p1240 = 1 VDC controller or VDC monitoring configuration(factory setting:
1)1: Enable VDCmax controller
r1282 r1242 VDCmax controller switch-on level
Shows the value of the DC-link voltage above which the VDCmax
controller is active
p1283 p1243 VDCmax controller dynamic factor (factory setting: 100 %) scaling
of the control parameters P1290, P1291 and P1292
p1290 p1250 VDCmax controller proportional gain (factory setting: 1)
p1291 p1251 VDCmax controller reset time (factory setting p1291: 40 ms,
factory setting p1251: 0 ms)
p1292 p1252 VDCmax controller rate time (factory setting p1292: 10 ms, factory
setting p1252: 0 ms)
Functions
Parameter for Parameter for Description

V/f control vector control
p1294 p1254 VDCmax-controller automatic recording ON-signal level(factory
setting p1294: 0, factory setting p1254: 1)Activates or
deactivates automatic detection of the switch-on levels of the
VDCmaxcontroller.
0: Automatic detection disabled
1: Automatic detection enabled
p0210 p0210 Device connection voltage
If p1254 or p1294 = 0, the inverter uses this parameter to
calculate the intervention threshold of the VDCmax controller.
Set this parameter to the actual value of the input voltage.
For more information about this function, see the List Manual (function diagrams 6320 and
6220).
7.7.6 Load torque monitoring (system protection)

In many applications, it is advisable to monitor the motor torque:
● Applications where the load speed can be indirectly monitored by means of the load
torque. For example, in fans and conveyor belts too low a torque indicates that the drive
belt is torn.
● Applications that are to be protected against overload or locking (e.g. extruders or
mixers).
● Applications in which no-load operation of the motor represents an impermissible
situation (e.g. pumps).
Load torque monitoring functions

The inverter monitors the torque of the motor in different ways:
1. No-load monitoring:
The inverter generates a message if the motor torque is too low.
2. Blocking protection:
The inverter generates a message if the motor speed cannot match the speed setpoint
despite maximum torque.
3. Stall protection:
The inverter generates a message if the inverter control has lost the orientation of the
motor.
4. Speed-dependent torque monitoring
The inverter measures the actual torque and compares it with a parameterized
speed/torque characteristic.
Functions
Table 7- 21 Parameterizing the monitoring functions
No-load monitoring
P2179 Current limit for no-load detection
If the inverter current is below this value, the message "no load" is output.
P2180 Delay time for the "no load" message
Blocking protection
P2177 Delay time for the "motor locked" message
Stall protection
P2178 Delay time for the "motor stalled" message
P1745 Deviation of the setpoint from the actual value of the motor flux as of which the
"motor stalled" message is generated
This parameter is only evaluated as part of encoderless vector control.
Speed-dependent torque monitoring
P2181 Load monitoring, response
Setting the response when evaluating the load monitoring.
0: Load monitoring disabled
>0: Load monitoring enabled
P2182 Load monitoring, speed threshold 1
P2185 Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper
P2186 Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower
P2192 Load monitoring, delay time
Delay time for the message "Leave torque monitoring tolerance band"
Functions
7RUTXH>1P@
3
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHU
3
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHU
3
3
3
3
6SHHG>USP@
3 3
6SHHGWKUHVKROG 6SHHGWKUHVKROG
3 3
6SHHGWKUHVKROG 0D[LPXPVSHHG
For more information about these functions, see the List Manual (function diagram 8013 and
the parameter list).
7.7.7 Load failure monitoring via digital input

Using this function, you can directly monitor the load failure of the driven machine, e.g. for
fans or conveyor belts.
39
3[
3
', U[ WRVLJQDOHYDOXDWLRQ
Figure 7-6 Load failure monitoring by means of a digital input
If you parameterize the function of a digital input for load failure monitoring (P070x = 50), you
automatically interconnect this input to signal evaluation via BICO technology.
Functions
Table 7- 22 Setting load failure monitoring
P2193 = 3 Load monitoring configuration (factory setting: 1)
1: Torque and load failure monitoring
2: Speed and load failure monitoring
3: Load failure monitoring
P070x = 50 Pre-assignment of digital input
50: Load monitoring failure detection
Monitoring is possible via each of the CU's digital inputs. If you want to use digital
input 2, for example, parameterize P0703 = 50
P2192 Load monitoring delay time (factory setting 10 s)
If, after the motor is switched on, the "LOW" signal is present on the associated
digital input for longer than this time, a load failure is assumed (F07936)
For more information, see the List Manual (the parameter list and function diagram 8013).
Functions
7.8 Status messages
7.8 Status messages

Information about the inverter state (alarms, faults, actual values) can be output via inputs
and outputs and also via the communication interface.
Details on evaluating the inverter state via inputs and outputs are provided in Section
Configuring the terminal strip (Page 97).
The evaluation of the inverter state via the communication interface is realized using the
inverter status word. Details on this are provided in the individual sections of Chapter
Connection to a fieldbus (Page 105).
7.8.1 System runtime

By evaluating the system runtime of the inverter, you can decide when you should replace
components subject to wear in time before they fail - such as fans, motors and gear units.
Principle of operation
The system runtime is started as soon as the Control Unit power supply is switched-on. The
system runtime stops when the Control Unit is switched off.
The system runtime comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days):
System runtime = r2114[1] × days + r2114[0] × milliseconds
If r2114[0] has reached a value of 86,400,000 ms (24 hours), r2114[0] is set to the value 0
and the value of r2114[1] is increased by 1.
r2114[0] System runtime (ms)
r2114[1] System runtime (days)
You cannot reset the system runtime.
Functions
7.9 Technological functions

The inverter offers a series of technology functions, e.g.:
● Braking functions
● Automatic restart and flying restart
● Basic process control functions
● Logical and arithmetic functions using function blocks that can be freely interconnected
Please refer to the following sections for detailed descriptions.
The inverter also offers the following HVAC functions which are described in section
(Page 240).
● Emergency operation
● Multi-zone controller
● Motor staging and autochange
● Bypass
● Hibernation
7.9.1 Braking functions of the converter
7.9.1.1 Comparison of electrical braking methods
Regenerative power
If an induction motor electrically brakes the connected load and the mechanical power
exceeds the electrical losses, then it operates as a generator. The motor converts
mechanical power into electrical power. Examples of applications, in which regenerative
operation briefly occurs, include:
● Grinding disk drives
● Fans
For certain drive applications, the motor can operate in the regenerative mode for longer
periods of time, e.g.:
● Centrifuges
● Hoisting gear and cranes
● Conveyor belts with downward movement of load (vertical or inclined conveyors)
Functions
Inverter braking methods

Depending on the particular application, there are different methods for dealing with
regenerative energy.
DC braking
 Advantage: The motor is braked without the inverter
having to convert the regenerative energy 0 /RDG
 Disadvantages: significant increase in the motor a a
temperature; no defined braking characteristics; no
constant braking torque; no braking torque at standstill; ,QYHUWHU
%UDNLQJSRZHU
braking power is lost as heat; does not function when the /RDG
power fails
Compound braking
 Advantage: Defined braking characteristics, the motor is
braked without the inverter having to convert any
regenerative energy
 Disadvantages: significant motor temperature rise; no 3RZHUORVVPRWRU
constant braking torque; braking power is dissipated as
heat; does not function when the power fails
The regenerative energy is converted to heat in the motor.
Dynamic braking
 Advantages: defined braking characteristics; no
additional motor temperature increase; constant braking 0 /RDG
torque; in principle, also functions when the power fails a a
 Disadvantages: A braking resistor is required;
regenerative power is lost as heat; the permissible %UDNLQJ
thermal load of the braking resistor must be taken into FKRSSHU
account ,QYHUWHU 5 5
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
%UDNLQJSRZHU
/RDG
3RZHUORVVPRWRU
3RZHUORVV
LQYHUWHU
3RZHUORVV
EUDNLQJUHVLVWRU
The inverter converts the regenerative power into heat using

a braking resistor
Functions
Braking with regenerative feedback into the line supply

 Advantages: Constant braking torque; the regenerative
power is not converted into heat, but is regenerated into 0 /RDG
the line supply; can be used in all applications;
continuous regenerative operation is possible - e.g.
a a
when lowering a crane load ,QYHUWHU
 Disadvantage: Does not function when power fails
5HJHQHUDWLYHIHHGEDFN %UDNLQJSRZHU
LQWRWKHOLQHVXSSO\ /RDG
3RZHUORVV 3RZHUORVVPRWRU
LQYHUWHU
The inverter feeds the regenerative power back into the

mains
Braking method depending on the application
Table 7- 23 What braking method is suitable for what application?
Application examples Electrical braking methods Power Modules that can be

used
Pumps, fans, mixers, Not required PM230, PM240, PM250,
compressors, extruders PM260
Grinding machines, conveyor DC braking, compound braking PM240
belts
Centrifuges, vertical conveyors, Dynamic braking PM240
hoisting gear, cranes, winders Braking with regenerative feedback PM250, PM260
to the line
Table 7- 24 What Power Module do you require for a specific braking method?
SINAMICS G120 Power Module

PM230 PM240 PM250 PM260
DC braking X X X X
Compound braking --- X --- ---
Dynamic braking --- X --- ---
Braking with regenerative feedback to the line --- --- X X
Functions
7.9.1.2 DC braking
DC braking is typically used for applications in which the motor is normally operated at a
constant speed and is only braked down to standstill in longer time intervals, e.g.:
● Centrifuges
● Saws
● Grinding machines
● Conveyor belts
You can select the DC braking in two different ways:
1. Using any binary signal, e.g. a digital input.
2. When a fault occurs.
6HOHFWLRQYLD%,&26LJQDO 6HOHFWLRQYLDIDXOW
'&EUDNLQJ )DXOW
VHOHFWHG U
U
W W
6SHHG 6SHHG
2)) 2))
S
S
S
2))
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH W '&EUDNLQJDFWLYH W
U U
W S W
Figure 7-7 Principle of operation of the DC braking
Selection via BICO Signal Selection via fault

1. --- Initially, the inverter brakes the motor with the
ramp-down time of the ramp-function
generator (OFF1 ramp-down time) until an
adjustable speed threshold is reached.
2. The inverter temporarily issues an internal OFF2 If the motor speed falls below this threshold,
command. the inverter issues a temporary internal OFF2
command.
3. If the motor is demagnetized (p0347 has expired), the inverter injects a direct current into the
motor. The magnitude of the DC current can be adjusted using p1230.
4. Direct current flows through the motor until DC The duration of DC braking can be adjusted
braking has been deactivated. using p1233.
Functions
CAUTION
DC braking converts some of the kinetic energy of the motor and load into heat in the motor
(temperature rise). The motor will overheat if the braking operation lasts too long or the
motor is braked too often.
Parameterizing DC braking
Table 7- 25 DC braking enabling:
Select DC braking via external command:
p1230 BI: DC braking activation (factory setting: 0)
Selects DC braking via a signal that was used by an external source (BICO). The
function remains active as long as the external signal is active.
Selection of DC braking via fault:
p2100 Set the fault number for fault reaction (Factory setting: 0) Set the fault number for which
DC braking should be activated, e.g.: p2100[3] = 7860 (external fault 1).
p2101 = 6 Set the fault reactionFactory setting: 0)
Setting the fault reaction for the selected fault e.g. p2100[3] = 6 (DC braking for external
fault 1).
DC braking cannot be selected for all faults.
Table 7- 26 Setting the DC braking:
p1231 DC braking configuration (factory setting: 0)
Activate DC braking.
0: No function (factory setting)
4: DC braking
p1232 DC braking braking current (factory setting: 0 A)
Setting the braking current for the DC braking.
p1233 DC braking duration (factory setting: 1 s)
p1234 DC braking start speed (factory setting: 210000 rpm)
If the actual speed falls below this threshold, DC braking is activated.
p0347 Motor de-excitation
The parameter is calculated via p0340 = 1, 3.
The inverter can trip due to an overcurrent during DC braking if the de-excitation time is
too short.
Functions
7.9.1.3 Compound braking

Compound braking is typically used for applications in which the motor is normally operated
at a constant speed and is only braked down to standstill in longer time intervals, e.g.:
● Centrifuges
● Saws
● Grinding machines
:LWKRXWFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ :LWKFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ
6SHHG
W W
0RWRUFXUUHQW $GGLWLYH'&
FXUUHQW
W W
'&OLQNYROWDJH
U
W W
Figure 7-8 Motor brakes with and without active compound braking
Compound braking prevents the DC link voltage increasing above a critical value. The
inverter activates compound braking depending on the DC link voltage. Above a DC link
voltage threshold (r1282), the inverters adds a DC current to the motor current. The DC
current brakes the motor and prevents an excessive increase in the DC link voltage.
Note
Compound braking is only active in conjunction with the V/f control.
Compound braking does not operate in the following cases:
 The "flying restart" function is active
 DC braking is active
 Vector control is selected
Functions
Parameterizing compound braking
Table 7- 27 Parameters to enable and set compound braking
P3856 Compound braking current (%)
With the compound braking current, the magnitude of the DC current is defined, which
is additionally generated when stopping the motor for operation with V/f control to
increase the braking effect.
P3856 = 0
Compound braking locked
P3856 = 1 … 250
Current level of the DC braking current as a % of the rated motor current (P0305)
Recommendation: p3856 < 100 % × (r0209 - r0331) / p0305 / 2
r3859.0 Status word, compound braking
r3859.0 = 1: Compound braking is active
CAUTION
Compound braking converts part of the kinetic energy of the motor and load into motor heat
(temperature rise). The motor can overheat if braking lasts too long or the drive is braked
too frequently.
Functions
7.9.1.4 Dynamic braking

Dynamic braking is typically used in applications in which dynamic motor behavior is
required at different speeds or continuous direction changes, e.g.:
● Vertical and inclined conveyors
● Hoisting gear
The inverter controls the braking chopper depending on its DC link voltage. The DC link
voltage increases as soon as the inverter absorbs the regenerative power when braking the
motor. The braking chopper converts this power into heat in the braking resistor. This
therefore prevents the DC link voltage increasing above the limit value VDC link, max.
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
U
0RWRUSRZHU
PRWRULQJ
W
5HJHQHUDWLQJ
'&OLQNYROWDJH9DC link
U
9DC link, max
%UDNLQJFKRSSHUDFWLYH W
Figure 7-9 Simplified representation of dynamic braking with respect to time
Functions
Braking resistor connection

● Connect the braking resistor to terminals R1 and R2 of the Power Module
● Ground the braking resistor directly to the control cabinet's grounding bar. The braking
resistor must not be grounded via the PE terminals on the Power Module
● Evaluate the braking resistor's temperature monitoring (terminals T1 and T2) such that
the motor is switched off when the resistor has an overtemperature condition.
You can do this in the following two ways:
– Use a contactor to disconnect the inverter from the line as soon as temperature
monitoring requests it
– Specify the inverter's OFF2 command via the braking resistor's temperature
monitoring
/
/
/
3(
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
7 7
5 5 8 9 : 3(
9 2))
&RQWURO8QLW 3RZHU0RGXOH 8 9 : 3(
Figure 7-10 Braking resistor connection
You will find more information about the braking resistor in the installation instructions for
Power Module PM240
WARNING
If an unsuitable braking resistor is used, this could result in a fire and severely damage the
inverter.
The temperature of braking resistors increases during operation. For this reason, avoid
coming into direct contact with braking resistors. Maintain sufficient clearances around the
braking resistor and ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
Parameterizing the dynamic braking

Deactivate the VDCmax controller. The VDCmax controller is described in Section Limiting the
maximum DC link voltage (Page 214).
The dynamic braking does not have to be parameterized any further.
Functions
7.9.1.5 Braking with regenerative feedback to the line

Regenerative braking is typically used in applications where braking energy is generated
either frequently or for longer periods of time, e.g.:
● Centrifuges
● Unwinders
● Cranes and hoisting gear
Pre-requisite for regenerative braking is the Power Module PM250 or PM260.
The inverter can feed back up to 100% of its power into the line supply (referred to "High
Overload" base load, see Section Technical data, Power Modules (Page 297)).
Parameterization of braking with regenerative feedback to the line
Table 7- 28 Settings for braking with regenerative feedback to the line
Limiting the regenerative feedback for V/f control (P1300 < 20)
p0640 Motor overload factor
Limiting the regenerative power is not directly possible with V/f control, but can be
achieved indirectly by limiting the motor current.
If the current exceeds this value for longer than 10 s, the inverter shuts down the motor
with fault message F07806.
Limiting feedback with vector control (P1300 ≥ 20)
P1531 Regenerative power limit
The maximum regenerative load is entered as negative value via p1531.
(-0.01 … -100000.00 kW).
Values higher than the rated value of the power unit (r0206) are not possible.
7.9.2 Automatic restart and flying restart
7.9.2.1 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running

If you switch on the motor while it is still running, then with a high degree of probability, a
fault will occur due to overcurrent (overcurrent fault F07801). Examples of applications
involving an unintentionally rotating motor directly before switching on:
● The motor rotates after a brief line interruption.
● A flow of air turns the fan impeller.
● A load with a high moment of inertia drives the motor.
After the ON command, the "flying restart" function initially synchronizes the inverter output
frequency to the motor speed and then accelerates the motor up to the setpoint.
Functions
21FRPPDQG
W
6SHHG
6SHHG
VHWSRLQW
0RWRULVPDJQHWL]HG
0RWRUVSHHG
,QYHUWHURXWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 7-11 Principle of operation of the "flying restart" function
Setting "flying restart" function

If the inverter simultaneously drives several motors, then you must only use the "flying
restart" function if the speed of all of the motors is always the same (group drive with a
mechanical coupling).
Table 7- 29 Basic setting
P1200 Flying restart operating mode (factory setting: 0)
0 Flying restart is locked
1 Flying restart is enabled, look for the motor in both directions, start in direction of
setpoint
4 Flying restart is enabled, only search in direction of setpoint
P1201 Flying restart enable signal source (factory setting: 1)
Defines a control command, e.g. a digital input, through which the flying restart function
is enabled.
P1202 Flying restart search current (Factory setting for Power Module PM230: 90 %. Factory
setting for PM240, PM250 and PM260: 100%)
Defines the search current with respect to the motor magnetizing current (r0331), which
flows in the motor while the flying restart function is being used.
P1203 Flying restart search speed factor (Factory setting for Power Module PM230: 150 %.
Factory setting for PM240, PM250 and PM260: 100%)
The value influences the speed with which the output frequency is changed during the
flying restart. A higher value results in a longer search time.
If the inverter does not find the motor, reduce the search speed (increase p1203).
Functions
7.9.2.2 Automatic switch-on

The automatic restart includes two different functions:
1. The inverter automatically acknowledges faults.
2. After a fault occurs or after a power failure, the inverter automatically switches-on the
motor again.
This automatic restart function is primarily used in applications where the motor is controlled
locally via the inverter's inputs. In applications with a connection to a fieldbus, the central
control should evaluate the feedback signals of the drives, specifically acknowledge faults or
switch-on the motor.
A power failure is defined by one of the two following events:
● The power supply of the Power Module has failed (fault F30003, undervoltage in the DC
link).
● The 24 V power supply of the CU has failed.
WARNING
When the "automatic restart" function is active (p1210 > 1), the motor automatically
starts after a power failure. This is especially critical after longer power failures.
Reduce the risk of accidents in your machine or system to an acceptable level by
applying suitable measures, e.g. protective doors or covers.
Commissioning the automatic restart

● If it is possible that the motor is still rotating for a longer period of time after a power
failure or after a fault, then in addition, you must activate the "flying restart" function (Page 229).
● Using p1210, select the automatic restart mode that best suits your application.
$XWRPDWLFUHVWDUWPRGH$5
)DXOWVDXWRPDWLFDOO\ )DXOWVDXWRPDWLFDOO\ )DXOWVQRW

DFNQRZOHGJHG DFNQRZOHGJHG DXWRPDWLFDOO\
DFNQRZOHGJHG
1R$5
0RWRUQRWVZLWFKHGRQ 0RWRUDXWRPDWLFDOO\
DXWRPDWLFDOO\ VZLWFKHGRQ 0RWRUDXWRPDWLFDOO\
VZLWFKHGRQ
2QO\DIWHU 2QO\DIWHU
SRZHUIDLOXUH $OZD\V SRZHUIDLOXUH $OZD\V
S S S S S S

Figure 7-12 Selecting the automatic restart mode
● Set the parameters of the automatic restart function.

The method of operation of the parameters is explained in the following diagram and in
the table.
Functions
)DXOW )DXOWDIWHU
SRZHUIDLOXUH
RULQRSHUDWLRQ 1HZIDXOW
&RXQWHULVGHFUH W
&RXQWHUVWDUW &RXQWHU S
DWWHPSWV PHQWHGE\ ,IFRXQWHUWKHQIDXOW
)IROORZV
W
$XWRPDWLF
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW
$XWRPDWLF21 W
FRPPDQG
S S
0RWRUVSHHG W
W:6XPRIWKHWLPHVIRUIO\LQJUHVWDUW
W: V W: V DQGPDJQHWL]LQJWLPHRIWKHPRWRU
W
VWVWDUWDWWHPSW QGVWDUWDWWHPSW
0RQLWRULQJWLPH XQVXFFHVVIXO VXFFHVVIXO
S>@ $VWDUWDWWHPSWPXVWEHVXFFHVVIXOZLWKLQWKLVWLPH
,IQRWIDXOW)IROORZV
0RQLWRULQJWLPH W
S>@ $IWHUWKLVWLPHH[SLUHVWKH
LQYHUWHUUHVHWVWKHDWWHPSWHG
VWDUWVFRXQWHU
W
1 The inverter automatically acknowledges faults under the following conditions:
 p1210 = 1: always.
 p1210 = 4 or 6: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or via the
fieldbus (ON command = HIGH).
 p1210 = 14 or 16: never.
2 The inverter attempts to automatically switch-on the motor under the following conditions:
 p1210 = 1: never.
 p1210 = 4, 6, 14 or 16: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or via
the fieldbus (ON command = HIGH).
3 The start attempt is successful if flying restart has been completed and the motor has been
magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and one additional second has expired without a new fault having
occurred.
Figure 7-13 Time response of the automatic restart
Functions
Table 7- 31 Overview of parameters to set the automatic restart
Parameter Explanation
p1210 Automatic restart mode (factory setting: 0)
0: Disable automatic restart
1: Acknowledge all faults without restarting
4: Restart after power failure without further restart attempts
6: Restart after fault with further restart attempts
14: Restart after power failure after manual fault acknowledgement
16: Restart after fault after manual fault acknowledgement
p1211 Automatic restart start attempts (factory setting: 3)
This parameter is only effective for the settings p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16.
You define the maximum number of start attempts using p1211. After each successful
fault acknowledgement, the inverter decrements its internal counter of start attempts by
1.
For p1211 = n, up to n + 1 start attempts are made. Fault F07320 is output after n + 1
unsuccessful start attempts.
The inverter sets the start attempt counter back again to the value of p1211, if one of
the following conditions is fulfilled:
 After a successful start attempt, the time in p1213[1] has expired.
 After fault F07320, withdraw the ON command and acknowledge the fault.
 You change the start value p1211 or the mode p1210.
 You switch-off the motor on (OFF command).
p1212 Automatic restart wait time start attempt (factory setting: 1.0 s)
This parameter is only effective if p1210 = 4, 6.
Examples for setting this parameter:
1. After a power failure, a certain time must elapse before the motor can be switched-
on, e.g. because other machine components are not immediately ready. In this case,
set p1212 longer than the time, after which all of the fault causes have been
removed.
2. In operation, the inverter develops a fault condition. The lower you select p1212,
then the sooner the inverter attempts to switch-on the motor again.
Functions
Parameter Explanation
p1213[0] Automatic restart monitoring time
for restart (factory setting: 60 s)
With this monitoring function, you limit the time in which the inverter may attempt to
automatically switch-on the motor again.
The monitoring function starts when a fault is identified and ends with a successful start
attempt. If the motor has not successfully started after the monitoring time has expired,
fault F07320 is signaled.
Set the monitoring time longer than the sum of the following times:
+ P1212
+ time that the inverter requires to start the motor on the fly.
+ Motor magnetizing time (p0346)
+ 1 second
You deactivate the monitoring function with p1213 = 0.
p1213[1] Automatic restart monitoring time
to reset the fault counter (factory setting: 7200 s)
Using this monitoring time, you prevent that faults, which continually occur within a
certain time period, are automatically acknowledged each time.
The monitoring function starts with a successful start attempt and ends after the
monitoring time has expired.
If the inverter has made more than (p1211 + 1) successful start attempts within
monitoring time p1213[1], the inverter cancels the automatic restart function and signals
fault F07320. In order to switch on the motor again, you must acknowledge the fault and
issue a new ON command.
Additional information is provided in the parameter list of the List Manual.
Advanced settings
If you with to suppress the automatic restart function for certain faults, then you must enter
the appropriate fault numbers in p1206[0 … 9].
Example: P1206[0] = 07331 ⇒ No restart for fault F07331.
Suppressing the automatic restart only functions for the setting p1210 = 6 or 16.
WARNING
In the case of communication via the field bus interface, the motor restarts with the setting
p1210 = 6 even if the communication link is interrupted. This means that the motor cannot
be stopped via the open-loop control. To avoid this dangerous situation, you must enter the
fault code of the communications error in parameter p1206.
Example: A communication failure via PROFIBUS is signaled using fault code F01910. You
should therefore set p1206[n] = 1910 (n = 0 … 9).
Functions
7.9.3 PID technology controller

The technology controller permits all types of simple process controls to be implemented.
You can use the technology controller for e.g. pressure controllers, level controls or flow
controls.
5DPSIXQFWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU 3,'FRQWUROOHU
6HWSRLQW 6SHHG
WHFKQRORJ\ VHWSRLQW &ORVHGORRS
VSHHG
FRQWURO
7HFKQRORJ\DFWXDOYDOXH
/HYHO
VHQVRU 3XPS
Figure 7-14 Example: technology controller as a level controller
The technology controller specifies the speed setpoint of the motor in such a way that the
process variable to be controlled corresponds to its setpoint. The technology controller is
designed as a PID controller, which makes it highly flexible.
The technology controller setpoint is entered via an analog input or via the fieldbus.
Table 7- 32 Technology controller parameters
P2200 = … Enable technology controller
P2201 … r2225 Fixed speeds for the technology controller
P2231 … P2248 Motorized potentiometer for the technology controller
P2251 … r2294 General adjustment parameters of the technology controller
P2345 = … Changing the fault reaction for the technology controller
Additional information about this function is provided in the parameter list and in the function
diagrams 7950 … 7958 in the List Manual.
Additional technology controllers

Via the parameter ranges
● p11000 … p11099: free technology controller 0
additional technology controllers can be parameterized. Refer to the parameter descriptions
and in function diagram 7970 of the associated List Manual for additional details.
Functions
7.9.4 Logical and arithmetic functions using function blocks

Additional signal interconnections in the inverter can be established by means of free
function blocks. Every digital and analog signal available via BICO technology can be routed
to the appropriate inputs of the free function blocks. The outputs of the free function blocks
are also interconnected to other functions using BICO technology.
Among others, the following free function blocks are available:
● Logic modules AND, OR, XOR, NOT
● Arithmetic blocks ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, AVA (device for forming absolute values), NCM
(numeric comparator), PLI (polyline)
● Time modules MFP (pulse generator), PCL (pulse shortening), PDE (ON delay), PDF
(OFF delay), PST (pulse stretching)
● Memories: RSR (RS flip-flop), DSR (D flip-flop)
● Switches NSW (numeric change-over switch) BSW (binary change-over switch)
● Controllers LIM (limiter), PT1 (smoothing element), INT (integrator), DIF (differentiating
element)
● Limit value monitoring LVM
You will find an overview of all of the free function blocks and their parameters in the List
Manual, in Chapter "Function diagrams" in the section "Free function blocks" (function
diagrams 7210 ff).
Activating the free blocks

None of the free function blocks in the inverter are used in the factory setting. In order to be
able to use a free function block, you must perform the following steps:
● In the parameter list, select the function block from the function diagrams - there you will
find all of the parameters that you require to interconnect the block
● Assign the block to a runtime group
● Define the run sequence within the runtime group - this is only required if you have
assigned several blocks to the same runtime group.
● Interconnect the block's inputs and outputs with the corresponding signals on the inverter.
The runtime groups are calculated at different intervals (time slices). Please refer to the
following table to see which free function blocks can be assigned to which time slices.
Functions
Table 7- 33 Runtime groups and possible assignments of the free function blocks
Runtime groups 1 … 6 with associated time slices

Free function blocks 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 ms 16 ms 32 ms 64 ms 128 ms 256 ms
Logic modules ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
Arithmetic blocks - - - - ✓ ✓
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, AVA, NCM, PLI
Time modules - - - - ✓ ✓
MFP, PCL, PDE, PDF, PST
Memories ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
RSR, DSR
Switches - - - - ✓ ✓
NSW
Switches ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
BSW
Controllers - - - - ✓ ✓
LIM, PT1, INT, DIF
Limit value monitoring - - - - ✓ ✓
LVM
✓: The block can be assigned to the runtime group
-: The block cannot be assigned to this runtime group
Analog signal scaling

If you interconnect a physical quantity, e.g. speed or voltage to the input of a free function
block using BICO technology, then the signal is automatically scaled to a value of 1. The
analog output signals of the free function blocks are also available as scaled quantities (0 ≙
0 %, 1≙ 100 %).
As soon as you have interconnected the scaled output signal of a free function block to
functions, which require physical input quantities - e.g. the signal source of the upper torque
limit (p1522) - then the signal is automatically converted into the physical quantity.
The quantities with their associated scaling parameters are listed in the following:
 Speeds P2000 Reference speed (≙100 %)

 Voltage values P2001 Reference voltage (≙100 %)
 Current values P2002 Reference current (≙100 %)
 Torque values P2003 Reference torque (≙100 %)
 Power values P2004 Reference power (≙100 %)
 Angle P2005 Reference angle (≙100 %)
 Acceleration P2007 Reference acceleration (≙100 %)
 Temperature 100 °C ≙ 100 %
Functions
Scaling examples
● Speed:
Reference speed p2000 = 3000 rpm, actual speed 2100 rpm. As a consequence, the
following applies to the scaled input quantity: 2100 / 3000 = 0.7.
● Temperature:
Reference quantity is 100 °C. For an actual temperature of 120 °C, the input value is
obtained from 120 °C / 100 °C = 1.2.
Note
Limits within the function blocks should be entered as scaled values. The scaled value
can be calculated as follows using the reference parameter: Scaled limit value = physical
limit value / value of the reference parameter.
The assignment to reference parameters is provided in the parameter list in the individual
parameter descriptions.
Example: Logic combination of two digital inputs

You want to switch on the motor via digital input 0 and also via digital input 1:
1. Activate a free OR block by assigning it to a runtime group, and define the run sequence.
2. Interconnect the status signals of the two digital inputs DI 0 and DI 1 via BICO to the two
inputs of the OR block.
3. Finally, interconnect the OR block output with the internal ON command (P0840).
Functions
Table 7- 34 Parameters for using the free function blocks
P20048 = 1 Assignment of block OR 0 to runtime group 1 (factory setting: 9999)
The block OR 0 is calculated in the time slice with 8 ms
P20049 = 60 Definition of run sequence within runtime group 1 (factory setting: 60)
Within one runtime group, the block with the smallest value is calculated first.
P0701 = 0 Pre-assignment of digital input 0 (factory setting: 1)
Delete pre-assignment of digital input 0 to allow for interconnection via BICO
P0702 = 0 Pre-assignment of digital input 1 (factory setting: 12)
Delete pre-assignment of digital input 1 to allow for interconnection via BICO
P20046 [0] = 722.0 Interconnection of first OR 0 input (factory setting: 0)
The first OR 0 input is linked to digital input 0 (r0722.0)
P20046 [1] = 722.1 Interconnection of second OR 0 input (factory setting: 0)
The second OR 0 input is linked to digital input 1 (r0722.1)
P0840 = 20047 Interconnection of OR 0 output (factory setting: 0)
The OR 0 output (r20047) is connected with the motor's ON command
Example: AND operation

An example of an AND logic operation, explained in detail, including the use of a time block
is provided in the Extended scope for adaptation (Page 20)chapter.
You can find additional information in the following manuals:
● Function Manual "Free Function Blocks"
● Function Manual "Description of the Standard DCC Blocks"
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
7.10 HVAC functions
7.10.1 Real time clock (RTC)

The real time clock is the basis for time-dependent process controls, e.g.:
● To reduce the temperature of a heating control during the night
● Increase the pressure of a water supply at certain times during the day
Real time clock: Format and commissioning

The real time clock starts as soon as the Control Unit power supply is switched on for the
first time. The real time clock comprises the clock time in a 24 hour format and the date in
the "day, month, year" format.
After a Control Unit power supply interruption, the real time clock continues to run for approx.
five days.
If you wish to use the real time clock, you must set the time and date once when
commissioning. If you restore the inverter factory setting, the real time clock parameters are
not reset.
Parameter Real time clock (RTC)

p8400[0] RTC time, hour (0 … 23)
p8400[1] RTC time, minute (0 … 59)
p8400[2] RTC time, second (0 … 59)
p8401[0] RTC date , day (1 … 31)
p8401[1] RTC date , month (1 … 12)
p8401[2] RTC date , year (1 … 9999)
r8404 RTC weekday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
p8405 RTC activate/deactivate alarm A01098
Sets whether the real time clock issues an alarm if the time is not running in
synchronism (e.g. after a longer power supply interruption).
0: Alarm A01098 deactivated
1: Alarm A01098 activated
Accept the real time clock in the alarm and fault buffer
Using the real time clock, you can track the sequence of alarms and faults over time. When
an appropriate message occurs, the real time clock is converted into the UTC time format
(Universal Time Coordinated):
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Date, time ⇒ 01.01.1970, 0:00 + d (days) + m (milliseconds)

The number "d" of the days and the number "m" of milliseconds is transferred into the alarm
and fault times of the alarm or fault buffer, see Chapter Alarms, faults and system messages
(Page 279).
Converting UTC into RTC

An RTC can again be calculated from the UTC. Proceed as follows to calculate a date and
time from a fault or alarm time saved in the UTC format:
1. Calculate the number of seconds of UTC:
Number of seconds = ms / 1000 + days × 86400
2. In the Internet, you will find programs to convert from UTC into RTC, e.g.:
UTC to RTC (http://unixtime-converter.com/)
3. Enter the number of seconds in the corresponding screen and start the calculation.
Example:
Saved as alarm time in the alarm buffer:
r2123[0] = 2345 [ms]
r2145[0] = 14580 [days]
Number of seconds = 2345 / 1000 + 14580 × 86400 = 1259712002
Converting this number of seconds in RTC provides the date: 02.12.2009, 01:00:02.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
7.10.2 Time switch (DTC)

The "time switch" (DTC) function, along with the real time clock in the inverter, offers the
option of controlling when signals are switched on and off.
Examples:
● Day/night switching of a temperature control
● Switching a process control from weekday to weekend.
Principle of operation of the time switch (DTC)

The inverter has three independent parameterizable time switches. Using BICO technology,
the time switch output can be interconnected with every binector of your inverter, e.g. a
digital output or a technology controller's enable signal.
'7&ZHHNGD\ 0RQGD\ 7XHVGD\ :HGQHVGD\ 7KXUVGD\

DFWLYDWLRQ S>@ S>@ S>@ S>@
'HDFWLYDWHG $FWLYDWHG $FWLYDWHG 'HDFWLYDWHG
57&
SS
U
W
'7&VZLWFKLQJWLPHV 21 2))
S>@ S>@
S>@ S>@
'7&RXWSXW
U

W
Figure 7-15 Time behavior of the time switch using example DTC1
Parameterizing the time switch

● Enable parameterization of the DTC: p8409 = 0.
As long as DTC parameterization is enabled, the inverter keeps the output of all three
DTC (r84x3, x = 1, 2, 3) on LOW.
● Parameterize the activation of the weekdays; the switching on and off times.
● Enable the setting: p8409 = 1.
The inverter enables the DTC outputs once more.
Additional information is provided in the parameter list of the List Manual.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
7.10.3 Temperature measurement via PT1000 or NI1000
Analog input AI 2
Analog input AI 2 can be used as a current input or resistance input for a temperature
sensor. Both the DIP switch and parameter p0756.2 must be set accordingly for this
purpose.
● P0756.2 = 2 or 3 -> options for setting as current input
● P0756.2 = 6, 7 or 8 -> options for setting as temperature sensor
Analog input AI 3
Analog input AI 3 is designed as a resistance input for a temperature sensor.
Setting options:
● P0756.3 = 6, 7 or 8 -> options for setting as temperature sensor
Permissible temperature sensors

The temperature-dependent PT1000 or NI1000 resistors can be used as sensors. The
values of these sensors are supplied via analog input AI 2 or AI 3 (p2264 = 756.2 or 756.3)
as actual values for the technology controller.
The connection is established at AI 2 (terminals 50, 51) or AI 3 (terminals 52, 53).
Measuring ranges and alarm thresholds for NI1000

The measuring range of the NI1000 sensors extends from – 88 °C … 165 °C. For values
outside this range, the inverter outputs alarm A03520 "Temperature sensor fault". The fault
type is displayed in r2124.
Measuring ranges and alarm thresholds for PT1000

The measuring range of the PT1000 sensors extends from – 88 °C … 240 °C. For values
outside this range, the inverter outputs alarm A03520 "Temperature sensor fault". The fault
type is displayed in r2124.
Fault values for temperature sensing via AI 2

● r2124 = 33: Wire break or sensor not connected
● r2124 = 34: Short-circuit
Fault values for temperature sensing via AI 3

● r2124 = 49: Wire break or sensor not connected
● r2124 = 50: Short-circuit
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Note
If a temperature sensor is used as an input for the PID controller, the scaling of the analog
input must be adjusted.
 Scaling example for NI1000:
0 °C (p0757) = 0 % (p0758); 100 °C (p0759) = 100 % (p0760)
 Scaling example for PT1000:
0 °C (p0757) = 0 % (p0758); 100 °C (p0759) = 80 % (p0760)
Please refer to the parameter list for more details.
7.10.4 Emergency operation
Description
The Essential Service Mode (ESM) ensures that when required, the motor can be operated
for as long as possible so that for example smoke gases can be extracted or people affected
by a fire can escape. For the inverter, emergency operation can be activated without any
additional measures. As far as the plant or system are concerned, the design and
components used must be suitable for emergency operation.
Application example
In order to improve air circulation in stairwells, frequently, a slight underpressure is
generated using the technology controller. With this control, a fire would mean that smoke
would be drawn into the stairwell. This would then mean that the stairway would be blocked
as escape or evacuation route.
Using the emergency operation function for this particular case; a setpoint can be specified
to generate a positive pressure, preventing the propagation of smoke and other gases
caused by the fire in the stairwell, keeping the stairs free as an escape route.
Basis setting options
The "Emergency operation" function must be connected to a digital input in order that
emergency operation can be activated. To do this, the appropriate parameter must be set to
26, e.g. p0704[1] (DI3) = 26. Emergency operation is activated with a 1 signal via DI3.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Additional setting options (BiCo) for analog outputs

Emergency operation can be connected to any digital input via p3880. It can be activated
using either a high or a low level signal.
Note
Command source for emergency operation
We recommend that the command source for emergency operation is not logically combined
with any other functions.
 The setting of the source for emergency operation via p3880 always refers to the
currently active data set.
 Emergency operation can only be switched on via precisely one source.
The last setpoint recognized is taken as the emergency setpoint in the factory setting. You
can use p3881 to define another value:
● P3881 = 0: Last recognized setpoint (factory setting)
● P3881 = 1: Fixed setpoint 15
● P3881 = 2: Analog setpoint
● P3881 = 3: Fieldbus
● P3881 = 4: Technology controller
If you specify the emergency setpoint via the analog setpoint, fieldbus or technology
controller, you must ensure monitoring so that an alternative setpoint can be used in the
event of failure.
Possible forms of monitoring for the different setpoint sources:
● Analog setpoint: Using F03505
● Fieldbus status in r2043
● Technology controller r2349
You will find additional details on this in the List Manual in the function diagrams for
emergency operation, setpoint channel and technology controller.
When in the factory setting, if the setpoint is lost, the drive continues using the last
recognized setpoint. p3882 can be used to switch to the following values:
● P3882 = 0: Last recognized setpoint (factory setting)
● p3882 = 1: Fixed speed setpoint which is defined in p1015
● p3882 = 2: Maximum speed (value of p1082)
Note
Technology controller as setpoint source for the emergency setpoint
For the technology controller to be able to specify the emergency setpoint, it must be
activated (p2200 = 1) and set as the main setpoint (p2251 = 0).
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Direction of rotation in emergency operation

● Emergency setpoint using p3881 = 0, 1, 2, 3
Depending on your system, you may have to invert the setpoint locally for emergency
operation. Therefore the customer can use p3883 to specify the direction of rotation of
the emergency setpoint. To do this, p3883 must be linked with a free digital input,
e.g. p3883 = r722.12.
– p3883 = 0 -> normal emergency direction of rotation,
– p3883 = 1 -> inverted emergency direction of rotation.
● Emergency setpoint using p3881 = 4
If the emergency setpoint is specified using the technology controller, it is formed using
variables within the process and depends on these. Inversion using a digital input is
therefore locked in such cases and must be implemented in the technology controller.
Bypass operation in the essential service mode

● If the motor is running in bypass operation when the emergency happens, the user must
query the "Bypass control/status word" (r1261) and perform the appropriate
interconnection to ensure that the motor is switched to the inverter and continues to run
with the emergency setpoint.
● If the inverter has failed in the essential service mode because of an internal fault and if it
cannot be switched back on using the automatic restart function, the user can
interconnect bit 7 of the status word for the automatic restart (r1214.7) with p1266 to
operate the motor directly on the line. You will find additional information about bypass
operation in section Bypass (Page 256).
Special features of emergency operation

● The automatic restart function is activated when p1210 = 6 as soon as emergency
operation kicks in. This results in the inverter being restarted if a pulse inhibit (OFF2)
occurs due to an internal fault.
● In emergency operation, inverter shutdown due to faults is suppressed, with the
exception of faults that would lead to the destruction of the equipment. You will find a a
list of these faults in Section Emergency operation (Page 244).
● Emergency operation is triggered by a continuous signal (level-triggered) using the digital
input defined in p3880 as the source for emergency operation.
● In emergency operation, the motor can only be stopped if the line voltage is switched off
or emergency operation is terminated.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
● If emergency operation is deactivated, the inverter reverts to normal operation and its
behavior depends on the pending commands and setpoints.
● Emergency operation takes priority over all other operating modes (e.g. hibernation or
energy-saving mode).
NOTICE
Loss of warranty for an inverter in emergency operation
Should emergency operation apply, the customer can no longer make any warranty
claims. Emergency operation and faults arising during emergency operation are logged
in a password protected memory and can be read by the repair center.
Refer to parameters p3880 … r3889 for more information on emergency operation.
Note
Other preconditions for emergency operation
In order to operate the inverter in the emergency service mode, the appropriate degrees of
protection and connection and installation guidelines applicable to the system should be
observed. You will find details of this in the Australian Standard: AS/NZS 1668.1:1998.
Table 7- 35 Parameters needed to set emergency operation
Setting the source for emergency operation
p0704[1] = 26 Via a digital input(here, using DI3 as an example)
Or via
p3880 = 722.3 ESM activation (here, DI3, high-active)
Signal source for activating emergency operation
722.x for high-active, 723.x for low-active
Additional parameters to activate emergency operation
p3881 ESM setpoint source, 0 … 4
p3882 ESM substitute setpoint source
Setpoint should the parameterized ESM setpoint be lost
p3883 ESM direction of rotation
Signal source for direction of rotation in emergency operation, is not evaluated
when p3881 = 4
p3884 ESM setpoint technology controller
If p3884 is not connected up, then the technology controller uses the main
setpoint corresponding to p2251 = 0.
r3887 ESM: Number of activations and faults
Indicates how frequently ESM has been activated (index 0) and how many faults
occurred during ESM (index 1).
p3888 ESM: Reset the number of activations and faults
p3888 = 1 resets 3887[0] and 3887[1].
r3889 ESM status word
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Faults which are not ignored in emergency operation
F01000 Internal software error

F01001 Floating Point Exception
F01003 Time-out for memory access
F01040 Back up parameters and perform a POWER ON
F01044 Error in description data
F01205 Time slice overflow
F01512 BICO: No scaling
F01662 Error, internal communications
F07901 Drive: Motor overspeed
F30001 Power unit: Overcurrent
F30002 Power unit: DC-link voltage overvoltage
F30003 Power unit: DC-link voltage undervoltage
F30004 Power unit: Overtemperature heatsink inverter
F30005 Power unit: Overload I2t
F30017 Power unit: Hardware current limit has responded too often
F30021 Power unit: Ground fault
F30024 Power unit: Overtemperature, thermal model
F30025 Power unit: Chip overtemperature
F30027 Power unit: Time monitoring for DC link pre-charging
F30036 Power unit: Overtemperature, inside area
F30071 No new actual values received from the Power Module
F30072 Setpoints can no longer be transferred to the Power Module
F30105 PU: Actual value sensing error
F30662 Internal communication error
F30664 Fault during power-up
F30802 Power unit: Time slice overflow
F30805 Power unit: EPROM checksum not correct
F30809 Power unit: Switching information invalid
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
7.10.5 Multi-zone control
Description
Multi-zone control is used to control quantities such as pressure or temperature via the
technology setpoint deviation. The setpoints and actual values are fed in via the analog
inputs as current (0 … 20 mA) or voltage (0 … 10 V) or as a percentage via temperature-
dependent resistances (NI1000 / PT1000, 0 °C = 0 %; 100 °C = 100 %).
Control variants for multi-zone control

There are three control variants for multi-zone control, which are selected via p31021:
● One setpoint and one, two or three actual values
The actual value for the control can be calculated as mean value, maximum value or
minimum value. You can find all of the setting options in the parameter list in parameter
p31022.
– Average value: The deviation from the setpoint of the average value of two or three
actual values is controlled.
– Minimum value: The deviation from the setpoint of the smallest actual value is
controlled.
– Maximum value: The deviation from the setpoint of the highest actual value is
controlled.
● Two setpoint/actual value pairs as maximum value control (cooling)
The maximum value control compares two setpoints/actual value pairs and controls the
actual value which has the largest deviation upwards from its associated setpoint. No
control takes place if both actual values lie below their setpoints.
In order to avoid frequent changeover, the inverter only switches over if the deviation of
the controlled setpoint-actual value pair is more than two percent lower than the deviation
of the uncontrolled value pair.
● Two setpoint/actual value pairs as minimum value control (heating)
The minimum value control compares two setpoints/actual value pairs and controls the
actual value, which has the highest deviation downwards from its associated setpoint. No
control takes place if both actual values lie above their setpoints.
In order to avoid frequent changeover, the inverter only switches over if the deviation of
the controlled setpoint-actual value pair is more than two percent lower than the deviation
of the uncontrolled value pair.
Day and night switching

Using a day/night changeover other setpoints can be entered for specific times. The
day/night changeover control can be realized e.g. using an external signal via DI4 or using
free blocks and the real time clock via p31025.
Note
When the multi-zone control is activated, the analog inputs are newly interconnected as
sources for the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller (see table).
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Table 7- 36 Parameters to set the multi-zone control:
p2200 = … Technology controller enable
p2251 Set technology controller as main setpoint
P31020 = … Multi-zone control interconnection
(factory setting = 0)
A subsequent parameterization is performed by activating or deactivating the multi-
zone control.
Subsequent connection for p31020 = 1 (activate multi- Subsequent connection
zone control) for p31020 = 0
(deactivate multi-zone
control)
p31023[0] = 0755.0 (AI0) p31023[0] = 0
p31023[2] = 0755.1 (AI1) p31023[2] = 0
p31026[0] = 0755.2 (AI2) p31026[0] = 0
p31026[1] = 0755.3 (AI3) p31026[1] = 0
p2253 = 31024 (setpoint output, technology controller) p2253 = 0
p2264 = 31027 (actual value output, technology p2264 = 0
controller)
P31021 = … Configuration of multi-zone control
 0 = Setpoint 1 / several actual values
 1 = Two zones / maximum value setting
 2 = Two zones / minimum value setting (factory setting)
p31022 = … Processing of actual values for multi-zone control(only for p31021 = 0)
Possible values: 0 … 11 (factory setting = 0)
p31023[0 … 3] Setpoints for multi-zone control
=… Parameters for selecting the source for setpoints in multi-zone control (factory
setting = 0)
r31024 = … Multi-zone control setpoint output for technology controller
CO parameters
p31025 = … Day/night changeover for multi-zone control
Parameter for selecting the source for day/night changeover of the multi-zone
control (factory setting = 0)
p31026[0 … 2] Actual values for multi-zone control
=… Parameters for selecting the source for actual values of the multi-zone control
(factory setting = 0)
r31027 = … Multi-zone control actual value output for technology controller
CO parameters
Note
Please note that when multi-zone control is activated, any BiCo interconnections present for
analog inputs and for the technology controller's setpoint and actual value are cancelled and
interconnected with the links defined in the factory.
When you deactivate multi-zone control, the associated BiCo interconnections are cancelled.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Example
The temperature in a large office is measured at three points and transferred to the inverter
using analog inputs. NI1000 temperature sensors are used as actual value sensors. The
setpoint temperature is specified via the analog input 0 and can be set in the range from 8 °C
… 30 °C by a controller. Overnight the average temperature should be 16 °C.
Parameter settings
p2200.0 = 1 Technology controller enable

p2251 = 0 Set technology controller as main setpoint
p2900.0 = 16 Temperature setpoint overnight as a fixed value in %.
p31020 = 1 Activate multi-zone control
p31021 = 0 Select multi-zone control with one setpoint and three actual
values
p31022 = 7 Three actual values, one setpoint. The average value of the
three actual values is used for the control.
p31023.0 = 755.0 Temperature setpoint via analog input 0
p0756.0 = 0 Select analog input type (voltage input 0 … 10 V)
p0757.0 = 0 / p0758.0 = 8 Set the lower value to 8 °C (0 V ≙ 8 °C)
p0759.0 = 10 / p0760.0 = 30 Set the upper value to 30 °C (10 V ≙ 30 °C)
p31023.1 = 2900.0 Supply p31023.1 with the value written in P2900 to reduce
the temperature overnight
p31026.0 = 755.2 Temperature actual value 1 via analog input 2 as a %
p0756.2 = 6 Select analog input type (temperature sensor Ni1000)
p0757.2 = 0 / p0758.2 = 0 Set lower value of the scaling characteristic
p0759.2 = 100 / p0760.2 = Set upper value of the scaling characteristic
100
p31026.1 = 755.3 Temperature actual value 2 via analog input 3 as a %
p0756.3 = 6 Select analog input type (temperature sensor Ni1000)
p0757.3 = 0 / p0758.3 = 0 Set lower value of the scaling characteristic
p0759.3 = 100 / p0760.3 = Set upper value of the scaling characteristic
100
p31026.2 = 755.1 Temperature actual value 3 via temperature sensor with
current output (0 mA … 20 mA) via analog input 1
p0756.1 = 2 Select analog input type (current input 0 … 20 mA)
p0757.1 = 0 / p0758.1 = 0 Set lower value of the scaling characteristic (0 mA ≙ 0 °C)
p0759.1 = 20 / p0760.1 = Set upper value of the scaling characteristic (20 mA ≙ 100
100 %)
p31025 = 722.4 Changeover from day to night via digital input 4
You will find more information about this multi-zone control in the parameter list and in
(function diagram 7972 of the List Manual).
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
7.10.6 Motor staging and autochange
Description
The motor staging function is used in applications which require between one and four
motors to be run at the same time depending on load, so that e.g. highly variable pressure
ratios or flow volumes can be corrected.
The system consists of the speed-controlled main drive and up to three other drives which
are activated/deactivated via contactors or motor starters, either in a fixed arrangement, or
dependent on the operating hours (autochange).
The PID deviation serves as the input signal for activating the other motors. The contactors
or motor starters are switched by the inverter's digital outputs.
Note
Technology controller as main setpoint
For the function "Motorstaging and Autochange", the technology controller must be activated
(p2200 = 1) and set as the main setpoint (p2251 = 0).
Operating principle
● Switching-in external motors
If the main drive is run at maximum speed and the deviation on the technology controller
input continues to increase, the control also switches the external motors on the line. At
the same time the main drive is reduced to the staging speed (see p2378) using ramp
down to keep the total output power as constant as possible. The technology controller is
deactivated while ramping down to the staging speed.
● Shutting down external motors
If the main drive is running at minimum speed and the deviation on the technology
controller input continues to decrease, the control switches external motors M1 to M3 off
the line. At the same time, the main drive is accelerated up to the staging speed (see
p2378) using ramp up to maintain the total output power as constant as possible.
To avoid frequent activation/deactivation of the uncontrolled motors, a time can be specified
in p2377 which must have elapsed before a further motor can be activated/deactivated. After
the time set in p2377 has elapsed, a further motor will be activated immediately if the PID
deviation is greater than the value set in p2376. If, after p2377 has elapsed, the PID
deviation is smaller than p2376 but greater than p2373, the timer p2374 is started before the
uncontrolled motor is activated.
The motors are deactivated in the same way.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
I
S
S $FWXDO
S VSHHG
S
t
˂3,'>@ 3,' W\ S W[ S
GHYLDWLRQ
S
S
t
S
S
S
S
UQ

t
UQQ S S S
Q 0RWRU
Q 0RWRU W\ S S W[ S S
Q 0RWRU
The diagram shows the conditions for activating/deactivating an uncontrolled motor
Controlling the activation and deactivation of motors

Use p2371 to determine the order of activation/deactivation for the individual external
motors.
Table 7- 37 Order of activation for external motors depending on setting in p2371
p2371 Significance Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6

0 Staging deactivated ---
1 One motor can be activated M1
2 Two motors can be activated M1 M1+M2
3 Two motors can be activated M1 M2 M1+M2
4 Three motors can be activated M1 M1+M2 M1+M2+M3
5 Three motors can be activated M1 M3 M1+M3 M1+M2+M3
6 Three motors can be activated M1 M2 M1+M2 M2+M3 M1+M2+M3
7 Three motors can be activated M1 M1+M2 M3 M1+M3 M1+M2+M3
8 Three motors can be activated M1 M2 M3 M1+M3 M2+M3 M1+M2+M3
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Table 7- 38 Order of deactivation for external motors depending on setting in p2371
p2371 Activated motors Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6

1 M1 M1
2 M1+M2 M1+M2 M1
3 M1+M2 M1+M2 M2 M1
4 M1+M2+M3 M1+M2+M3 M1+M2 M1
5 M1+M2+M3 M1+M2+M3 M3+M1 M3 M1
6 M1+M2+M3 M1+M2+M3 M3+M2 M2+M1 M2 M1
7 M1+M2+M3 M1+M2+M3 M3+M1 M3 M2+M1 M1
8 M1+M2+M3 M1+M2+M3 M3+M2 M3+M1 M3 M2 M1
If you are using motors of the same power rating, you can use p2372 to define whether the
motors are to be activated/deactivated following the setting specified in p2371 (p2372 = 0) or
based on the operating hours (p2372 = 1, 2 ,3. Details see parameter list).
Parameters for setting and activating the motor staging function:
Table 7- 39 Parameters for setting and activating the motor staging function
p0730 = r2379.0 Signal source for digital output 0

Control external motor 1 via DO 0
p2200 = 1 Technology controller enable
Activate technology controller
p2251 = 0 Technology controller mode
Technology controller as main speed setpoint
p2370 Staging enable
Signal source for staging On/Off
p2371 Staging configuration
Activate staging and define order of activation
p2372 AutoChange staging mode
Define automatic motor activation
p2373 Staging switch-on threshold
Define switch-on threshold
p2374 Staging delay time
Define delay time
p2375 Destaging delay time
Define delay time for destaging
p2376 Staging override threshold
Define override threshold
p2377 Staging interlock time
Define interlock time
p2378 Staging / destaging speed
Define staging / destaging speed
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
r2379 Staging status word
p2380 Staging operating hours

p2381 Staging time limit for continuous operation
p2382 Staging absolute operating time limit
p2383 Staging stop mode
Define deactivation order for OFF command
p2384 Staging motor ON delay
Define motor ON delay
p2385 Staging speed holding time
Define speed holding time after activation of an external motor
p2386 Staging motor OFF delay
Define motor OFF delay
p2387 Destaging speed holding time
Define speed holding time after shutdown of an external motor
For more information about the parameters, see the List Manual.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
7.10.7 Bypass
Description
In the bypass function, the motor is either /LQHVXSSO\

operated by the inverter or directly on the
line.
The bypass control can either be realized
depending on the speed via the inverter or
independently of the speed via a signal from *
the inverter or via a higher-level control. &83
If the bypass is controlled by a higher-level
control, the control must lock the contactors
so they cannot switch on at the same time.
If controlled by inverter, the digital outputs
are used to activate two contactors via which . .
the motor is powered. The inverter is

provided with contactor position feedback
via the digital inputs. This is evaluated. If
using direct connection logic (high level = 0
ON), both contactors should be NO ฏ
contacts.
&RQWUROYLDGLJLWDORXWSXWV'2
)HHGEDFNYLDGLJLWDOLQSXWV',
. &RQWDFWRUIRULQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
. &RQWDFWRUIRUE\SDVVRSHUDWLRQ
Bypass circuit for control using the inverter
Note
Flying restart must be activated for the bypass function (p1200 = 1 or 4).
NOTICE
Bypass operation in the essential service mode
The special features for bypass operation in the essential service mode are described in
Section Emergency operation (Page 244).
Changeover operation between line and inverter operation

At changeover to line operation, contactor K1 is opened (after the inverter pulses have been
inhibited). The system then waits for the motor de-excitation time to elapse, after which
contactor K2 is closed, connecting the motor directly to the line supply.
When the motor is switched to the line supply, an equalizing current flows that must be taken
into account when the protective equipment is selected and dimensioned.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
When changing over to inverter operation, initially contactor K2 must be opened and after
the de-excitation time, contactor K1 is closed. The inverter then captures the rotating motor
and the motor is operated on the inverter.
Bypass function when activating via a control signal (p1267.0 = 1)

The status of the bypass contactors is evaluated when the inverter is switched on. If the
automatic restart function is active (p1210 = 4) and an ON command (r0054.0 = 1) as well as
the bypass signal (p1266 = 1) are still present at power up, then after power up, the inverter
goes into the "ready and bypass" state (r899.0 = 1 and r0046.25 = 1) and the motor
continues to run directly connected to the line supply.
,QYHUWHU 6ZLWFKRYHU /LQH 6ZLWFKRYHU ,QYHUWHU

RSHUDWLRQ SKDVH RSHUDWLRQ SKDVH RSHUDWLRQ
5DWHGPRWRUVSHHG 3RZHUXS
)O\LQJ
UHVWDUW
$FWXDOVSHHGIURPWKHLQYHUWHU
S
S %\SDVVFRPPDQG
W
U 6LJQDOIRUFRQWDFWRU.
,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
W
S>@)HHGEDFNIURP.
,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
W
S>@ 0RQLWRULQJWLPH.
,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ W
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ
W
S>@ )HHGEDFNIURP.
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ W
S>@ 0RQLWRULQJWLPH.
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ W
S S S S S S
S S
S S
Figure 7-16 Bypass control independent of the speed via a control signal (p1267.0 = 1)
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Bypass function is dependent on the speed (p1267.1 = 1)

With this function, changeover to line operation is realized corresponding to the following
diagram, if the setpoint lies above the bypass threshold.
If the setpoint falls below the bypass threshold, the inverter captures the motor and the motor
is fed from the inverter.
%\SDVVVSHHG ,QYHUWHU 6ZLWFKR ,QYHUWHU %\SDVVVSHHG

WKUHVKROG RSHUDWLRQ YHUSKDVH RSHUDWLRQ WKUHVKROGLV
UHDFKHG IDOOHQEHORZ
5DWHGPRWRUVSHHG 6ZLWFKRYHU
U 5DPSIXQFWLRQ /LQH
JHQHUDWRUVHWSRLQW RSHUDWLRQ
S %\SDVVWKUHVKROG
,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
W
S>@)HHGEDFNIURP.
,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
W
S>@ 0RQLWRULQJWLPH.
,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ W
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ W
S>@ )HHGEDFNIURP.
W
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ
S>@ 0RQLWRULQJWLPH. W
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ S S S S S S
S S
S S
Figure 7-17 Switchover behavior from inverter to line operation dependent on the speed
General properties of the bypass function

● The two motor contactors must be designed for switching under load.
● Contactor K2 must be designed for switching an inductive load.
● Contactors K1 and K2 must be mutually interlocked so that they cannot close at the same
time.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Shutdown behavior in bypass operation

● If the motor is in the bypass mode, it cannot be shutdown with OFF 1. The motor coasts
down after an OFF2 or OFF3.
● If the motor is running in the bypass mode and the inverter is disconnected from the line
supply, then also the bypass contactor does not receive control signals from the inverter
and the motor coasts down. If the motor is to continue running once the inverter is
switched off, the signal for the bypass contactor must therefore come from the higher-
level control.
Temperature monitoring and overload protection in the bypass mode

● If the motor is running in the bypass mode, while the inverter is in the "ready and bypass"
state (r899.0 = 1 and r0046.25 = 1), then the motor temperature monitoring via the
temperature sensor is active.
● If the motor is running in the bypass mode, while the inverter is in the "ready and bypass"
state (r899.0 = 1 and r0046.25 = 1), then the overload protection for the motor must be
realized on the plant or system side.
Parameters for setting the bypass function
p1260 Bypass configuration
Activating the bypass function
r1261 Bypass control/status word
Control and feedback signals for the bypass function.
p1262 Bypass dead time
Changeover time for contactors. This should be longer than the motor's
demagnetizing time!
p1263 Debypass delay time
Delay time for switching back to inverter operation.
p1264 Bypass delay time
Delay time for switching to bypass operation.
p1265 Bypass speed threshold
Speed threshold for switching to bypass operation.
p1266 Bypass control command
Signal source for switching to bypass operation.
p1267 Bypass changeover source configuration
Switch to bypass operation using speed threshold or control signal.
p1269 Bypass switch feedback
Signal source for contactor feedback for the bypass mode.
p1274 Bypass switch monitoring time
Monitoring time setting for bypass contactors.
For more details about parameters, please refer to the List Manual.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
7.10.8 Hibernation
Description - operation
The "Hibernation" function is mainly used for pumps and fans. Typical applications include
pressure and temperature controls.
In the hibernation mode, the inverter stops and starts the motor depending on the system
conditions. Hibernation can be activated via the technology controller (without external
commands via terminals or bus interface) and via an external setpoint input.
Hibernation mode offers the advantages of energy saving, lowering mechanical wear and
reduced noise.
Note
Restrictions in entering a setpoint in the hibernation mode
In the hibernation state, the impulses are inhibited and it is not possible to enter a setpoint
via the MOP as the MOP signal cannot withdrawn the pulse inhibit.
This is the reason that the "hibernation" function is therefore not suitable for setpoint input
via the MOP.
NOTICE
After the inverter has been powered up, the motor goes into the hibernation mode if the
hibernation start speed has still not been reached after the highest value from p1120 (ramp-
up time), p2391 (hibernation delay time) and 20 s have expired.
Operating principle
Hibernation mode starts as soon as the motor speed drops below the hibernation start
speed. However, the motor is only switched off after an adjustable time has expired. If,
during this time, the speed setpoint rises above the hibernation start speed due to pressure
or temperature changes, hibernation is exited and the inverter functions in normal operation.
In the hibernation mode, the motor is shut down; however, the speed setpoint and/or the
technology controller deviation are monitored.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
● For an external setpoint input (without technology controller) the speed setpoint is
monitored and the motor is switched-on again as soon as the setpoint increases above
the restart speed. The restart speed is calculated as follows: Restart
speed = P1080 + p2390 + p2393.
In the factory setting, the positive speed setpoint is monitored, i.e. the motor is switched
on as soon as the setpoint exceeds the restart speed.
If the negative speed setpoint is also to be monitored, the value of the setpoint must be
monitored. This can be set using p1110 = 0.
Additional setting options are described in the parameter list, in function diagrams 3030
and 3040 as well as in the associated parameter descriptions.
● When the setpoint is entered from the technology controller, the technology controller
deviation (r2273) is monitoredand the motor is switched-on if the deviation of the
technology controller exceeds the hibernation restart value (2392).
In the factory setting, only the positive deviation of the technology controller is monitored,
i.e. the motor is switched on as soon as the technology controller deviation is greater than
the hibernation restart value (p2392).
If the motor should also switch back on for negative technology controller deviation, the
value of the deviation must be monitored.
In this case p2298 = 2292 must be set. The percentage value for the minimum limit can
be specified in p2292.
Additional setting options are provided in the parameter list in function diagram 7958 and
in the associated parameter descriptions.
In order to prevent frequent startups and shutdowns, the speed may be boosted for a short
time before shutdown (hibernation boost). This function can be disabled by setting the time
for the hibernation boost (p2394) to 0.
To avoid tank deposits, particularly where liquids are present, it is possible to exit hibernation
mode after an adjustable time (p2396) has expired and to switch to normal operation.
The parameter settings required for the respective variant can be found in the following
tables.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Hibernation with setpoint input using the internal technology controller

In this operating mode, the technology controller must be activated as the setpoint source
(p2200) and used as the main setpoint (p2251). The function can be operated both with and
without the hibernation boost.
% Setpoint technology
controller, r2262 Technology controller
actual value, r2272
5HVWDUWYDOXHS
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU W
deviation, r2273
1HJDWLYHUHVWDUWYDOXH
S
n
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
setpoint DVPDLQVHWSRLQW
+LEHUQDWLRQERRVWVSHHG
S
2XWSXWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQUHVWDUW
VSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQ
VWDUWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQ
2IIVHWS
0LQLPXPVSHHG
S
W
S S W[ W\
1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ +LEHUQDWLRQPRGHDFWLYH 1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ
+LEHUQDWLRQUHVWDUWVSHHG SS

W[ SS S
+LEHUQDWLRQVWDUWVSHHG SS W\ +LEHUQDWLRQUHVWDUWVSHHGS S
Figure 7-18 Hibernation using the technology setpoint as the main setpoint with the hibernation boost
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Hibernation with external setpoint input

In this operating mode, the setpoint is specified by an external source (e.g. a temperature
sensor); the technology setpoint can be used here as a supplementary setpoint.
$FWXDOSUHVVXUH
p
6HWSRLQWSUHVVXUH
+LEHUQDWLRQERRVW
VSHHGS
2XWSXWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQUHVWDUW
VSHHG 6SHHG
5HVWDUWRIIVHW VHWSRLQW
S
+LEHUQDWLRQ
VWDUWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQ
2IIVHWS
0LQLPXPVSHHG
S
t
S S W[ W\
+LEHUQDWLRQUHVWDUWVSHHG SS
S W[ SS S
Figure 7-19 Hibernation using an external setpoint with hibernation boost
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
6HWSRLQWSUHVVXUH
p
6HWSRLQW
SUHVVXUH
$FWXDOSUHVVXUH
2XWSXWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQUHVWDUW 6SHHG
VSHHG VHWSRLQW
5HVWDUWRIIVHW
S
+LEHUQDWLRQ
VWDUWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQ
2IIVHWS
0LQLPXPVSHHG
S
t
S W[ W\
+LEHUQDWLRQUHVWDUWVSHHG S
S S W[ SS S
Figure 7-20 Hibernation using an external setpoint without hibernation boost
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Adjustable parameters for the hibernation mode function
Table 7- 40 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Via tech. Via external

setpoint setpoint
P1080 = … Minimum speed x x
0 (factory setting) … 19500 rpm. Lower limit of the motor speed is
independent of the speed setpoint.
P1110 = … Block negative direction - x
Parameter to block the negative direction
P2200 = … Technology controller enable x -
0: Technology controller deactivated (factory setting),
1: Technology controller activated
P2251 = 1 Technology controller mode x -
0: Technology controller as main setpoint (factory setting),
1: Technology controller as supplementary setpoint
p2298 = … Technology controller minimum limiting x -
Parameter for the minimum limiting of the technology controller
P2398 = … Hibernation mode x x
0: Hibernation disabled (factory setting)
1: Hibernation enabled
P2390 = … Hibernation start speed x x
0 (factory setting) … 21000 rpm. As soon as this speed is fallen below, the
hibernation delay time starts and switches-off the motor once it expires. The
hibernation start speed is calculated as follows:
Start speed = P1080 + p2390
P1080 = minimum speed
p2390 = hibernation start speed.
P2391 = … Hibernation delay time x x
0 ... 3599 s (factory setting 120). The hibernation delay time starts as soon as
the output frequency of the inverter drops below the hibernation start speed
p2390. If the output frequency increases above this threshold during the delay
time, the hibernation delay time is interrupted. Otherwise, the motor is
switched off after the delay time has expired (if necessary, after a short boost).
P2392 = … Hibernation restart value (in %) x -
required if the technology controller is used as the main setpoint.
As soon as the technology controller deviation (r2273) exceeds the
hibernation restart value, the inverter switches to normal operation and the
motor starts up with a setpoint of 1.05 * (p1080 + p2390). As soon as this
value is reached, the motor continues to operate with the setpoint of the
technology controller (r2260).
P2393 = … Hibernation restart speed (rpm), - x
required in the case of external setpoint input. The motor starts as soon as the
setpoint exceeds the restart speed. The restart speed is calculated as follows:
Restart speed = P1080 + p2390 + p2393
P1080 = minimum speed
p2390 = hibernation start speed
p2393 = hibernation restart speed
P2394 = … Hibernation boost duration x x
0 (factory setting) … 3599 s. Before the inverter switches over to hibernation
mode, the motor is accelerated for the time set in p2394 according to the
acceleration ramp, but not to more than the speed set in P2395.
Functions
7.10 HVAC functions
Parameter Description Via tech. Via external

setpoint setpoint
P2395 = … Hibernation boost speed x x
0 (factory setting) … 21000 rpm. Before the inverter switches over to
hibernation mode, the motor is accelerated for the time set in p2394 according
to the acceleration ramp, but not to more than the speed set in P2395.
Caution:
Make sure that the hibernation boost does not cause any overpressure or
overflows.
P2396 = … Maximum hibernation shutdown time x x
0 (factory setting) … 863999 s. At the expiration of this time at the latest, the
inverter switches to normal operation and is accelerated up to the start speed
(P1080 + P2390). If the inverter is switched to normal operation in advance,
the shutdown time is reset to the value set in this parameter.
With p2396 = 0, automatic changeover to normal operation after a certain time
is deactivated.
Display parameters
r2273 Display of the setpoint/actual value deviation of the technology controller
r2397 Actual hibernation output speed
Actual boost speed before the pulses are inhibited or the actual start speed after restart.
r2399 Hibernation status word
00 Hibernation enabled (P2398 <> 0)
01 Hibernation active
02 Hibernation delay time active
03 Hibernation boost active
04 Hibernation motor switched off
05 Hibernation motor switched off, cyclical restart active
06 Hibernation motor restarted
07 Hibernation supplies the total setpoint of the ramp-function generator
08 Hibernation bridges the ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel
Functions
7.11 Switchover between different settings
7.11.1 Changing over the command data sets (manual, automatic)
Switching over master control

In some applications, the inverter is operated from different locations.
Example: Switchover from the automatic mode into the manual mode
A central control can switch a motor on/off or change its speed either via a fieldbus or via
local switches. A key-operated switch close to the motor can be used to switch the master
control of the inverter from "control via fieldbus" to "local control".
Command data set (CDS)

The inverter offers options to parameterize the settings for the command sources, setpoint
sources and status messages (with the exception of analog outputs) in up to four different
ways. The associated parameters are indexed (index 0, 1, 2 or 3). When the inverter is
operational, control commands select one of the four indices and therefore one of the four
settings that has been saved. This means that as described in the example above, the
master control of the inverter can be switched over.
All of the switchable parameters for command sources, setpoint sources and status
messages with the same index are known as a "command data set".
Functions
3URWHFWLYHIXQFWLRQV
&RPPDQGVRXUFHV
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
+9$& 2SHUDWRU3DQHO
IXQFWLRQV )LHOGEXV
6HWSRLQW
VRXUFHV
$QDORJLQSXWV
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV
0RWSRWHQWLRPHWHU
0RWRU ,QYHUWHUFRQWURO -RJJLQJ
FRQWURO
)LHOGEXV
6WDWXV
PHVVDJHV
'LJLWDORXWSXWV
6HWSRLQWSURFHVVLQJ )LHOGEXV
7HFKQRORJLFDO
IXQFWLRQV
Figure 7-21 CDS switchover in the inverter
Use parameter P0170 to define the number of command data sets (2, 3 or 4).
Table 7- 41 Selecting the number of command data sets
P0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
P0170 Number of command data sets (factory setting: 2)
P0170 = 2, 3 or 4
P0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready
The command data sets are switched over using parameters P0810 and P0811. Parameters
P0810 and P0811 are interlinked to control commands, e.g. the digital inputs of the inverter,
using BICO technology.
Functions
Table 7- 42 Command data set changeover using parameters P0810 and P0811.
Status of binector 0 1 0 1
P0810
Status of binector 0 0 1 1
P0811
The command
data set that is
presently active
has a gray
background. &'6 &'6 &'6 &'6
CDS2 is only CDS3 is only

available when available when
P0170 = 3 or 4 P0170 = 4
Selected 0 1 2 3
parameter index
Examples Fieldbus as Analog input as - -
setpoint source: setpoint source:
The speed The speed
setpoint is setpoint is
specified via the specified via an
fieldbus. analog input
Fieldbus as Digital inputs as - -
command source: command source:
The motor is The motor is
switched on/off via switched on/off via
the fieldbus. digital inputs
Note
Command data sets can be switched over in the "ready for operation" and "operation" state.
The switchover time is approx. 4 ms.
Table 7- 43 Parameters for switching the command data sets
P0810 1st control command for switching the command data sets
Example: When P0810 = 722.0, the system switches from command data set 0 to
command data set 1 via digital input 0.
P0811 2nd control command for switching the command data sets
r0050 Displaying the number of the CDS that is currently active
For an overview of all the parameters that belong to the drive data sets and can be switched,
see the Parameter Manual.
Functions
A copy function is available making it easier to commission more than one command data
set.
Table 7- 44 Parameters for copying the command data sets
P0809[0] Number of the command data set to be copied (source)
P0809[1] Number of the command data set to which the data is to be copied (target)
P0809[2] = 1 Start copying
Once the data has been copied, p0809[2] is automatically set to 0
Example
P0809[0] = 0 The parameters of command data set 0 are copied to command data set 1
P0809[1] = 1
P0809[2] = 1
7.11.2 Switching over drive data sets (different motors connected to an inverter)
When the drive's properties change, the inverter's parameterization must be changed.
Example: Operating different motors on one inverter
One inverter should operate one of two different motors. Depending on which motor is to run
at any given time, the motor data and the ramp-function generator times for the different
motors must be adjusted accordingly in the inverter.
Drive data sets (DDS)

The inverter provides the possibility of parameterizing the following functions in up to four
different ways:
1. Setpoint sources
(exceptions: Analog inputs and fieldbus)
2. Setpoint processing
3. Motor control
4. Motor and inverter protection
5. Technological functions
(Exception: Technology controller, brake control, automatic restart and unassigned
function blocks)
The associated parameters are indexed (index 0, 1, 2 or 3). Control commands select one of
the four indices and therefore one of the four saved settings.
This means, that as described in the example above, you can switch over all of the settings
of the inverter matching the particular motor.
The term "command data set" is used to indicate all of the switchable parameters of the five
functions mentioned above with the same index.
Functions
3URWHFWLYHIXQFWLRQV
2YHUFXUUHQW
2YHUYROWDJH
+9$&
2YHUWHPSHUDWXUH
IXQFWLRQV
6\VWHPSURWHFWLRQ
&RPPDQGVRXUFHV
0RWRUFRQWURO 6HWSRLQW
VRXUFHV
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV
9IFRQWURO
,QYHUWHU 0RWSRWHQWLRPHWHU
9HFWRUFRQWURO -2*VHWSRLQW
FRQWURO
7HFKQRORJLFDO
IXQFWLRQV
6HWSRLQWSURFHVVLQJ
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
/LPLWLQJ
)O\LQJUHVWDUW
'&EUDNLQJ
6WDWXV
PHVVDJHV
Figure 7-22 DDS switchover in the inverter
Use parameter P0180 to define the number of command data sets (2, 3 or 4).
Table 7- 45 Selecting the number of command data sets
P0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
P0180 Number of drive data sets (factory setting: 1)
P0180 = 1, 2, 3 or 4
P0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready
The drive data sets are switched over using parameters P0820 and P0821. Parameters
P0820 and P0821 are interlinked to control commands, e.g. the digital inputs of the inverter,
using BICO technology.
Functions
Table 7- 46 Parameters for switching the drive data sets:
P0820 1st cntrol command for switching the drive data sets
Example: When P0820 = 722.0, the system switches from drive data set 0 to drive
data set 1 via digital input 0
P0821 2nd control command for switching the drive data sets
P0826 Motor switchover, motor number
If the motor is to be switched over at the same time as the data set, different motor
numbers should be used. If this happens, the data set can only be switched over
under pulse inhibit.
r0051 Displaying the number of the DDS that is currently effective
Note
The motor data of the drive data sets can only be changed over in the "ready for operation"
state. The switchover time is approx. 50 ms.
If you do not switch motor data over along with the drive data sets (i.e. same motor number
in P0826), you can switch the drive data sets over during operation.
For an overview of all the parameters that belong to the drive data sets and can be switched,
see the Parameter Manual.
A copy function is available making it easier to commission more than one drive data set.
Table 7- 47 Parameters for copying the drive data sets
P0819[0] Number of the drive data set to be copied (source)
P0819[1] Number of the drive data to which the data is to be copied (target)
P0819[2] = 1 Start copying
Example
P0819[0] = 0 The parameters of drive data set 0 are copied to drive data set 1
P0819[1] = 1
P0819[2] = 1
Service and maintenance 8
8.1 Replacing the inverter components
In the event of a long-term function fault, you can replace the inverter's Power Module or
Control Unit separately. In many cases, you can switch the motor back on again straight
after the replacement.
Service and maintenance
Replacing components without recommissioning the drive

In the scenarios listed below, the inverter can be used straight after components have been
replaced:
Component replacement Remark

Replacing Power Module with a -
&8 30 30 Power Module
 of the same type and
 same power rating
Replacing Power Module with a Power Module and motor

&8 30 30 Power Module must be adapted to one
 of the same type and another (ratio of motor and
Power Module rated power
 greaterpower rating
> 1/8)
)LUP Replacing Control Unit with The settings, which are

ZDUH memory card with a Control Unit saved on the memory card
E:4 S C-V3N97875
s
SINAMICS
MICRO MEMORY CARD
E:4 S C-V3N97875
s
SINAMICS
MICRO MEMORY CARD
 of the same type and of the CU that has been

replaced, are transferred
6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
&8 &8 30  same firmware version

into the new CU
)LUP Replacing Control Unit with

ZDUH E:4 S C-V3N97875
s
SINAMICS
MICRO MEMORY CARD
memory card with a Control Unit
6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
&8
 higher firmware version:
(e.g. replacing a CU with
E:4 S C-V3N97875
s
SINAMICS
MICRO MEMORY CARD
6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
&8 30 FW V4.2 by a CU with FW V4.3)
Replacing components where recommissioning is needed

In the cases below, you will need to reparameterize the inverter when the components have
been replaced:
Component replacement
Replacing Power Module with a Power Module
&8 30 30
 lowerpower rating
Replacing Power Module with a Power Module of a different

&8 30 30 type
(e.g. replacing a PM240 with a PM250)
)LUP
Replacing Control Unit with a Control Unit
ZDUH  of the same type and
&8 30  lower firmware version
(e.g. replacing a CU with FW V4.3 with a CU with FW V4.2)
&8
E:4 S C-V3N97875
s
Replacing Control Unit without a memory card
SINAMICS
MICRO MEMORY CARD
6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0
&8 &8 30
Replacing Control Unit with a Control Unit of a different type

&8 &8 30
(e.g. replacing a CU230P-2 with a CU240E-2 DP)
8.2 Replacing Power Module and Control Unit
WARNING
230 V AC can be connected via the relay outputs DO 0 and DO 2 of the Control Unit. These
terminals can carry 230 V AC independent of the voltage condition of the Power Module.
Therefore please observe appropriate safety measures when working on the inverter.
8.2.1 Replacing the Control Unit

We recommend that you back up the Control Unit parameters externally once
commissioning has been completed. The options are as follows:
1. Back up using the commissioning tool STARTER on your PG/PC.
2. Back up your parameters on a memory card in the inverter.
3. Back up in the Operator Panel.
If you do not back up your parameters, you have to recommission the drive when you
replace the Control Unit.
Procedure for replacing a Control Unit with a memory card

● Disconnect the line voltage of the Power Module and (if installed) the external 24 V
supply or the voltage for the relay outputs DO 0 and DO 2 of the Control Unit.
● Remove the signal cables of the Control Unit.
● Remove the defective CU from the Power Module.
● Plug the new CU on to the Power Module. The new CU must have the same order
number and the same or a higher firmware version as the CU that was replaced.
● Remove the memory card from the old Control Unit and insert it in the new Control Unit.
● Reconnect the signal cables of the Control Unit.
● Connect up the line voltage again.
● The inverter adopts the settings from the memory card, saves them (protected against
power failure) in its internal parameter memory, and switches to "ready to start" state.
● Switch on the motor and check the function of the drive.
Procedure for replacing a Control Unit without a memory card

● Disconnect the line voltage of the Power Module and (if installed) the external 24 V
supply or the voltage for the relay outputs DO 0 and DO 2 of the Control Unit.
● Remove the signal cables of the Control Unit.
● Remove the defective CU from the Power Module.
● Plug the new CU on to the Power Module.
● Reconnect the signal cables of the Control Unit.
● Connect up the line voltage again.
● The inverter goes into the "ready-to-switch-on" state.
● Check whether the new CU has the same order number and the same or a higher
firmware version as the CU that was replaced.
● If yes, and if you have backed-up the parameters of the Control Unit that was replaced,
then proceed as follows:
– Load the parameters into the new CU using STARTER or an Operator Panel.
– Switch on the motor and check the function of the drive.
● In all other cases, you must recommission the inverter.
8.2.2 Replacing the Power Module
Procedure for replacing a Power Module

● Disconnect the Power Module from the line.
● If present, switch off the 24 V supply of the Control Unit.
● After switching off the line voltage, wait 5 minutes until the device has discharged itself.
● Remove the line supply cables of the Power Module.
● Remove the Control Unit from the Power Module.
● Replace the old Power Module with the new Power Module.
● Snap the Control Unit onto the new Power Module.
● Correctly connect the line supply cables to the new Power Module.
● Connect the line supply and, if present, the 24 V supply for the Control Unit.
● If necessary, recommission. (See Replacing the inverter components (Page 273)).
Alarms, faults and system messages 9
9.1 Indicators (LEDs)
The inverter has the following diagnostic types:
● LED
You can obtain an overview of the inverter state locally at the Control Unit LED.
● Alarms and faults
Alarms and faults have a unique number. The inverter displays the numbers on the
Operator Panel and via STARTER - or signals them to a higher-level control.
If the inverter no longer responds

Due to faulty parameter settings, e.g. by loading a defective file from the memory card, the
inverter can adopt the following condition:
● The motor is switched off.
● You cannot communicate with the inverter, either via the Operator Panel or other
interfaces.
In this event proceed as follows:
● Switch-off and switch-on the Control Unit power supply three times.
● If the inverter signals the fault F01018, carry out the corrective actions for this fault shown
in section List of faults (Page 290).
F01018 can only be acknowledged by switching the CU on and off again.
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.2 Operating states indicated on LEDs

The LED RDY (Ready) is temporarily orange after the power supply voltage is switched-on.
As soon as the color of the LED RDY changes to either red or green, the LEDs on the
Control Unit indicate the inverter state.
LED RDY and LED BF displays
V
*5((1RQ
*5((1IODVKLQJVORZO\+]
*5((1IODVKLQJTXLFNO\+]
5('RQ
5('IODVKLQJVORZO\+]
5('IODVKLQJTXLFNO\+]
Table 9- 1 Inverter diagnostics
LED Explanation
RDY BF
GREEN - on --- Ready for operation (no active fault)
GREEN - slow --- Commissioning or reset to factory settings
RED - on OFF Firmware update in progress
RED - slow RED - slow Firmware Update is complete, Power ON Reset
required
RED - fast --- General fault
RED - fast RED - on Fault during firmware update
RED - fast RED - fast Incompatible firmware / incorrect memory card
Table 9- 2 Communication diagnostics via RS485
LED BF Explanation
OFF Receive process data
RED - slow Bus active - no process data
RED - fast No bus activity
Table 9- 3 Communication diagnostics via PROFIBUS DP
LED BF Explanation
off Cyclic data exchange (or PROFIBUS not used, p2030 = 0)
RED - slow Bus fault - configuration fault
RED - fast Bus fault
- no data exchange
- baud rate search
- no connection
LED BF display on the CU230P-2 CAN
V
*5((1RQ
*5((1IODVKLQJTXLFNO\+]
*5((1VLQJOHIODVK
5('RQ
5('VLQJOHIODVK
5('GRXEOHIODVK
Table 9- 4 Communication diagnostics via CANopen
BF LED Explanation
GREEN - on Bus state "Operational"
GREEN - fast Bus state "Pre-Operational" (flashing)
GREEN - single flash Bus state "Stopped"
RED - on No bus
RED - single flash Alarm - limit reached
RED - double flash Error event in control (Error Control Event)
9.3 Alarms
9.3 Alarms
Alarms have the following properties:
● They do not have a direct effect in the inverter and disappear once the cause has been
removed
● They do not need have to be acknowledged
● They are signaled as follows
– Status display via bit 7 in status word 1 (r0052)
– at the Operator Panel with a Axxxxx
– via STARTER, if you click on TAB at the bottom left of the STARTER screen
In order to pinpoint the cause of an alarm, there is a unique alarm code and also a value for
each alarm.
Alarm buffer
For each incoming alarm, the inverter saves the alarm, alarm value and the time that the
alarm was received.
$ODUPFRGH $ODUPYDOXH $ODUPWLPH $ODUPWLPH

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
$ODUP U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@
, )ORDW 'D\V PV 'D\V PV
Figure 9-1 Saving the first alarm in the alarm buffer
r2124 and r2134 contain the alarm value - important for diagnostics - as "fixed point" or
"floating point" number.
The alarm times are displayed in r2145 and r2146 (in complete days) as well as in r2123 and
r2125 (in milliseconds referred to the day of the alarm).
The inverter uses an internal time calculation to save the alarm times. More information on
the internal time calculation can be found in Chapter Real time clock (RTC) (Page 240).
As soon as the alarm has been removed, the inverter writes the associated instant in time
into parameters r2125 and r2146. The alarm remains in the alarm buffer even if the alarm
has been removed.
If an additional alarm is received, then this is also saved. The first alarm is still saved. The
alarms that have occurred are counted in p2111.

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
$ODUP U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
Figure 9-2 Saving the second alarm in the alarm buffer
The alarm buffer can contain up to eight alarms. If an additional alarm is received after the
eighth alarm - and none of the last eight alarms have been removed - then the next to last
alarm is overwritten.
9.3 Alarms

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
$ODUP U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@

$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
/DVWDODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
Figure 9-3 Complete alarm buffer
Emptying the alarm buffer: Alarm history

The alarm history traces up to 56 alarms.
The alarm history only takes alarms that have been removed from the alarm buffer. If the
alarm buffer is completely filled - and an additional alarm occurs - then the inverter shifts all
alarms that have been removed from the alarm buffer into the alarm history. In the alarm
history, alarms are also sorted according to the "alarm time received", however, when
compared to the alarm buffer, in the inverse sequence:
● the youngest alarm is in index 8
● the second youngest alarm is in index 9
● etc.
0RYLQJDODUPVWKDW $ODUPKLVWRU\IRUDODUPV
$ODUPEXIIHU KDYHEHHQ WKDWKDYHEHHQUHPRYHG
HOLPLQDWHGLQWRWKH
>@ DODUPKLVWRU\ >@ PRVWUHFHQWDODUP
>@ >@
>@ >@
>@ >@
>@
>@
>@
>@
>@ 'HOHWLQJWKH
ROGHVWDODUPV
>@
>@
>@
$ODUPEXIIHULVIXOO
Figure 9-4 Shifting alarms that have been removed into the alarm history
The alarms that have still not been removed remain in the alarm buffer and are resorted so
that gaps between the alarms are filled.
If the alarm history is filled up to index 63, each time a new alarm is accepted in the alarm
history, the oldest alarm is deleted.
9.3 Alarms
Parameters of the alarm buffer and the alarm history
Table 9- 5 Important parameters for alarms
r2122 Alarm code
Displays the numbers of alarms that have occurred
r2123 Alarm time received in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the alarm occurred
r2124 Alarm value
Displays additional information about the alarm
r2125 Alarm time removed in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the alarm was removed
p2111 Alarm counter
Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset
When setting p2111 = 0, all of the alarms that have been removed from the alarm
buffer [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63]
r2145 Alarm time received in days
Displays the time in days when the alarm occurred
r2132 Actual alarm code
Displays the code of the alarm that last occurred
r2134 Alarm value for float values
Displays additional information about the alarm that occurred for float values
r2146 Alarm time removed in days
Displays the time in days when the alarm was removed
Extended settings for alarms
Table 9- 6 Extended settings for alarms
You can change up to 20 different alarms into a fault or suppress alarms:
p2118 Setting the message number for the message type
Select the alarms for which the message type should be changed
p2119 Setting the message type
Setting the message type for the selected alarm
1: Fault
2: Alarm
3: No message
You will find details in function block diagram 8075 and in the parameter description of the
List Manual.
9.4 List of warnings
9.4 List of warnings
Table 9- 7 The most important warnings
Number Cause Remedy

A01028 Configuration error Explanation: Parameterization on the memory card has been created with a
different type of module (order number, MLFB)
Check the module parameters and recommission if necessary.
A01590 Motor maintenance interval Carry out maintenance and reset the maintenance interval (p0651).
lapsed
A01900 PROFIBUS: Configuration Explanation: A PROFIBUS master is attempting to establish a connection
telegram faulty with a faulty configuration telegram.
Check the bus configuration on the master and slave side.
A01920 PROFIBUS: Cyclic connection Explanation: The cyclic connection to PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
interrupt Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master
with cyclic operation.
A03520 Temperature sensor fault Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
A05000 Power Module overtemperature Check the following:
A05001 - Is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- Are the load conditions and duty cycle configured accordingly?
- Has the cooling failed?
A07012 I2t Motor Module Check and if necessary reduce the motor load.
overtemperature Check the motor's ambient temperature.
Check thermal time constant p0611.
Check overtemperature fault threshold p0605.
A07015 Motor temperature sensor Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
alarm Check the parameter assignment (p0601).
A07321 Automatic restart active Explanation: The automatic restart (AR) is active. During voltage recovery
and/or when remedying the causes of pending faults, the drive is
automatically switched back on.
A07850 External alarm 1 … 3 The signal for "external alarm 1" has been triggered.
A07851 Parameters p2112, p2116 and p2117 determine the signal sources for the
A07852 external alarm 1… 3.
Remedy: Rectify the cause of this alarm.
A07903 Motor speed deviation Increase p2163 and/or p2166.
Increase the torque, current and power limits.
A07910 Motor overtemperature Check the motor load.
Check the motor's ambient temperature.
Check the KTY84 sensor.
Check the overtemperatures of the thermal model (p0626 ... p0628).
A07927 DC braking active Not required
A07980 Rotary measurement activated Not required
A07981 No enabling for rotary Acknowledge pending faults.
measurement Establish missing enables (see r00002, r0046).
9.5 Faults
Number Cause Remedy

A07991 Motor data identification Switch on the motor and identify the motor data.
activated
A30920 Temperature sensor fault Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
You will find additional information in the List Manual or in the STARTER online help.
9.5 Faults
A fault displays a severe fault during operation of the inverter.
The inverter signals a fault as follows:
● at the Operator Panel with Fxxxxx
● at the Control Unit using the red LED RDY
● in bit 3 of the status word 1 (r0052)
● via STARTER
To delete a fault message, you need to remedy the cause of the fault and acknowledge the
fault.
Every fault has a clear fault code and also a fault value. You need this information to
determine the cause of the fault.
Fault buffer of actual values

For each fault received, the inverter saves the fault code, fault value and the time of the fault.
)DXOWFRGH )DXOWYDOXH )DXOWWLPH )DXOWWLPH

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@
VWIDXOW
, )ORDW 'D\V PV 'D\V PV
Figure 9-5 Saving the first fault in the fault buffer
r0949 and r2133 contain the fault value - important for diagnostics - as "fixed point" or
"floating point" number.
The "fault time received" is in parameter r2130 (in complete days) as well as in parameter
r0948 (in milliseconds referred to the day of the fault). The "fault time removed" is written into
parameters r2109 and r2136 when the fault has been acknowledged.
The inverter uses its internal time calculation to save the fault times. More information on the
internal time calculation can be found in Chapter Real time clock (RTC) (Page 240).
If an additional fault occurs before the first fault has been acknowledged, then this is also
saved. The first alarm remains saved. The fault cases that have occurred are counted in
p0952. A fault case can contain one or several faults.
9.5 Faults

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
VWIDXOW U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@
QGIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
Figure 9-6 Saving the second fault in the fault buffer
The fault buffer can accept up to eight actual faults. The next to last fault is overwritten if an
additional fault occurs after the eighth fault.

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
VWIDXOW U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@

QGIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
UGIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
WKIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
WKIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
WKIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
WKIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
/DVWIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
Figure 9-7 Complete fault buffer
Fault acknowledgement
In most cases, you have the following options to acknowledge a fault:
● Switch the inverter off and then on again
● (switch off the main power supply and the external 24 V supply for the Control Unit and
switch it on again).
● Press the acknowledgement button on the operator panel
● Acknowledgement signal at digital input 2
● Acknowledgement signal in bit 7 of control word 1 (r0054) for Control Units with fieldbus
interface
Faults that are triggered by monitoring of hardware and firmware inside the inverter can only
be acknowledged by switching off and on again. You will find a note about this restricted
option to acknowledge faults in the fault list of the List Manual.
Emptying the fault buffer: Fault history

The fault history can contain up to 56 faults.
The fault acknowledgement has no effect as long as none of the fault causes of the fault
buffer have been removed. If at least one of the faults in the fault buffer has been removed
(the cause of the fault has been removed) and you acknowledge the faults, then the
following happens:
1. The inverter accepts all faults from the fault buffer in the first eight memory locations of
the fault history (indices 8 ... 15).
9.5 Faults
2. The inverter deletes the faults that have been removed from the fault buffer.
3. The inverter writes the time of acknowledgement of the faults that have been removed
into parameters r2136 and r2109 (fault time removed).
6KLIWRUFRS\ )DXOWKLVWRU\
IDXOWVLQWRWKH
1HZHVWIDXOWV 2OGHVWIDXOWV
)DXOWEXIIHU IDXOWKLVWRU\
>@ >@ >@ >@ 'HOHWH

ROGHVWIDXOWV
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
$FNQRZOHGJH
IDXOW
Figure 9-8 Fault history after acknowledging the faults
After acknowledgement, the faults that have not been removed are located in the fault buffer
as well as in the fault history. For these faults, the "fault time coming" remains unchanged
and the "fault time removed" remains empty.
If less than eight faults were shifted or copied into the fault history, the memory locations with
the higher indices remain empty.
The inverters shifts the values previously saved in the fault history each by eight indices.
Faults, which were saved in indices 56 … 63 before the acknowledgement, are deleted.
Deleting the fault history

If you wish to delete all faults from the fault history, set parameter p0952 to zero.
Parameters of the fault buffer and the fault history
Table 9- 8 Important parameters for faults
r0945 Fault code
Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred
r0948 Fault time received in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the fault occurred
r0949 Fault value
Displays additional information about the fault
p0952 Fault cases, counter
Number of fault cases that have occurred since the last acknowledgement
The fault buffer is deleted with p0952 = 0.
9.5 Faults
r2109 Fault time removed in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the fault occurred
r2130 Fault time received in days
Displays the time in days when the fault occurred
r2131 Actual fault code
Displays the code of the oldest fault that is still active
r2133 Fault value for float values
Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values
r2136 Fault time removed in days
Displays the time in days when the fault was removed
The motor cannot be switched-on

If the motor cannot be switched-on, then check the following:
● Is a fault present?
If yes, then remove the fault cause and acknowledge the fault
● Does p0010 = 0?
If not, the inverter is e.g. still in a commissioning state.
● Is the inverter reporting the "ready to start" status (r0052.0 = 1)?
● Is the inverter missing enabling (r0046)?
● Are the command and setpoint sources for the inverter (p0700 and p1000) correctly
parameterized?
In other words, where is the inverter getting its speed setpoint and commands from
(fieldbus or analog input)?
● Do the motor and inverter match?
Compare the data on the motor's nameplate with the corresponding parameters in the
inverter (P0300 ff).
Extended settings for faults
You can change the fault response of the motor for up to 20 different fault codes:
p2100 Setting the fault number for fault response
Selecting the faults for which the fault response should be changed
p2101 Setting, fault response
Setting the fault response for the selected fault
You can change the acknowledgement type for up to 20 different fault codes:
p2126 Setting the fault number for the acknowledgement mode
Selecting the faults for which the acknowledgement type should be changed
9.6 List of faults
p2127 Setting, acknowledgement mode
Setting the acknowledgement type for the selected fault
1: Can only be acknowledged using POWER ON
2: IMMEDIATE acknowledgment after removing the fault cause
You can change up to 20 different faults into an alarm or suppress faults:

p2118 Setting the message number for the message type
Selecting the message for which the message type should be selected
p2119 Setting the message type
Setting the message type for the selected fault
1: Fault
2: Alarm
3: No message
You will find details in function diagram 8075 and in the parameter description of the List
Manual.
9.6 List of faults
Table 9- 10 The most important faults
Number Cause Remedy

F01910 Fieldbus SS setpoint timeout Check the bus connection and communication partner, e.g. switch the
PROFIBUS master to the RUN status.
F03505 Analog input, wire break Check the connection to the signal source for interrupts.
Check the level of the signal supplied.
The input current measured by the analog input can be read out in r0752.
F07011 Motor overtemperature Reduce the motor load.
Check ambient temperature.
Check sensor's wiring and connection.
F07016 Motor temperature sensor fault Make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
Check the parameterization (P0601).
Deactivate the temperature sensor fault (P0607 = 0).
F07320 Automatic restart aborted Increase number of hot restart attempts (P1211). The current number of
start attempts is shown in r1214.
Increase wait time in P1212 and/or monitoring time in P1213.
Create ON command (P0840).
Increase monitoring time of power unit or switch off (P0857).
Reduce the wait time for resetting the fault counter P1213[1] such that
fewer faults are registered in the time interval.
F07330 Search current measured too low Increase search current (P1202), check motor connection.
9.6 List of faults
Number Cause Remedy

F07801 Motor overcurrent Check current limits (P0640).
Vector control: Check current controller (P1715, P1717).
V/f control: Check current limiting controller (P1340 … P1346).
Increase acceleration ramp (P1120) or reduce load.
Check motor and motor cables for short circuit and ground fault.
Check motor for star-delta connection and rating plate parameterization.
Check power unit / motor combination.
Select flying restart function (P1200) if switched to rotating motor.
F07806 Regenerative power limit exceeded Increase deceleration ramp.
Reduce driving load.
Use power unit with greater energy recovery capability.
During vector control, the regenerative power limit in P1531 can be
reduced until the fault is no longer activated.
F07860 External fault 1 … 3 Remove the external causes for this fault.
F07861
F07862
F07900 Motor blocked Check that the motor can run freely.
Check the torque limits (r1538 and r1539).
Check the parameters of the "Motor blocked" message (P2175, P2177).
F07901 Motor overspeed Activate precontrol of speed limiting controller (P1401 bit 7 = 1).
Increase hysteresis for overspeed message P2162.
F07902 Motor stalled Check whether the motor data has been parameterized correctly and
perform motor identification.
Check the current limits (P0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too
low, the drive cannot be magnetized.
Check whether motor cables are disconnected during operation.
F30001 Overcurrent Check the following:
 Motor data, if required, carry out commissioning
 Motor's connection method (Υ / Δ)
 V/f operation: Assignment of rated currents of motor and Power
Module
 Line quality
 Make sure that the line commutating reactor is connected properly
 Power cable connections
 Power cables for short-circuit or ground fault
 Power cable length
 Line phases
If this doesn't help:
 V/f operation: Increase the acceleration ramp
 Reduce the load
 Replace the power unit
9.6 List of faults
Number Cause Remedy

F30002 DC-link voltage overvoltage Increase the ramp-down time (p1121).
Set the rounding times (P1130, P1136).
Activate the DC-link voltage controller (P1240, P1280).
Check the line voltage (P0210).
Check the line phases.
F30003 DC-link voltage undervoltage Check the line voltage (P0210).
F30004 Inverter overtemperature Check whether the inverter fan is running.
Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Reduce the pulse frequency.
F30005 I2t inverter overload Check the rated currents of the motor and Power Module.
Reduce current limit P0640.
When operating with V/f characteristic: Reduce P1341.
F30011 Line phase failure Check the inverter's input fuses.
Check the motor cables.
F30015 Motor cable phase failure Check the motor cables.
Increase the ramp-up or ramp-down time (P1120).
F30027 Time monitoring for DC link pre- Check the supply voltage on the input terminals.
charging Check the line voltage setting (P0210).
You will find additional information in the List Manual and in the online help of STARTER.
Table 9- 11 Faults which can only be acknowledged by switching off and on again
Number Cause Remedy

F01000 Software fault in CU Replace CU.
F01001 Floating Point Exception Switch CU off and on again.
F01015 Software fault in CU Upgrade firmware or contact hotline.
F01018 Power-up aborted more than once After this fault has been output, the module is booted based on factory
settings.
Remedy: Back up factory setting with p0971=1. Switch CU off and on
again. Recommission the inverter.
F01040 Parameters must be saved Save parameters (P0971).
Switch CU off and on again.
F01044 Loading of memory data card Replace memory card or CU.
defective
F01105 CU: Insufficient memory Reduce number of data records.
F01205 CU: Time slice overflow Contact the Hotline.
F01250 CU hardware fault Replace CU.
F01512 An attempt has been made to Create scaling or check transfer value.
establish an conversion factor for
scaling which is not present
F01662 CU hardware fault Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware or contact hotline.
F30022 Power Module: Monitoring UCE Check or replace the Power Module.
F30052 Incorrect Power Module data Replace Power Module or upgrade CU firmware.
9.6 List of faults
Number Cause Remedy

F30053 Error in FPGA data Replace the Power Module.
F30662 CU hardware fault Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware or contact hotline.
F30664 CU power up aborted Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware or contact hotline.
F30850 Software fault in Power Module Replace Power Module or contact hotline.
You will find additional information in the List Manual or in the STARTER online help.
9.6 List of faults
Technical data 10
NOTICE
UL-certified fuses must be used
In order that the system is in compliance with UL, UL certified fuses, circuit breakers or self-
protected combination motor controllers must be used.
10.1 Technical data, CU230P-2 Control Unit
Table 10- 1 General technical data of the CU230P-2
Feature Data
Operating voltage Supply from the Power Module or an external 24 V DC supply (20.4 V ... 28.8 V, 1 A) via
control terminals 31 and 32
Open-loop/closed-loop V/f control for motor speeds between 0 rpm and 210000 rpm:
control procedure  Linear V/f control,
 Linear V/f control with FCC,
 Linear V/f control with ECO mode,
 Quadratic V/f control,
 Multipoint V/f control,
 V/f control for applications in the textile industry,
 V/f control with FCC for applications in the textile industry,
 V/f control with independent voltage setpoint,
Vector control for motor speeds between 0 rpm and 14400 rpm:
 Speed control without encoder
 Torque control without encoder
Fixed speeds 16, parameterizable
Skip speeds 4, parameterizable
Digital inputs  6 digital inputs, DI 0 … DI 5, isolated; SIMATIC compatible,
 Low < 5 V, high > 10 V, maximum input voltage 30 V, current consumption 5.5 mA
 Switchable via terminals
– PNP: Bridge terminal 69 with terminal 9
– NPN: Bridge terminal 69 with terminal 28
 Response time: 10 ms without debounce time (p0724)
Technical data
10.1 Technical data, CU230P-2 Control Unit
Feature Data
Analog inputs (differential  AI 0: Switchable (current/voltage), can be configured as additional digital inputs.
inputs, resolution 12 bits) 0 V … 10 V, 0 mA … 20 mA and -10 V … +10 V
 AI 1: Switchable (current/voltage), can be configured as additional digital inputs.
0 V … 10 V and 0 mA … 20 mA
 AI 2: Switchable (current / Ni1000, PT1000)
0/4 mA … 20 mA and NI1000: - 88 °C … 165 °C / PT1000: - 88 °C … 240 °C
 AI 3: (NI1000, PT1000)
NI1000: - 88 °C … 165 °C and PT1000: - 88 °C … 240 °C
 Response times of all AI: 13 ms ± 1 ms without debounce time (p0724)
Digital outputs / relay  DO 0: 30 V DC / max. 5 A with resistive load, 250 V AC / 2 A
outputs  DO 1: 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A with resistive load, protection from incorrect voltage polarity
 DO 2: 30 V DC / max. 5 A with resistive load, 250 V AC / 2 A
 Update time of all DO: 2 ms
Analog outputs AO 0 and AO 1: 0 V … 10 V or 0 mA … 20 mA, update time: 4 ms
Dimensions (WxHxD) 73 mm × 199 mm × 65.5 mm
Weight 0.61 kg
Memory cards MMC (we recommend a card with Order No. 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0).
SD (Secure Digital Memory Card, we recommend the card with Order No.
6ES7954-8LB00-0AA0).
SDHC (SD High Capacity) cannot be used.
Operating temperature 0 °C … 60 °C (operation without inserted operator panel)
0 °C … 50 °C (operation with inserted operator panel)
Observe any possible restrictions imposed by the Power Module
Storage temperature - 40°C … 70 °C
Humidity < 95 % RH, condensation not permissible
Table 10- 2 Data dependent on type of Control Unit
Feature CU230P-2 HVAC CU230P-2 DP 6SL3243- CU230P-2 CAN

6SL3243-0BB30-1HA1 0BB30-1PA1 6SL3243-0BB30-1CA1
RS485 interface for USS protocol x --- ---
RS485 interface for BacNet MS/TP x --- ---
RS485 interface for Modbus RTU x --- ---
PROFIBUS DP interface --- x ---
CANopen interface --- --- x
The control terminals on the Control Unit are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage
(PELV).
Technical data
10.2 Technical data, Power Modules
Permissible overload for SINAMICS G120 Power Modules

There are two different power data specifications for the Power Modules: "Low Overload"
(LO) and "High Overload" (HO), depending on the expected load.
If the power data comprise rated values without any further specifications they always refer
to an overload capability corresponding to Low Overload.
3HUPLVVLEOHRYHUORDG 3HUPLVVLEOHRYHUORDG
IRU/RZ2YHUORDG/2 IRU+LJK2YHUORDG+2

RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDG/2
%DVHORDG+2
W W

2XWSXWUDQJHN:N: 2XWSXWUDQJHN:N:

RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDG/2
%DVHORDG+2
W W

2XWSXWUDQJHN:N: 2XWSXWUDQJHN:N:
Figure 10-1 Duty cycles, "High Overload" and "Low Overload"
Note
The base load (100% power or current) of "Low Overlaod" is greater than the base load of
"High Overload".
To select the Power Module on the basis of duty cycles, we recommend the "SIZER"
engineering software. See section Overview of documentation (Page 13).
Technical data
Definitions
 LO input current 100 % of the permissible input current for a load cycle according
to Low Overload (LO base load input current).
 LO output current 100 % of the permissible output current for a load cycle according
to Low Overload (LO base load output current).
 LO power Power of the device for LO output current.
 HO input current 100 % of the permissible input current for a load cycle according
to High Overload (HO base load input current).
 HO output current 100 % of the permissible output current for a load cycle according
to High Overload (HO base load output current).
 HO power Power of the device for HO output current.
Technical data
10.2.1 Technical data, PM230
General data, PM230 - IP55 / UL Type 12
Feature Version
Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V … 480 V AC ± 10 %
The actual permissible line voltage depends on the installation altitude
Input frequency 47 Hz … 63 Hz
Power factor λ 0.9
Starting current Smaller than the input current
Permissible short-circuit Frame size A ... C: 42 kA
current Frame size D ... F: 65 kA
Pulse frequency (factory 4 kHz
setting) The pulse frequency can be increased up to 16 kHz in 2 kHz steps. A higher pulse
frequency reduces the permissible output current.
Electromagnetic compatibility The devices are suitable for environmental classes C1 and C2 in conformance with
IEC 61800-3. For details, see the Hardware Installation Manual, Appendix A2
Braking methods DC braking
Degree of protection IP55 / UL Type 12
Degree of protection IP54/ UL Type 12 is reached if an IOP is inserted.
Operating temperature
● without power reduction 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
● with power reduction to 60° C (140° F)
Storage temperature -40 °C … +70 °C (-40 °F … 158 °F)
Relative humidity < 95 % RH - condensation not permissible
Contamination Protected from contact with dangerous parts, dust, spray water and water jets
Environmental requirements Protected according to environmental class 3C2 to EN 60721-3-3 against damaging
chemical substances
Shock and vibration Do not allow the inverter to fall and avoid it being subject to hard shocks. Do not install
the inverter in an area where it could be continuously subject to vibration.
Electromagnetic radiation Do not install the inverter close to sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Installation altitude
● without power reduction Up to 1000 m (3300 ft) above sea level
● with power reduction up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details see the Hardware Installation Manual.
Standards UL 1), CE, C-tick
In order that the system is UL-compliant, UL-certified fuses, overload circuit-breakers or
intrinsically safe motor protection devices must be used.
1) UL available soon for frame sizes D … F
Technical data
Performance dependent data, PM230 - IP55 / UL Type 12
Table 10- 3 PM230 frame size A, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number Filter Class A 6SL3223-0DE13-7AA0 6SL3223-0DE15-5AA0 6SL3223-0DE17-5AA0

Filter Class B 6SL3223- 0DE13-7BA0 6SL3223- 0DE15-5BA0 6SL3223- 0DE17-5BA0
Values based on Low Overload
● LO power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
● LO input current 1.3 A 1.8 A 2.3 A
● LO output current 1.3 A 1.7 A 2.2 A
Values based on High Overload
● HO power 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW
● HO input current 0.9 A 1.3 A 1.8 A
● HO output current 0.9 A 1.3 A 1.7 A
General values
● Power loss 0.06 kW 0.06 kW 0.06 kW
● Fuse 10 A 10 A 10 A
● Cooling air requirement 7 l/s 7 l/s 7 l/s
● Cable cross-section for line and
motor connection 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2
● Torque for line and motor and
motor connection 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm
● Weight 4.3 kg 4.3 kg 4.3 kg

Filter Class B 6SL3223-0DE21-1BA0 6SL3223-0DE21-5BA0 6SL3223-0DE22-2BA0

● LO power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW
● HO power 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
General values
● Fuse 10 A 10 A 10 A
● Cable cross-section for line and 1.5 … 2.5 mm2
motor connection 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm
motor connection 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm 4.3 kg
● Weight 4.3 kg 4.3 kg
Technical data
Order number Filter Class A 6SL3223-0DE23-0AA0

Filter Class B 6SL3223-0DE23-0BA0

● LO power 3 kW
● LO input current 8.0 A
● LO output current 7.7 A
● HO power 2.2 kW
● HO input current 6.1 A
● HO output current 5.9 A
General values
● Power loss 0.12 kW
● Fuse 10 A
● Cooling air requirement 7 l/s
motor connection 1.5 … 2.5 mm2
motor connection 0.5 Nm
● Weight 4.3 kg
Table 10- 6 PM230 frame size B, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %


● LO power 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
● LO output current 10.2 A 13.2 A 18 A
● HO power 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW
General values
● Fuse 16 A 20 A 25 A
motor connection 2.5 … 6 mm2 4 … 6 mm2 4 … 6 mm2
Technical data
Table 10- 7 PM230 frame size C, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %


● LO power 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
● LO output current 26 A 32 A 38 A
● HO power 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
● HO output current 18 A 26 A 32 A
General values
● Fuse 35 A 50 A 50 A
motor connection 6 … 16 mm2 10 … 16 mm2 10 … 16 mm2
Table 10- 8 PM230 frame size D, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number Filter Class A 6SL3223-0DE32-2AA0 6SL3223-0DE33-0AA0

Filter Class B 6SL3223-0DE32-2BA0 6SL3223-0DE33-0BA0

● LO power 22 kW 30 kW
● LO input current 42 A 56 A
● LO output current 45 A 60 A
● HO power 18.5 kW 22 kW
● HO input current 36 A 42 A
● HO output current 38 A 45 A
General values
● Power loss 0.52 kW 0.68 kW
● Fuse 63 A 80 A
● Cooling air requirement 39 l/s 39 l/s
motor connection 16 … 35 mm2 16 … 35 mm2
motor connection 6 Nm 6 Nm
Technical data
Table 10- 9 PM230 frame size E, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number Filter Class A 6SL3223-0DE33-7AA0 6SL3223-0DE34-5AA0

Filter Class B 6SL3223-0DE33-7BA0 6SL3223-0DE34-5BA0

● HO power 30 kW 37 kW
General values
● Fuse 100 A 125 A
Table 10- 10 PM230 frame size F, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %


● LO power 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW
● LO input current 102 A 135 A 166 A
● HO power 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW
● HO input current 84 A 102 A 135 A
General values
● Fuse 160 A 200 A 250 A
motor connection 13 Nm 13 Nm 13 Nm
● Weight 70.0 kg 70.0 kg 70.0 kg
Technical data
Note
The given input currents are valid for operation without a line reactor for a line voltage of 400
V with Vk = 1 % referred to the rated power of the inverter. If a line reactor is used, the
specified values are reduced by a few percent.
General data, PM240 - IP20
Feature Version
The actual permissible line voltage depends on the installation altitude.
Power factor λ 0,7 ... 0,85
Starting current Less than the input current
Pulse frequency (factory 4 kHz for 0.37 kW ... 90 kW
setting) 2 kHz for 110 kW ... 250 kW
The pulse frequency can be increased in 2 kHz steps. A higher pulse frequency reduces
the permissible output current.
IEC61800-3. For details, see the Hardware Installation Manual, Appendix A2
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking, dynamic braking with integrated braking chopper
Degree of protection IP20
● without power reduction LO operation of all power 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
ratings 0 °C … +50 °C (32 °F … 122 °F)
HO operation: 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
● with power reduction 0.37 kW ... 110 kW up to 60 °C (140° F), for details, refer to the Hardware
HO operation: 132 kW … 200 Installation Manual
kW
all power ratings, HO/LO
chemical substances
● without power reduction 0.37 kW ... 132 kW up to 1000 m (3300 ft) above sea level
160 kW ... 250 kW up to 2000 m (6500 ft) above sea level
● with power reduction all power ratings up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details refer to the
Hardware Installation Manual.
Standards UL, cUL, CE, C-tick, SEMI F47
Technical data
Power-dependent data, PM240 - IP20
Order number Without filter 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0 6SL3224-0BE15-5UA0 6SL3224-0BE17-5UA0

● LO power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
● HO power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
General values
● Fuse 10 A 10 A 10 A
● Cooling air requirement 4.8 l/s 4.8 l/s 4.8 l/s
motor connection 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2
Order number Without filter 6SL3224-0BE21-1UA0 6SL3224-0BE21-5UA0

● LO power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
● LO input current 3.8 A 4.8 A
● LO output current 3.1 A 4.1 A
● HO power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
● HO input current 3.8 A 4.8 A
● HO output current 3.1 A 4.1 A
General values
● Power loss 0.108 kW 0,114 kW
● Fuse 10 A 10 A
● Cooling air requirement 4.8 l/s 4.8 l/s
motor connection 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2
motor connection 1.1 Nm 1.1 Nm
Technical data
Table 10- 13 PM240 frame size B, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number with filter 6SL3224-0BE22-2AA0 6SL3224-0BE23-0AA0 6SL3224-0BE24-0AA0

without filter 6SL3224-0BE22-2UA0 6SL3224-0BE23-0UA0 6SL3224-0BE24-0UA0
● LO power 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW
General values
● Fuse 16 A 16 A 16 A
motor connection 1.5 … 6 mm2 1.5 … 6 mm2 1.5 … 6 mm2

● HO power 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW
● HO output current 13.2 A 19 A 26 A
General values
● Fuse 20 A 32 A 35 A
Technical data

● HO power 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW
General values
● Fuse 50 A 63 A 80 A
● Weight with filter 16 kg 16 kg 16 kg
● Weight without filter 13 kg 13 kg 13 kg
Order number with filter 6SL3224-0BE33-0AA0 6SL3224-0BE33-7AA0

without filter 6SL3224-0BE33-0UA0 6SL3224-0BE33-7UA0
General values
● Fuse 100 A 125 A
● Weight with filter 23 kg 23 kg
● Weight without filter 16 kg 16 kg
Technical data

General values
● Fuse 160 A 200 A 250 A
● Weight without filter 36 kg 36 kg 36 kg
Order number Without filter 6SL3224-0BE38-8UA0 6SL3224-0BE41-1UA0

General values
● Fuse 250 A 315 A
● Weight 39 kg 39 kg
Technical data
Table 10- 19 PM240 frame size GX, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number Without filter 6SL3224-0BE41-3UA0 6SL3224-0BE41-6UA0 6SL3224-0BE42-0UA0

General values
● Fuse 355 A 400 A 630 A
motor connection 95 ... 240 mm2 120 ... 240 mm2 185 ... 240 mm2
● Weight 176 kg 176 kg 176 kg
Technical data
10.2.3 Technical data, PM240-2
Note
The given input currents are valid for operation without a line reactor for a line voltage of 400
V with Vk = 1 % referred to the rated power of the inverter. If a line reactor is used, the
specified values are reduced by a few percent.
General data, PM240-2
Feature Specification
Modulation depth 93 % (the maximum output voltage is 93 % of the input voltage)
Power factor λ 0.7
Line impedance ≥ 1 % Uk, for higher values, a line reactor must be used.
Pulse frequency (factory 4 kHz
setting) The pulse frequency can be increased up to 16 kHz in 2 kHz steps. A higher pulse
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking, dynamic braking with integrated braking chopper
● without power reduction LO operation 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
HO operation 0 °C … +50 °C (32 °F … 122 °F)
● with power reduction LO/HO up to 60 °C (140° F), for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual
chemical substances
● with power reduction up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details see the Hardware Installation Manual.
Standards UL, CE,, SEMI F47
Technical data
Performance dependent data - PM240-2
Table 10- 20 Frame size A, 3-ph. 380 V … 480 V AC, ± 10 % - Part 1
Order number With filter 6SL3210-1PE11-8AL0 6SL3210-1PE12-3AL0 6SL3210-1PE13-2AL0

Without filter 6SL3210-1PE11-8UL0 6SL3210-1PE12-3UL0 6SL3210-1PE13-2UL0
● LO power 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW
● HO power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.57 kW
● HO input current 2A 2.6 A 3.3 A
General values
● Fuse 3NA3 801 (6 A) 3NA3 801 (6 A) 3NA3 801 (6 A)
motor connection 1.0 … 2.5 mm2 1.0 … 2.5 mm2 1.0 … 2.5 mm2
● Weight filtered 1.5 kg 1.5 kg 1.5 kg
unfiltered 1.4 kg 1.4 kg 1.4 kg
Technical data
Table 10- 21 Frame size A, 3-ph. 380 V … 480 V AC, ± 10 % - Part 2
Order number with filter, IP20 6SL3210-1PE14-3AL0 6SL3210-1PE16-1AL0 ---

without filter, IP20 6SL3210-1PE14-3UL0 6SL3210-1PE16-1UL0 6SL3210-1PE18-0UL0
with filter, PT --- 6SL3211-1PE16-1AL0 __
without filter, PT --- --- 6SL3210-1PE18-0UL0
● LO power 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3 kW
● HO power 1.1 kW 1.5 2.2 kW
General values
● Power loss 0.07 kW 0.1 kW 1) 0.12 kW 2)
● Fuse 3NA3 803 (10 A)5 l/s 3NA3 803 (10 A) 3NA3 805 (16 A)
● Cooling air requirement IP20 --- 5 l/s 5 l/s
PT 7 l/s 7 l/s
● Cable cross-section for line and 1.0 … 2.5 mm2
motor connection 1.5 … 2.5 mm2 1.5 … 2.5 mm2
● Torque for line and motor and 0.5 Nm
motor connection 1.5 kg 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm
● Weight filtered, IP20 1.4 kg 1.5 kg ---
unfiltered, IP20 --- 1.4 kg 1.4 kg
filtered, PT --- 1.8 kg ---
unfiltered, PT --- 1.7 kg
1) for PT devices 0.08 kW above the heat sink;
2) for PT devices 0.1 kW above the heat sink
Technical data
Feature Version
Power factor λ 0.9
Pulse frequency (factory setting) 4 kHz
The pulse frequency can be increased up to 16 kHz in 2 kHz steps. A higher
pulse frequency reduces the permissible output current.
Electromagnetic compatibility The devices are suitable for environmental classes C1 and C2 in conformance
with IEC61800-3. For details, see the Hardware Installation Manual, Appendix
A2
Braking method DC braking, energy recovery (up to 100% of the output power)
● without power reduction LO operation: 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
● with power reduction HO/LO up to 60 °C (140° F), for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual
Environmental requirements Protected according to environmental class 3C2 to EN 60721-3-3 against
damaging chemical substances
Shock and vibration Do not allow the inverter to fall and avoid it being subject to hard shocks. Do
not install the inverter in an area where it could be continuously subject to
vibration.
● with power reduction up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details see the Hardware
Installation Manual.
Standards UL, CE, CE, SEMI F47
In order that the system is UL-compliant, UL-certified fuses, overload circuit-
breakers or intrinsically safe motor protection devices must be used.
Technical data
Order number 6SL3225-0BE25-5AA0 6SL3225-0BE27-5AA0 6SL3225-0BE31-1AA0

Values based on High Overload 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
● HO power 13.2 A 19.0 A 11.0 kW
● HO output current 26.0 A
General values
● Power loss Available soon Available soon Available soon
● Fuse 20 A 32 A 35 A
motor connection 2.5 … 10 mm2 4 … 10 mm2 6 … 10 mm2

● HO power 15.0 kW 18.5 kW 22.0 kW
General values
● Fuse 50 A 63 A 80 A
● Weight 15 kg 15 kg 16 kg
Technical data
Order number 6SL3225-0BE33-0AA0 6SL3225-0BE33-7AA0

● HO power 30.0 kW 37.0 kW
General values
● Power loss 1 kW 1.3 kW
● Fuse 100 A 125 A
motor connection 25 … 35 25 … 35
● Weight 21 kg 21 kg

● HO power 45.0 kW 55.0 kW 75 kW
General values
● Power loss 1.5 kW 2 kW 2.4 kW
● Fuse 160 A 200 A 250 A
● Weight 51.0 kg 51.0 kg 51.0 kg
Technical data
10.2.5 Technical data, PM250-2
General data, PM250-2
Feature Specification
Power factor λ 0.95
Line impedance ≤ 1 % Uk
Pulse frequency (factory setting) 4 kHz
The pulse frequency can be increased up to 16 kHz in 2 kHz steps. A higher pulse
Braking methods DC braking, energy recovery (up to 100% of the output power)
● without power reduction LO operation 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
HO operation 0 °C … +50 °C (32 °F … 122 °F)
● with power reduction LO/HO up to 60° C (140° F), for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual
chemical substances
● with power reduction up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual.
Standards UL, CE, SEMI F47
In order that the system is UL-compliant, UL-certified fuses, overload circuit-breakers
or intrinsically safe motor protection devices must be used.
Technical data
Performance dependent data, PM250-2
Table 10- 26 Frame sizes A, 3-ph. 380 V … 480 V AC, ± 10 % - Part 1
Order No. with filter, IP20 6SL3210-1QE11-8AL0 6SL3210-1QE12-3AL0 6SL3210-1QE13-2AL0

without filter, IP20 6SL3210-1QE11-8UL0 6SL3210-1QE12-3UL0 6SL3210-1QE13-2UL0
● LO power 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW
● HO power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
General values
● Fuse 3NA3 801 (6 A) 3NA3 801 (6 A) 3NA3 801 (6 A)
● Torque for line and
● Weight with filter 1.5 kg 1.5 kg 1.5 kg
without filter 1.4 kg 1.4 kg 1.4 kg
Technical data
Table 10- 27 Frame sizes A, 3-ph. 380 V … 480 V AC, ± 10 % - Part 2

with filter, PT --- --- 6SL3211-1QE18-0AL0
without filter, PT --- --- 6SL3211-1QE18-0UL0
● HO power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW
● HO input current 3.9 A 5A 7.2 A
General values
● Power loss 0.08 kW 0.11 kW 0.15 kW 1)
● Fuse 3NA3 803 (10 A) 3NA3 803 (10 A) 3NA3 805 (16 A)
● Cooling air requirement IP20 5 l/s 5 l/s 5 l/s
PT --- --- 7 l/s
● Weight with filter, IP20 1.5 kg 1.5 kg 1.5 kg
without filter, IP20 1.4 kg 1.4 kg 1.4 kg
with filter, PT --- --- 1.8 kg
without filter, PT --- --- 1.7 kg
Technical data
Table 10- 28 Frame sizes B, 3-ph. 380 V … 480 V AC, ± 10 % - Part 1

with filter, PT --- --- 6SL3211-1QE21-8AL0
without filter, PT --- --- 6SL3211-1QE21-8UL0
● LO power 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
● LO input current 10.8 A 14 A 19.1 A
● LO output current 10.2 13.2 18
● HO power 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW
● HO output current 7.7 10.2 13.2
General values
● Power loss 0.14 kW 0.19 kW 0.27 kW 1)
● Fuse 3NA3 805 (16 A) 3NA3 807 (20 A) 3NA3 810 (25 A)
● Cooling air requirement IP20 9 l/s 9 l/s 9 l/s
PT 9 l/s 9 l/s 9 l/s
● Weight with filter, IP20 3.1 kg 3.1 kg 3.1 kg
without filter, IP20 2.9 kg 2.9 kg 2.9 kg
with filter, PT --- --- 3.6 kg
without filter, PT --- --- 3.4 kg
Technical data
Feature Version
Line voltage 3-ph. 660 V … 690 V AC ± 10%
The permissible line voltage depends on the installation altitude
The power units can also be operated with a minimum voltage of 500 V –10 %. In this
case, the power is linearly reduced as required.
Power factor λ 0.9
Pulse frequency 16 kHz
Braking method DC braking, energy recovery (up to 100% of the output power)
● without power reduction LO operation: 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
● with power reduction HO/LO up to 60 °C (140° F), for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual
Relative humidity < 95% RH - condensation not permissible
chemical substances
Shock and vibration Do not allow the inverter to fall and avoid it being subject to hard shocks. Do not
install the inverter in an area where it could be continuously subject to vibration.
● with power reduction up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual.
Standards CE, C-TICK
Technical data
Table 10- 29 PM260 frame size D, 3-ph. 660 V AC… 690 V, ± 10% (500 V - 10%)
Order number with filter 6SL3225- 0BH27-5AA1 6SL3225- 0BH31-1AA1 6SL3225- 0BH31-5AA1
without filter 6SL3225- 0BH27-5UA1 6SL3225- 0BH31-1UA1 6SL3225- 0BH31-5UA1
● LO power 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
General values
● Power loss No data No data No data
● Fuse 25 A 35 A 35 A
motor connection 2.5 … 16 mm2 2.5 … 16 mm2 2.5 … 16 mm2
● without filter 22 kg 22 kg 22 kg
Table 10- 30 PM260 frame size F, 3-ph. 660 V AC… 690 V, ± 10% (500 V - 10%)
Order number with filter 6SL3225- 0BH32-2AA1 6SL3225- 0BH33-0AA1 6SL3225- 0BH33-7AA1
without filter 6SL3225- 0BH32-2UA1 6SL3225- 0BH33-0UA1 6SL3225- 0BH33-7UA1
General values
● Power loss No data No data No data
● Fuse 63 A 80 A 100 A
● without filter 56 kg 56 kg 56 kg
Technical data
Index
8 C
87 Hz characteristic, 50 CDS, 267
Centrifuge, 220, 223, 225, 229
Changing parameters
A BOP-2, 76
STARTER, 89
Adjustable parameters, 16
Characteristic
Alarm, 240, 279, 282
ECO mode, 206
Alarm buffer, 240, 282
Linear, 204
Alarm code, 282
parabolic, 205
Alarm history, 283
square-law, 205
Alarm time, 240, 282
Textile applications, 206
Alarm value, 282
Clockwise, 193
Ambient temperature, 66, 212
Command Data Set, 267
Analog inputs, 71
Command source, 67, 192
Analog outputs, 71
Default setting, 68
Functions of the, 103
Selecting, 18, 194
Automatic mode, 267
Commissioning
Automatic restart, 231
Guidelines, 64
Compound braking, 225, 226
Compressor, 203
B
Configuration Manual, 13
Back up Connectors, 20
Parameter, 276 Control Data Set, CDS, 267
Back up parameters, 276 Control mode, 19, 67
Basic Operator Panel, 26 Control panel, 89
Baud rates, 84 Control Units, 25
BF (Bus Fault), 280 Control word, 149
BICO block, 20 Control word 1, 149
BICO parameters, 21 Control word 3, 150
BICO technology, 21 Conveyor belt, 223
Binectors, 20 Counterclockwise, 193
Block, 20 Crane, 220, 229
Blocking protection, 215, 216 Current output, 71
Boost parameter, 207
BOP-2, 26
Display, 74 D
Menu, 75
Data backup, 91, 92, 94
Braking
Data transfer, 91, 92, 94
Regenerative, 229
Date, 240
Braking chopper, 227
DC braking, 150, 223, 224
Braking method, 222
DC link overvoltage, 214
Braking resistor, 227
DC link voltage, 214
Break loose torque, 19
Default settings, 68
Bus fault, 280
Default terminal settings, 70
Index
Delta connection (Δ), 50, 66 Function Manual for Safety Integrated, 13

Digital inputs, 70 Functions
Digital outputs, 70 BOP-2, 75
Functions of the, 98, 99 Fan applications, 192
DIP switch Heating/air-conditioning systems, 192
Analog input, 101 HVAC, 192
Bus address, 107 Overview, 191
Direction reversal, 193 Pump applications, 192
Display parameters, 16 Technological, 192
Down ramp, 18
Download, 63, 91, 92, 94
Drive Data Set, DDS, 270 G
Drive Data Sets, 270
Getting Started, 13
DTC (Digital Time Clock), 242
Grinding machine, 220, 223, 225
GSD (Generic Station Description), 144
E
Electromagnetic interference, 51 H
Energy recovery option, 214, 229
Hardware configuration, 143
Expert list, 90
Hardware Installation Manual, 13
Extruders, 204
Hoisting gear, 204, 220, 227, 229
Horizontal conveyor, 225
Horizontal conveyors, 203, 227
F
Hotline, 11
Factory settings, 69, 70, 96 HW Config, 143
Restoring the, 96 HW Config (hardware configuration), 143
Fans, 203, 220
Fault, 280
Acknowledgment, 286, 287 I
Fault buffer, 240, 286
I2t monitoring, 210
Fault case, 286
Identifying motor data, 77, 88, 208, 209
Fault code, 286
Imax controller, 213
Fault history, 287
Inclined conveyors, 204, 220, 227
Fault time, 240, 286
IND, 116, 155
received, 286
Inserting the BOP-2, 74
removed, 286
Inserting the operator panel, 74
Fault value, 286
Installation, 13
FFC (Flux Current Control), 205
Installation options, 36
Field weakening, 50
Intelligent Operator Panel, 26
Filter, 32
Interfaces, 65, 70
Firmware update, 280
Interlock, 22
Firmware version, 18
Inverter busy
Flow control, 235
Inverter busy, 17
Flying restart, 229, 230
Inverter control, 192
Follow-on parameterization, 16
IOP, 26
Formatting, 92
Frame size, 28
Frame sizes, 28
J
FS (Frame Size), 28
Function blocks JOG function, 200
Free, 236, 239
Index
K OFF command, 193

ON command, 193
KTY 84 temperature sensor, 71
Online connection, 85
Operating instructions, 13
Operator panel
L
Display, 74
LED Menu, 75
BF, 280 Operator Panel, 26
RDY, 280 Output reactor, 32, 34
LED (light emitting diode), 279 Overload, 19, 213
Level control, 235 Overview
Line filter, 32, 34 Manuals, 13
Line reactor, 32, 34 Software tool, 13
Overview of the functions, 191
Overvoltage, 214
M
Manual mode, 267
P
Manuals
Download, 13 Page index, 116, 155
Overview, 13 Parameter assignment, 15
Maximum cable length, 164 Parameter channel, 113, 152
Maximum current controller, 213 IND, 116, 155
Maximum speed, 18, 67, 201 PKE, 113, 153
Memory card, 276 PWE, 117, 156
Formatting, 92 Parameter identifier, 113, 153
MMC, 92 Parameter index, 116, 155
SD, 92 Parameter Manual, 13
Menu parameter number
BOP-2, 75 Offset of,
Operator panel, 75 Parameter types, 16
Minimum speed, 18, 67, 201 Parameters
MMC, 26 Important, 69
MMC (memory card), 92 Writing parameters, 17
MMC memory card, 26 PC Connection Kit, 26
MOP (motorized potentiometer), 196 PDO services, 173
MotID (motor data identification), 77, 88 PID controller, 235
Motor connection, 50 PKE, 113, 153
Motor control, 192 PKW (parameter, ID, value), 147
Motor data, 66 PLC functionality, 22
Motor rating plate, 66 Power failure, 231
Motor temperature sensor, 71, 212 Power Module, 25, 28
Motorized potentiometer, 196 Technical data, 304, 310, 313, 316, 320
Power Modules
Technical data, 317
N Power ON Reset, 280
Pressure control, 235
Network management (NMT service), 170
Process interfaces, 70
No-load monitoring, 215, 216
PROFIdrive, 147
Protection functions, 192
PTC temperature sensor, 71, 211
O
PTC/KTY 84, 71
Object directory, 181 Pump, 192
Index
PWE, 117, 156 Stall protection, 215, 216

PZD (process data), 147 Star connection (Y), 50, 66
STARTER, 89
Starting characteristics
Q Optimization, 206
Status messages, 192
Questions, 11
Status word, 149
Status word 1, 151
Status word 3, 152
R
Storage medium, 91
Ramp-down time, 18, 67, 202 STW (control word), 147
Rampup time, STW1 (control word 1), 149
RDY (Ready), 280 STW3 (control word 3), 150
Reactors, 32 Sub-chassis components, 34
Real time clock, 240 Sub-D connection, 141
Real Time Clock, 240, 242 Subindex, 116, 155
Regenerative power, 220 Suggested improvement, 11
Relay outputs, 70 Support, 11
Removing the BOP-2, 74 Synchronous motor, 205
Removing the operator panel, 74 System components, 34
Reset System runtime, 219
Parameter, 96
RTC (Real Time Clock), 240, 242
Run sequence, 236 T
Runtime group, 236
Technical data
Power Module, 304, 310, 313, 316, 320
Technology controller, 150, 235
S
Telegram types, 145, 147
Saw, 223, 225 Temperature calculation, 212
Scaling, 102 Temperature measurement via KTY, 211
of the analog output, 104 Temperature measurement via PTC, 211
SD, 144 Temperature monitoring, 210, 211, 212
SD (memory card), 92 Temperature monitoring via ThermoClick, 211
SD memory card, 26 ThermoClick temperature sensor, 211
SDO Protocol Cancel Transfer Protocol, 179 Time, 242
SDO Protocol Read, 179 Time control, 242
SDO protocols, 178 Time slices, 236
SDO services, 178 Time switch, 242
Series commissioning, 63, 91 Torque monitoring
Setpoint calculation, 192, 201 Speed-dependent, 215, 216
Setpoint source, 67, 192 Two-wire control, 193
Selecting, 195
Selecting, 195
Setting-up the PG/PC interface, 83 U
Short-circuit monitoring, 211
UL-certified fuses, 295
Signal interconnection, 20, 21, 23
Unwinders, 229
SIMATIC, 141
Up ramp, 18
Sine-wave filter, 32
Upload, 63, 91, 92, 93
SIZER, 13
Using the factory settings, 68
Software tool
Download, 13
Overview, 13
Index
V
V/f control, 19, 67, 204
additional characteristics), 205
Vector control, 19, 67
Sensorless, 208
Vertical conveyors, 204, 220, 227
Voltage boost, 19, 207
voltage input
bipolar, 71
Voltage output, 71
W
Winders, 204, 229
Wire-break monitoring, 211
Write PDO, 176
Z
ZSW (status word), 147
ZSW1 (status word 1), 151
ZSW3 (status word 3), 152
Siemens AG We reserve the right to make technical
Industry Sector changes.
Drive Technologies © Siemens AG 2010
Motion Control Systems
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120

Biến Tần Simen Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biến Tần Simen Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biến Tần Simen Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SINAMICS G120

Frequency inverters with the Control Units

Operating Instructions · 07/2010

07/2010 Edition, firmware V4.3.2

Siemens AG A5E02430659B AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2009,

4.4 Commissioning with the BOP-2 .................................................................................................. 74

6.3.3.5 Communication procedure.........................................................................................................130

7.6.1.2 Additional characteristics for the V/f control.............................................................................. 205

9.4 List of warnings ..........................................................................................................................285

Who requires the operating instructions and what for?

What is described in the operating instructions?

Mistakes and improvements

If you have further questions

1.2 Guide through this manual

 %DVLFV ① Should you be unfamiliar with assigning

All information relating to the commissioning

 $GDSWLQJWRDSSOLFDWLRQ ④  Commissioning (Page 63)

2QWKHKDUGGLVNRI\RXU3&3*RURQWKH ⑤  Back-up the settings and transfer

 0DLQWHQDQFHDQGGLDJQRVWLF ⑥ Information regarding the maintenance and

1.3 Overview of documentation

Table 1- 1 Documentation for SINAMICS G120

Planning and configuring Installation and Commissioning Service and maintenance

This is how you find the software and the manuals

SIZER You obtain SIZER on a DVD

1.4 Adapting inverter to application

1.4.1 General basics

Adapting the inverter to the drive task

Use the factory settings (where possible)

Use quick commissioning (for simple, standard applications)

Change protection for setting parameters

1.4.3 Parameters with follow-on parameterization

1.4.4 Parameter changes, which subsequently result in internal calculations

1.5 Frequently required parameters

Parameters that in many cases help

Table 1- 2 How to switch to commissioning mode or restore the factory setting

Table 1- 3 How to determine the firmware version of the Control Unit

Table 1- 6 This is how you parameterize the up and down ramps

Table 1- 7 This is how you set the closed-loop type

1.6 Extended scope for adaptation

1.6.1 BICO technology: basic principles

Principle of operation of BICO technology

Inputs Parameter Output

MOP enable (higher)

Figure 1-1 Example of a BICO block: Motorized potentiometer (MOP)

Binectors and connectors

Definition of BICO technology

BICO block rxxxx %LQHFWRUFRQQHFWRU

Figure 1-3 BICO symbols

1.6.2 BICO technology: example

Example: Shifting a basic PLC functionality into the inverter

p20161 = 5 p20159 = 5,0 [s]

Figure 1-4 Example: Signal interconnection for interlock

Table 1- 9 Parameterizing an interlock

Explanation of the example using the ON/OFF1 command

Figure 1-5 Interconnect the BICO block DI 0 and ON/OFF1 command

The setting P0701 = 0 means that this interconnection is disconnected.

Figure 1-6 Disconnect the default interconnection: p0840[0] = 0

Figure 1-7 Interconnecting two BICO blocks by setting p0840[0] = 20031

Principle when connecting BICO blocks using BICO technology

Main components of the inverter

%DVLFV ① Should you be unfamiliar with assigning

$GDSWLQJWRDSSOLFDWLRQ ④  Commissioning (Page 63)

2QWKHKDUGGLVNRI\RXU3&3*RURQWKH ⑤  Back-up the settings and transfer

0DLQWHQDQFHDQGGLDJQRVWLF ⑥ Information regarding the maintenance and

BICO block rxxxx %LQHFWRUFRQQHFWRU

8 9 : 3(

/ಬ /ಬ /ಬ 3(ಬ /ಬ /ಬ /ಬ 3(ಬ

8 9 : 3( 8 9 : 3(

 Star connection (Y) 8 9 :

The motor rating plate provides 8